Home

CircuitMaker User Manual

1. si Eire PST E T 0 Vos F WL Wa WE ME e i q0Y q0w 50 Ez Fs tav cag RE I 1594004 LSE G04 259931 207 2904 Rai p 30E GL einer baie y enhance the appearance of your schematic Title Block Use the Title Block option see Figure 12 5 for an example to add a title box to the lower right corner of the page The title block contains the following fields Name Title Revision ID Date and Page The Name and Title fields expand in height to handle multiple rows of text If you leave the Name or Title fields blank CircuitMaker excludes them from the title block The title block also expands in width according to the amount of text that you enter You can print the title block on the first page on the last page or on all pages 12 236 Chapter 12 Options Menu Additionally you can print the full title block on the first page and a reduced title block that is one that does not include the Name and Title fields on subsequent pages Border Use this option to quickly locate devices by displaying a coordinate grid system around your schematic see Figure 12 5 for an example For example suppose you want to find a device that you know is located in the B 5 grid square By drawing an imaginary line from the letter B and the number 5 on the margins of the schematic the intersection of these lines locates the grid square containing the device To add a border to your schematic drawing 1 Choo
2. STRONG HI_IMPEDANCE Parameters lt output gt Name of or variable index to the output pin lt expression gt Any expression to be used directly as a strength Use The state of an output pin is determined by its level and its strength Use the STRENGTH command to set the strength of one or more output pins Value State Strength STRONG ZERO rol_param STRONG ONE roh_param HI IMPEDANCE N A r3s_param lt expression gt N A lt expression gt Notes Output pins can be specified by using the output pin name or by an integer variable the contains the index of an output pin Pin and variable names cannot be mixed in the same STATE statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names See Also REALS STATE STATE_BIT LEVEL Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 373 CircuitMaker PRO only SUPPLY _MIN_MAX Tests supply pins for min and max supply voltage violations General Form SUPPLY_MIN_MAX lt min value gt lt max value gt Parameters lt min value gt Minimum recommended power supply voltage lt max value gt Maximum recommended power supply voltage Use The SUPPLY_MIN_MAX function checks the voltage difference between the power and ground pins defined in PWR_GND_PINS If the WARN flag is set in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box and the voltage difference pwr_param gnd_param is less than lt min value gt or greater than lt max value gt a warning will be
3. lt c0icicssaccasssaccsonscuestsnoacnansveasonadvasnsnssennae 16 7 Editing Pin Information ias 16 8 Element List and Edit Bula oca 16 9 Element Definitions ta 16 10 Tutorial Creating a Device Symbol 0oooccccccccccccccccccccconncccncnnnanancncnnnnn 16 14 Expanding an Existing Macro Device ooconocccccnnoncconcccccnonnnannnnnos 16 17 Creating Macro Devices with Internal Circuitry ooooccnnnccccnnicccccnnno 16 19 Working with SPICE Models c oooooocccccccocccocococcncconanananancnnccnnnnnanccnnnnnnns 16 21 Editing SPICE Models with a Text Editor cccccccsesecsecsesecsecseeessesseeesseseees 16 21 Editing SPICE Models in CircuitMaker ceccccccseesccsecnecseeseeeseeeessesneeseeaees 16 22 Editing SPICE Subcircuits aiii 16 27 Model and Subcircuit Linking Files oooconcnncnnnnnnnnccocnocnornoonocnconco nc ncnncnnno 16 32 Contents xviii Creating New SPICE Models with Parameter Passing 16 37 General Form Generic Model cccccecsscsscsccsccecsececsecseseeseesusaesecsecsecaesetens 16 37 General Form Alias da 16 37 Editing Digital Model Parameters ooococccnncccccccccccccnnncnnanncnnnnnnnnann nono 16 39 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode Creating New SimCode Devices ooooooccccccccccooccccccccnnnnnncnncncnnnnnnnnnanonoss 17 2 The PALS 74 EXPO a 17 4 Editing Device Data for SimCode Devices cccccccccccccccnnnnnnnannnanonnnnns 17 8 SimCode Language Definition ooooooccccccn
4. Example EVENT present_time le 6 return in lus EXIT Terminates SimCode execution General Form EXIT 17 336 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Use The EXIT statement is used to terminate SimCode execution Notes This is the last line of a SimCode model but it may also be placed at other locations to abort execution of remaining SimCode EXT_TABLE Sets output logic states based on extended truth table General Form EXT_TABLE lt line gt lt input pin gt lt input pin gt lt output pin gt lt output pin gt lt input state gt lt input state gt lt output state gt lt output state gt Parameters lt line gt Variable into which the line number used in the table is placed lt input pin gt Name of the input pin lt output pin gt Name of the output pin lt input state gt State of the individual inputs lt output state gt State of the individual outputs based on input conditions Use The EXT_TABLE statement is an extended truth table function used to set the level and strength of the specified outputs Valid input states are 0 low input voltage is lt vil_param 1 high input voltage is gt vih_param 4 low to high transition v high to low transition X don t care what input voltage is Valid output states are L ZERO set output level to vol_param H ONE set output level to voh_param Z UNKNOWN set output level to v3s_p
5. Marks the end of the net Note that net descriptions are distinguished from component descriptions by the use of rounded rather than square brackets CircuitMaker to TraxMaker TraxMaker is a powerful pcb layout and autorouting program from MicroCode Engineering Inc It is fully compatible with CircuitMaker and the products are designed to work together seamlessly giving you a complete start to finish design system Because CircuitMaker and TraxMaker are tightly integrated you can automatically export a TraxMaker netlists open TraxMaker define a keep out area load the netlist place and arrange the component footprints all with the TraxMaker Button in CircuitMaker To take a schematic from CircuitMaker into TraxMaker 1 Choose File gt Export gt PCB Netlist or click the TraxMaker button on the Toolbar to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 7 3 apt PCE Hoi Figure 7 3 Not only can you export a TraxMaker netlist but you can also launch TraxMaker load the netlist and automatically define a keep out area and place the components all from within CircuitMaker Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 187 7 188 2 Choose TraxMaker from the drop down list it is chosen for you by default 3 From the TraxMaker Options group box specify the options as described in the following sections Run TraxMaker and Load Netlist Use this option to export the currently opened CKT file to netlist NET format run TraxMaker
6. OR From the Windows 3 1x Program Manager click once on the CircuitMaker icon to select it In Program Manager select File gt Properties Add the word PROJECT onto the string in the Target edit field For example o cirmaker exe project then click OK This enables the Select Project dialog box explained later in this section Run CircuitMaker The Select Project dialog box appears allowing you to find the individual project directories Browse the directories to find one individual s Cirmaker dat file and click OK When CircuitMaker has loaded select File gt Prefer ences then click Directories and Files Change the Circuit Directory path to that of the project directory This is where that individual s circuit files CKT will be stored If there is a copy of the User lib file in the project directory change the User Library File path to that of the individual s directory This allows the individual to make changes additions to the Macros library Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 27 14 If there is a copy of the Models directory in the project directory change the Model Directory path to that of the individual s directory This allows the individual to make changes additions to the SPICE models and subcircuits 15 Click OK to exit the Directories and Files dialog box then click OK in the Preferences dialog box to save these changes 16 Exit CircuitMaker 17 CircuitMaker i
7. Use the Trace feature The Trace feature is used in digital simulation to view the logic states of all the wires in the circuit View the node numbers for the circuit Viewing the node numbers could help identify opens and shorts in a circuit Access the Analog Options dialog box Change the enabled disabled status of the analog analyses which limits the student to analysis types you specify The student can however change settings of enabled analyses and run modified simulations Save the circuit This cannot be checked if the Auto Save Circuit after Hint or Replacement option is checked see Hints and Replace ments Hints and Replacements Each time the student presses the Replace Device or Display Hint button in the Access Faults dialog box a flag is set for the selected device If you check the Auto Save Circuit after Hint or Replace ment option the circuit is saved automatically each time the buttons are pressed preserving the student s work Option Lets Instructor Hints Displayed View the number of hints that the student viewed Devices Displayed View the number of devices the student replaced Select Replaced Devices View or highlight all devices that were replaced Select Hinted Devices View all devices for which the student viewed a hint Select Faulty Devices View all devices that have fault data in them whether the faults are enabled for that device or not Replace Selected Devices
8. 3 Type the Label Value 220K This manual also includes some special terminology words that are either unique to schematic capture and circuit simulation or have some specific meaning within CircuitMaker Such terms are italicized when first introduced Using On line Help You can access CircuitMaker s on line Help file CIRMAKER HLP in several ways From the Help Menu To access Help from the Help menu 1 Choose Help gt CircuitMaker Help Topics 2 Choose the Contents tab to see an overview of all Help topics arranged hierarchically OR Choose the Index tab then enter a keyword to look up a specific Help topic OR Choose the Find tab to find Help topics that contain the word you are looking for From a Dialog Box To access context sensitive Help 1 Open a dialog box then press F1 to display Help specifically tailored for that dialog box From the Toolbar To get context sensitive Help about a particular device or item you have placed in the work space 1 Click the Help button on the Toolbar 2 Click theitem From the Help File Directly Even when CircuitMaker is not running you can view the Help file by double clicking its icon in the CircuitMaker program group Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 30 Watching the On line Tutorial For a quick overview of CircuitMaker double click the CM Tutorial icon The ScreenCam demonstrations illustrate the major areas of schematic drawing and simulation
9. mntymx if supply pins not on symbol Sets the device s Pin Data list What it Does Declares the model statement Names the model digital SimCode models begin with the letter A Model type for a digital SimCode model Points to file containing the device s digital SimCode MODEL_PATH is a shortcut to the Models directory as specified in the CircuitMaker prefer ences Names the device s digital SimCode function Contains ASCII data for the READ_DATA function optional Passes the device s Digital Model Parameters into SimCode this must appear exactly as shown 3 Create a digital SimCode model for the device You can do this in any ASCII text editor such as Notepad If using a word processor be sure to save the file in text only format The file can be given any name and extension as long as it matches the file name listed in the file parameter in the MOD file Multiple digital SimCode device models can be placed in the same file Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 319 CircuitMaker PRO only The simplest process is to start by making a copy of an existing device preferably one which is similar in either function or characteristics and make modifications to the SimCode as needed Some examples of SimCode devices are included in a file called SIMCODE TXT for your reference 4 Test the new device in CircuitMaker by creating a simple circuit to test its functionality Test on
10. B val xval 2 X A amp amp B Y 100 if X 1 then Y FFFFFFFE A X 8 1 if X 1 then A 1 if X 2 then A 0 B X 8 if X 1 then B 9 if X 2 then B 10 Cre ESS if X 1 then C 0 if X 2 then C 0 DES 2 gt gt X if X 1 then D 1 if X 2 then D 0 E X lt lt 2 1f X 1 then E 4 if X 2 then E 8 F 2 lt lt X if X 1 then F 4 if X 2 then F 8 IF A gt B THEN IF A lt 2 amp amp B gt 3 THEN IF C lt 2 X gt 4 THEN See Also MATH FUNCTIONS OUTPUTS Declares output pins pins that drive or load the circuit General Form OUTPUTS lt output pin gt lt output pin gt Parameters lt output pin gt Name of the output pin Use The OUTPUTS data type is used to define the pins which affect the operation of circuitry external to the device These generally include input output I O and power pins Input and power pins are included in this list because their presence contitutes a load on the driving circuitry Notes Output pin names must begin with a letter and be defined before they are used Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 357 CircuitMaker PRO only Example OUTPUTS VCC_LD PRE_LD DATA_LD CLK_LD CLR_LD ON 0 See Also INPUTS IO_PAIRS PWR_GND_PINS PARAM_SET Determines if a predefined SimCode param has been set General Form PARAM_SET lt param var gt Parameters lt param var gt SimCode model definition parame
11. CircuitMaker PRO only Variable tp_param tt_param ld_param drv_param i_param user_param warn_param init_sim tran_pin 17 344 INTEGERS Declares integer variables and arrays General Form INTEGERS lt var gt lt var gt Parameters lt var gt Name of the variable Use The INTEGERS data type is used to define integer variables and arrays Notes Integer variables and arrays must begin with a letter and be defined before they are used Integer arrays are defined by following the array name with a left bracket an integer number which defines the size of the array and a right bracket Integer arrays can be set and or used in expressions The following are reserved SimCode integer variables which do not need to be declared Use Digital Model Parameter Spice Option tplh hl index Propagation Delays TPMNTYMX ttlh hl index Transition Times TIMNTYMX LOAD index Input Loading LDMNTYMX DRIVE index Output Drive DRVMNTYMX ICC index Device Current IMNTYMX USER index User Defined USERMNTYMX Warning messages WARN flag SIMWARN 1 during simcode init N A N A TRAN_xx pin index N A N A The first six variables in this list are expected to have a value of 1 2 or 3 These values represent an index into the min typ max arrays Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Value Represent 1 Index to minimum value 2 Index to typical value 3 Index to maximum value The Digital Model Par
12. Figure 6 10 Use this dialog box to set up an AC Analysis AC sweep 4 Enter the AC Analysis settings you want see the following table select the Enabled check box and then choose OK Sweep Option What it Means Linear Total number of Test Points in the sweep Decade Number of Test Points per decade in the sweep Octave Number of Test Points per octave in the sweep 5 Run the simulation Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 135 12 00 Re f Ground Figure 6 12 The Multimeter showing the DC operating point of a point in the circuit 6 136 AL Seago lada Moi a SEE TE Wb Td as SE The 59 Bie LEFT 7 7 Ba IEc d 0 000 T wg Pod ete O o n or pir tll TT Hit SHR He ie a Il i 1 i 101 da r tii PEE a og Figure 6 11 An AC Analysis waveform The waveform in Figure 6 11 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 10 Notice that the x axis represents frequency in a log scale The waveform represents the magnitude of the circuit s output voltage in decibels db See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms DC Operating Point Analysis Operating Point Analysis generates data similar to the readings of a DC multimeter It determines the DC bias of the entire circuit with inductors shorted and capacitors opened and determines l
13. Unknown or Tristate illustrated at left Choose Simulation gt Scope Probe beforehand to have CircuitMaker chart the waveforms you see with the Probe Tool in the Waveforms window To inject a state into a node 1 Touch the tip of the Probe Tool on a wire or device pin 2 Click the left mouse button The state of that node changes to be opposite of what it was a one becomes a zero and a zero becomes a one To inject a tristate signal 1 Hold down the Shift key and click Note In both cases if the node is driven by some other device the state change is immediately overridden because the device drives the node back to its original state You can also use the Probe Tool to flip switches while the simulation is running Trace Button Click the Trace button or press F11 to turn the trace feature on or off Use Trace to debug your circuit or to simply provide a convenient way of observing operation of the circuit Trace shows the state of all nodes within the circuit as it runs by drawing the wires in different colors to show the logic state of each wire A wire at a high state is red a wire at a low state is blue and a tristate wire is green Note Because the wires in the circuit will be redrawn each time they change states turning this option on may slow down the simulation speed Waveforms Button In digital mode clicking on the Waveforms button will open or close the digital Waveforms window You can also choose S
14. ik Lo 100 ik Lik idk ee SS pay Peirpelaro Figure 6 32 This Impedance Plot shows impedance seen by a two terminal source over frequency The waveform in Figure 6 32 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit and making an adjustment to the AC Analysis window as shown in Figure 6 31 See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms Using XSpice for Windows This section provides an in depth look at CircuitMaker s XSpice for Windows how to see the information it displays more closely and the errors and warning messages associ ated with it To view the information in XSpice for Windows 1 Click the Run button to start the simulation Notice the Run icon is replaced by a Stop Sign and the interactive XSpice simulation window appears showing the progress of the simulation If you have added Run Time Test Points to the circuit the corresponding waveforms are displayed as the data is collected otherwise the progress of the simulation is presented as a simple bar graph Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 157 6 158 Figure 6 33 shows an example of an XSpice simulation window where both Transient and AC analyses are enabled but only AC Analysis has a corresponding Run Time Test Point Figure 6 33 The XSpice window shows the progress of the simulation Select the Stop When Simulation Is Complete check box if you want XSpice to p
15. vil_param lt vil gt vih_param lt vih gt Notes In order to more accurately model the actual switching characteristics of a digital input VIL and VIH are not generally set to their specified databook values The exception is the case of devices with a specified hysteresis such as the 74LS14 Typically the hysteresis of a digital device is small in the order of 100mV but never OV The vil_param and vih_param values set by VIL_VIH_VALUE are overridden by any values set for VIL value and VIH value in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box Example VIL_VIH_VALUE 1 25 1 35 See Also REALS VIL_VIH_PERCENT 17 378 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only VOL_VOH_MIN Sets VOH and VOL relative to power and ground General Form VOL_VOH_MIN lt vol offset gt lt voh offset gt lt min voh vol gt Parameters lt vol offset gt Voltage offset which must be applied to ground pin voltage to get vol lt voh offset gt Voltage offset which must be applied to power pin voltage to get voh lt min voh vol gt Minimum allowed difference between voh and vol Use VOL and VOH do not use a min typ max array to select their values but must be declared explicitly for each digital device The VOL_VOH_MIN statement sets the VOL and VOH parameters of the device as follows vol_param gnd_param lt vol offset gt voh_param pwr_param lt voh offset gt Notes In order to more accur
16. 1 placing devices such as resistors transistors power supplies and grounds in the workspace 2 repositioning devices 3 editing devices with precise values and param eters 4 deleting devices if necessary 5 wiring devices together 6 simulating and testing the circuit Using the Toolbar You can perform most CircuitMaker tasks using the buttons on the Toolbar which is conveniently located at the top of the workspace Open Print Wire Tool Delete Tool Rotate 90 Save Arrow Tool Text Tool Zoom Tool Mirror Run Stop Trace Parts Macro TraxMaker DIO Ae Digital Analog Step Probe Tool Waveforms Search Help The table on the following page briefly describes each button and tool on the Toolbar Generally a Tool lets you apply a specific action whereas a Button performs a general function For more details about the drawing and editing tools see Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics For more information about the simulation tools see Chapters 5 Digital Logic Simulation and Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Chapter 2 Getting Started Tool or Button Arrow Tool Wire Tool Text Tool Delete Tool Zoom Tool Rotate 90 Mirror Digital Analog Reset Step Run Stop Probe Tool Trace Waveforms Parts Search Macro Lets You Select move and edit devices wires and text Also used to place wires when Arrow Wire option is checked Place wires to connect devices in th
17. 384 ASCHIOUTPUT 6 46 6 47 ASIN 17 34 Assigning new HotKeys 4 9 Assignment operator 17 40 ATAN 17 12 17 34 Auto designation prefix 17 9 Auto Refresh 12 1 Auto Repeat 4 12 12 1 Auto Wire Routing 4 14 9 7 AUTOPARTIAL 15 10 Autoplacement controlling from CircuitMaker 7 14 B Background changing color of 13 1 Background required user 1 1 BADMOS3 15 8 BEGIN 17 6 17 25 17 64 Bill of Materials excluding from 4 31 exporting 7 1 Binary output 6 47 Bitwise operators 17 40 BJTs 15 25 Black Box 11 3 Board size 7 14 Bode plotter 6 20 Boolean expressions 15 8 15 21 BOOLH 15 8 15 21 BOOLL 15 8 15 21 BOOLT 15 8 15 21 Breakpoints 5 8 5 9 Breaks on page moving 12 3 showing 12 3 Browsing devices 4 7 Bus connection wires 4 18 changing angle 4 19 show bus labels 4 19 specifying number for 4 18 wiring together by number 4 19 Bus Data 4 26 4 29 6 6 17 8 editing 4 26 terminal devices 4 20 Bus Data B 4 29 Bus labels showing 12 3 Bus wires 10 6 changing color of 13 1 cutting 4 18 extending 4 18 joining 4 18 showing bus labels 4 19 specifying number for 4 18 working with 4 17 Buttons on Toolbar introduction 2 4 BYPASS 15 9 Bypass capacitors 6 7 C Cadnetix PCB format 7 11 Calay 90 PCB format 7 11 Calay PCB format 7 11 Calling Technical Support 1 8 Capacitors 15 14 Cascade Windows 13 3 CASE 17 7 17 16 CHANGE_TIME 17 12 17 15 CHANGED_xx 17 12 17 15 17 17 Changing device labels 4 21 waveform o
18. If N is at a higher voltage than N the current flow is negative SPICE uses perfect capacitors that is capacitors with no DC leakage Since all nodes in a circuit must have a DC path to ground you cannot simulate a circuit with capacitors in series as this would completely isolate the nodes that are between the capacitors One solution to this problem is to connect a large value resistor such as 1 gigaohm in parallel with each capacitor to account for the leakage resistance of that capacitor Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics See Also Capacitor Polar Cap Var Capacitor example circuit 555 CKT Semiconductor Capacitors General Form CXXXXXXX N N lt VALUE gt lt MNAME gt lt L LENGTH gt lt W WIDTH gt lt IC INCOND gt Netlist Example Ez 13 0 0 LUE C5 7 0 10UF CMODEL L 12u W 1lu Spice Data Example SD 1 52 M L 10U This is the general form of the Capacitor and allows calcula tion of the capacitance value from strictly geometric informa tion and the specifications of the process If VALUE is specified it defines the capacitance If MNAME is specified then the capacitance is calculated from the process informa tion in the model MNAME and the given LENGTH and WIDTH If VALUE is not specified then MNAME and LENGTH must be specified If WIDTH is not specified then it is taken from the default width given in the model Specify VALUE or MNAME LENGTH and WIDTH not both Inductors General Form LYYY
19. Likewise when you select an element in the Element List it is high lighted in the drawing window Elements at the beginning of the list are drawn first so they are in the back of the drawing bottom layer those at the end of the list are drawn last so they are in front top layer Use the Edit Buffer to add or edit the element text descrip tions contained in the Element List box Use the following buttons to edit and change the order of the elements Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 283 16 284 Button Cut Copy Replace Insert Append Delete What it Does Removes the selected elements from the Element List and places them in the Edit Buffer Places a copy of the selected elements in the Edit Buffer Replaces the selected elements with the contents of the Edit Buffer Inserts the contents of the Edit Buffer immediately before the selected element in the Element List Attaches the contents of the Edit Buffer to the end of the Element List Removes the selected elements from the Element List When editing an element you must observe strict rules of syntax The definition for each element must state the element type attribute line fill color or pin name and a set of xy coordinates A more complete description of the syntax required for each element is given the Element Definitions section which follows Element Definitions When the pen color on an enclosed element is immediately followed by
20. Normally you must copy the lib file that con tains the SUBCKT data to the CircuitMaker Models directory For this LF412C example the MCEMODS2 LIB file is already in the Models directory To add an LF412C operational amplifier 5 pin subcircuit to CircuitMaker 1 Select Macros gt Macro Utilities 2 Select the symbol for the 5 pin opamp Op Amp5 and then click Model Data 3 Click Open and open the library file MCEMODS2 LIB in which the LF412C model resides All of the model and subcircuit names found in this library will be displayed in the list box on the left 4 Click on the LF412C 5 Enter appropriate information about the model in the Description field for example Dual LoOffset LoDrift JFET OpAmp 6 Inthe Pkg Name field enter DIP8 to match the name of the component pattern in TraxMaker 7 Enter pin numbers to match the pad designations of the component in TraxMaker Since the LF412C is a dual op amp you must enter pin numbers for both PART A and PART B click the Up or Down Arrow to switch between the two For PART A the pin numbers should be IN 3 IN 2 V 8 V 4 and Out 1 For PART B the pin numbers should be IN 5 IN 6 V 8 V 4 and Out 7 Note that the V and V power supply pins are the same for both op amps 8 Click Add to include the new reference You can now select the new subcircuit alphabetically from the list of 5 pin op amps Adding Existing Subcircuits to New
21. See Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for more information on parameter passing Bus Data Use this field to specify which pins on the device are connected to the power or ground buses since these pins are not shown on the predefined device packages This field holds up to 2048 characters which is helpful when creating devices with many power and ground pins The general format for this data is busnam pinnum pinnum busnam pinnum pinnum For example on a 74LS83 the Bus Data is DVCC 5 DGND 12 This means that the Vcc bus is connected to pin 5 and the Ground bus is connected to pin 12 The bus data for a 74AC11190 would look like DVCC 15 16 DGND 4 5 6 7 The order in which the buses are listed is not important 4 92 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics To connect these bus pins for Analog simulation or for creating a PCB netlist to export into TraxMaker or other PCB layout program each bus must be defined There are three devices that can be used for this purpose V Ground and Terminal The Bus Data format for these devices is simply busnam where busnam identifies the specific bus For example each Ground device by default contains the Bus Data GND which causes all of the Ground symbols to be tied together in a single node or net Note For simulation purposes the Ground device always equates to Spice node 0 even if the Bus Data changes A V device does not contain any default Bus
22. Show Bus Labels Wiring Bus Connection Wires Together If you assign two bus connection wires the same number and you connect them to the same bus wire or to different bus wires with the same bus wire number they function as though they were connected together Wiring with Connectors CircuitMaker has Input Output and Terminal connectors Connectors Misc that allow you to connect points together without using direct wires All Input Output and Terminal connectors that have the same name will operate as though they were wired together Double click one of these devices to edit its name Input and Output Connectors The Input and Output connectors have different symbols but they are functionally identical These connectors are sometimes a useful alternative to direct wires The following two examples are functionally equivalent The second example uses Input and Output connectors instead of direct wires to connect the inverter outputs to the AND gate inputs Io Figure 4 6a Connections using standard wiring tech niques Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 85 4 86 noir gt EE Figure 4 6b The equivalent connections of Figure 4 6a using Input and Output connectors Terminal Device Power Connections The Terminal connector also called the Terminal device can function like the Input and Output connectors as described previously Additionally the Terminal device can be used to connect to a power b
23. SimCode source function IF THEN Conditionally controls flow through the SimCode WHILE DO Conditionally controls looping in the SimCode GOTO Jumps to a new location in the SimCode GOSUB Jumps to a subroutine in the SimCode RETURN Returns from a subroutine in the SimCode EXIT Terminates SimCode execution Output Text Use these commands to display messages during simulation and debugging PROMPT Pause simulation and display a message MESSAGE Display a message without pausing Debug Use these commands to trace through the execution of the SimCode for debugging purposes STEP_ON Turn on the SimCode trace mode STEP_OFF Turn off the SimCode trace mode Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 329 CircuitMaker PRO only SimCode Language Syntax This section describes each of the language items in detail The following punctuations are used in describing the syntax italics reserved words or emphasis lt gt value variable pin expression optional parameter OH selections you must choose ONE of these parameters xxxx source Identifies the beginning of the SimCode source function General Form lt func name gt source Parameters lt func name gt Name of the SimCode function Use This statement identifies the SimCode function so that it can be called when it is time to simulate this device It must be the first statement of each Digital SimCode device function Notes WXSpice has the
24. Thi 1 i dl iE i H AUNT DOM A i k Ys wr y EPI b e LEA k a a Figure 4 1 CircuitMaker lets you search a library of devices place them wire them together and edit the schematic drawing exactly to your specifications Drawing amp Editing Tools This section describes the buttons on the Toolbar that you will use when placing and wiring components Wire Tool Zoom Tool hk Al F ES H irror Button Rotate 90 Button Arrow Tool Text Tool Delete Tool Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 67 Refresh Screen Tip Right click with the mouse to access helpful pop up menus Contents of the pop up menus will vary depending on where you click Tip Hold down the Alt key while using the Wire Tool to draw a dashed line for example around a section of circuitry to show that it is a logical block This is a device label Tip Using the Text Tool you can add text anywhere in the schematic drawing Arrow Tool Ly Use the Arrow Tool to select items move items flip switches select tools from the Toolbar etc You can double click items with the Arrow Tool to perform many functions such as editing specific devices You can also activate the Arrow Tool by pressing Alt A or right clicking the mouse in the schematic background and choosing Arrow from the pop up menu If you choose Options gt Arrow Wire you can use the Arrow Tool to place a wire by clicking on a device pin Wi
25. Trace mode 17 56 tran_pin 17 28 TRAN_xx 17 17 17 28 TRANMNS 15 10 17 37 TRANMXS 15 10 17 37 Transfer Function Analysis running 6 30 setting up 6 30 Transient Analysis 9 7 Preferences defaults 9 7 running 6 23 setting defaults 6 24 setting up 6 23 setting up tutorial 3 16 troubleshooting failures 15 4 using tutorial 3 19 warnings 15 4 Transistors 15 25 changing label value tutorial 3 5 selecting tutorial 3 3 Transition time 15 10 15 11 17 28 Transmission lines 15 22 Trapezoidal integration 6 48 15 4 TraxMaker 4 27 6 7 loading netlist from CircuitMaker 7 14 PCB netlist format 7 12 running from CircuitMaker 7 14 TREC 17 50 TRec 6 46 15 12 Troubleshooting SPICE convergence 15 1 TRTOL 15 8 TRYTOCOMPACT 15 8 TS 17 52 TSetup 6 46 15 12 tt_param 17 6 17 28 17 37 tthl 17 7 17 18 ttlh 17 7 17 18 TIMNTYMX 15 11 Tutorial watching online 1 11 TW 17 65 Tw 6 46 15 12 U U S Government Restricted Provisions v UIC 6 24 15 3 Unassigning HotKeys 4 10 Undo 10 1 Uniform distribution 6 37 UNKNOWN 17 31 17 53 Update Search List 11 8 Updating 16 bit macro libraries 1 4 32 bit macro libraries 1 3 from previous versions 1 3 model libraries 1 5 pre 5 0 digital circuits for simulation 1 5 URC lines 15 24 User background required 1 1 User Manual about 1 9 USER LIB 11 6 USER LIB file 9 8 user_param 17 28 17 38 USERMNS 17 38 USERMNTYMX 17 28 USERMXS 17 38 Using Online Help double clicking Help file 1 10 fro
26. VIL_VIH_PERCENT lt vil gt lt vih gt Parameters lt vil gt Percentage of the suppy voltage which defines vil lt vih gt Percentage of the suppy voltage which defines vih Use VIL and VIH do not use a min typ max array to select their values but must be declared explicitly for each digital device The VIL_VIH_PERCENT statement sets the VIL and VIH parameters of the device to a percentage of the supply voltage as follows vil_param pwr_param gnd_param lt vil gt vih_param pwr_param gnd_param lt vih gt Notes PWR_GND_PINS must be defined to use this function The values must be greater than 0 and less than 100 The vil_param and vih_param values set by VIL_VIH_PERCENT are overridden by any values set for VIL value and VIH value in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box Example VIL_VIH_PERCENT 33 67 See Also REALS PWR_GND_PINS VIL_VIH_ VALUE Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 377 CircuitMaker PRO only VIL_VIH_VALUE Sets absolute VIL and VIH values General Form VIL_VIH_VALUE lt vil gt lt vih gt Parameters lt vil gt Absolute voltage level which defines vil lt vih gt Absolute voltage level which defines vih Use VIL and VIH do not use a min typ max array to select their values but must be declared explicitly for each digital device The VIL_VIH_ VALUE statement sets the VIL and VIH parameters of the device to absolute voltages as follows
27. What is ADNAN pei cael ssl A A 7 10 PCB Netlist Requirements ccccceecsecscsecsecsesecseeseeseseesecaesaeseesecaeseseesateessesaees 7 10 Exporting to Popular PCB Netlist Formats ccccccscssesessessesesseseesseseseeseeseeeees 7 11 TraxMaker PCB Netlist Format c cccccccsccsecsscsccsecsecseessesecceccsessecaecseesecsaesaeeas 7 12 CircuitMaker to TraxMaker cooooooooocccccccccccocccccccnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 7 13 Run TraxMaker and Load Netlist ccccccccecsecsecseeseeseeeecseeeeeeeseesseeseseesseeaeseeens 7 14 Create Keep Out Layer ociosas nice 7 14 BOO Size MMS esto aa 7 14 Automatically Place COMPONEN S ccesesscssssessesecsessesecsecsesecaecessesseeesesseeeeees 7 14 Chapter 8 Fault Simulation Device 1 Cc osito eee 8 1 PS SiN da 8 1 Pin s Stuck LOW AM ee zatsctesee cep eeatas dat de vicar ose eecedeenmaeieennsnelze 8 1 PIN SVOPEN A A E A A IN 8 2 Adding Device Faults ooooononncccnnnnncccnnoncccnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnc cnn nn nnnnnnnnes 8 3 Enable Device Pauls vs id Di IN O ias 8 3 E AA bales sacistdataleen aaaea RE radiata ees EEEE 8 3 Fa lts and Device Pl A A EEA 8 3 Internal High Low Check BOX8sS oooocoocccoccccocooncnonoccconncnnnnnnnncnn cnn ano nnn nan cnc nan nn na nnncnnnns 8 4 Hint Message A as 8 4 A AA 8 4 Using the Access Faults Dialog BOX oooooocccccnnoccccnnooccccnonccancnnnarnncnnnn nos 8 5 Managing Circuit Faults sinc sccsscsectscwatccacstanesessdete
28. ZERO if vil_param gt 1 UNKNOWN if vil_param lt 1 and vih_param gt 1 ONE if vih_param lt 1 See Also REALS STATE STATE_BIT STRENGTH Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 347 CircuitMaker PRO only LOAD Declares loading characteristics of input pins General Form LOAD lt output gt lt output gt vO lt value gt r0 lt value gt vl lt value gt rl lt value gt io lt value gt t lt value gt Parameters lt output gt Name of or variable index to the output pin lt value gt Real value or variable vO Load voltage for HIGH state input rO Load resistance for HIGH state input vl Load voltage for LOW state input rl Load resistance for LOW state input io Off state load resistance for unused load t Time delay before the load will be applied Use The LOAD command is typically used with input or power pins to provide loading for the driving circuit Since only output pins can provide a load each input must have a corresponding output These are assigned using the IO_PAIRS statement If different loads are required for different inputs multiple LOAD statements may be used Power pins should be placed in a separate LOAD statement which does not include the vl rl load or io Power pins are not included in the IO_PAIRS statement The JO_PAIRS statement must be entered before any LOAD statements that contain io Notes An input load consists of a voltage and a resistance v0 r0 or v1 rl Th
29. oooococoiconicnoccccnoonocnonconnoonconcononrroncnnnnnnnos 3 1 Selecting a ansiosas 3 3 Selecting the Resistors ainda tii teacdds 3 3 Selecting V and Ground Devices c cscccccsssssssscsscsssseessssscseesaeseeseesessaeseesaseas 3 4 Changing Resistor Transistor Label Values ccccccccceesecsecseesesseseesesecsacsesseeatees 3 5 Wiring the Circuit Together ta 3 5 Tutorial 2 Simulating a Digital Circuit oooonooccccccncnnnniccccccnncnananacnccnnnnnnnnns 3 6 Tutorial 3 Analog Analysis sasteriain ibi 3 7 Simple Circuit Analysis sd 3 8 Creating a Simple RC Circuit aan 3 10 Simulating a Simple ACTI a 3 12 Tutorial 4 More Circuit Simulation oooocnnnnnnccccnnnnnnacccccnnnnananccnnnannnnn 3 13 Setting Up the Analysis dai 3 16 Running the Simulation o idos 3 17 Mixed Mode Simulation Example iissiicaseiesaicsossccsavacnatcasessaaerndeastacsnatdaidantavnasdaneseds 3 20 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Drawing and Editing Tools cccccccccscsccccscenenssscencncestedderecemnersanenceseceedencteten 4 1 ATTOWTOOl POOE 4 2 Wire TOO Las aaa aia 4 2 TOXt TOO cerati td bt td tato 4 2 Delete TO aia Pa mn Pe a 4 2 ZOOIN TOO iia ir dt idad 4 3 Contents viii Rotate 90 Button di dan ss 4 3 A A evades cath a ben ack Sah 4 4 Grid Title Block And Borders occccoocccccncccccnncccnnnacanononcnonononinonanaconaninos 4 4 A tna Svea a Gaeta cane iz ud rae UAE AI Sate ee tae utits exstih 4 4 Title BNO get nest Sas seis teeta
30. resistor capacitor inductor DC source transistor beta forward and digital TP propagation delay for digital devices You can enter tolerances as actual values or as percentages For example you can enter a resistor tolerance as 10 or 10 If a 1kohm resistor has a tolerance of 10 it varies between 990 and 1010 ohms With a tolerance of 10 a 1kohm resistor varies between 900 and 1100 ohms Each device is randomly varied independent of the other devices For example if a circuit has two 10kohm resistors and the default tolerance is set to 10 then during the first pass of the simulation one resistor might have a value of 953 ohms and the other one could be 1022 ohms CircuitMaker uses a separate and independent random number to generate the value for each device Overriding with Specific Tolerances To override the default tolerance value with specific toler ance values for specific devices 1 Click Add in the Monte Carlo Setup dialog box 2 Enter the appropriate information in the various fields see Figure 6 30 Figure 6 30 Use this dialog box to enter device and lot tolerances For basic components like resistors capacitors and induc tors leave the Device Parameter field blank because there are no parameters besides the device value Both device and 6 154 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker PRO only lot tolerances are allowed but only one or the other is required CircuitMake
31. see Figure 8 3 to control which resources are available to students when faults are enabled You can also define the default analog fault values The settings specified in this dialog box are saved with the circuit To access the Circuit Faults dialog box 1 Choose File gt Preferences 2 Click the Circuit Fault Data button Circuit Faults CCC A m m m m m m m Figure 8 3 Use this dialog box to control which resources are available to students when faults are enabled The following information describes the features on the Circuit Faults dialog box Disable Circuit Options Use the options in this group box to limit the features available to the student Note Only the items which are not checked are available to the student 8 194 Chapter 8 Fault Simulation By default none of the items are checked meaning that the student has access to all of CircuitMaker s features Option Wire Tool Delete Tool Rotate Mirror Cut Command Copy Command Paste Command Device Replacement Replacement Status Display Hints Script Functions Model Selection Subcircuit Selection Disables Student s Ability To Use the Wire Tool or the Arrow Wire Tool to modify the circuit Use the Delete Tool or the Delete key to modify the circuit Note This does not prevent the student from replac ing a device by clicking on the Replace Device button in the Access Faults dialog box Rotat
32. 1 3 2 i y Si 500mw 40 800m 300MHz GenPurp pka T0 1 H none Change 2N2270 p Si TW 45 14 250MHz Amp pka T 0 39 3 2 1 2N2369 p Si 360mw 15V 200m4 500MH2 Switch pkg T0 18 3 2 1 2023694 p Si 360mw 15 500m 600MH2 Switching pkg T0 18 3 2 1 J Retum Search 2N2484 p Si 360mw 60v 50m 100MHz pkg T0 18 3 2 1 Md Figure 3 2 Use the Device Selection dialog box to pick a device from a large library of devices Notice that in this example the 2N2222A transistor is selected 3 44 Chapter 3 Tutorials Transistor 4 2N2222A 1k Resistor RB 4 2N2222A Resistor RC E a Q 2N22224 Selecting a Transistor Begin the circuit by selecting the 2N2222A transistor Active Components BJTs 1 Select Active Components in the Major Device Class list BJTs in the Minor Device Class list and NPN Trans C in the Device Symbol list Select the 2N2222A transistor in the Model Subcircuit list Click Place to select this device from the library You can also click the Search button on the Toolbar type 2n2222a and click Find to quickly find the part Position the transistor at about mid screen and then click the left mouse button once Notice that the transistor is placed on the workspace and no longer follows the mouse see picture at left Selecting the Resistors The next procedure involves placing two resistors 1 Choose Options gt Auto Repeat make sure the feature has a check mark
33. 15 4 roh_param 17 6 17 18 17 49 rol_param 17 6 17 18 17 49 Rotate 90 Button 4 8 activating 4 3 disabling for instruction 8 7 using 4 3 using tutorial 3 14 using r key instead 4 3 Rotate 90 Command 10 3 Rotating adevice 4 3 aresistor tutorial 3 3 Round rectangles drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definition 16 12 Routing auto wire 4 14 9 7 manual wire 4 15 RSHUNT 15 12 Rubberband effect see Connectivity 2 2 Run TraxMaker and load netlist 7 14 Run Time Test Points 6 43 adding multiple 6 10 description 6 8 placing 6 9 placing tutorial 3 17 removing 6 10 Run Stop Button using 5 4 6 4 using tutorial 3 9 Running a simulation tutorial 3 17 S Save As Command 9 2 Save ASCII Library 11 7 Save Command 9 2 Save Macro 11 2 11 4 Saving a CKT file 2 9 circuit 8 8 prompting before 9 6 Scale 13 2 Scale Factors 17 37 Scale step size effect on Zoom Tool 4 3 Scaling waveforms 6 13 Schematic anatomy of 2 3 drawing tutorial 3 1 Schematic symbol only 5 2 6 2 SCOPE 5 3 5 7 10 10 Scope Probe 5 5 5 7 14 2 Searching devices 4 10 Select All 10 3 SELECT_VALUE 17 12 17 51 Selected items changing color of 13 1 Selecting IC device 3 10 a V and ground device 3 4 a device symbol 3 3 aresistor 3 3 a single item 4 12 a transistor tutorial 3 3 allitems 4 13 colors 13 1 devices 4 12 devices tutorial 3 1 devices from library 4 7 groups of items 4 12 items 4 12 multiple items 4 12
34. 3 9 Projects accessing 1 8 installing multi user 1 6 setting up multiple 1 6 PROM 10 8 PROMPT 17 13 17 43 Prompt to save 9 6 Propagation delays 10 4 15 10 15 11 17 6 17 28 in Digital mode 5 6 showing 12 4 PROPMNS 15 10 17 37 PROPMXS 15 10 17 37 Protel PCB format 7 11 Pulse data editing 6 57 Pulse waveform 6 57 Pulser 5 9 5 10 10 8 PWL 6 58 PWL_TABLE 17 6 17 12 PWR_GND_PINS 17 5 17 6 17 10 17 46 pwr_param 17 49 Index 395 Q QFP packages adding in Symbol Editor 16 7 Quick Connect wiring 4 16 12 1 R rO 17 32 rl 17 32 13s_param 17 49 RAM 10 8 RAMPTIME 15 9 READ_DATA 17 3 17 12 17 47 REALS 17 6 17 10 17 48 Recalling waveforms 6 16 RECOVER 17 7 17 10 17 50 Rectangles drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definition 16 12 Reducing the circuit 4 3 Reference Point setting new 6 5 6 13 Refresh Screen 13 3 automatically 12 1 Registered Trademarks ii Relative comparators 17 40 Relative values 6 28 RELTOL 15 4 15 7 Renumbering new devices 12 1 Reopen Command 9 1 Repeating devices 4 12 12 1 Replace device 8 7 8 9 Replacement status 8 7 Requirements for exporting netlists 7 10 user background 1 1 Reset Button 5 3 6 4 in waveform window 6 17 using in Digital mode 5 3 Resistors 15 13 changing label value tutorial 3 5 selecting tutorial 3 3 Resizing elements and shapes 16 6 Index 396 Restoring factory defaults 2 8 RETURN 17 13 Revert 9 2 to previously saved file 2 10 RF devices
35. 46 running a 3 17 setting up analog 3 16 stop 3 20 warnings 6 46 Simulation menu 14 1 Analyses Setup 14 1 Check Pin Connections 14 1 Digital Options 14 1 Digital Analog Mode 14 1 Display Variable Names 14 2 Display Waveforms 14 2 Reset 14 1 Run 14 2 Scope Probe 14 2 Step 14 2 Trace 14 2 SIMWARN 15 12 17 28 SIN 17 12 17 34 Sine wave data editing 6 52 Single Click Connect 9 6 effect on wiring 4 15 Singular matrix error 15 12 Size 13 3 SmartWires 4 16 Snap to Grid 4 4 12 5 and nudging devices 4 13 Software License Agreement iii Sound changing color of 13 1 SPICE creating new models with parameter passing 16 38 Index 398 data 17 5 17 8 default filenames 16 34 editing subcircuits 16 27 elementary components 16 21 elementary devices 15 13 errors 6 46 exporting as netlist 7 9 exporting as subcircuit 7 9 Gmin stepping failed 15 1 iteration limit reached 15 1 models 16 21 multipliers 4 28 15 2 netlist importing and simulating 9 2 option variables 15 5 options 17 28 17 37 17 49 prefix character s 17 9 prefixes 16 34 singular matrix 15 1 source stepping failed 15 1 subcircuits 16 21 suggested reading 15 30 troubleshooting convergence 15 1 warnings 6 46 working with models 16 21 SPICE Data 4 28 Analysis Probe Name 4 30 Bus Data B 4 29 Description I 4 29 Designation D 4 29 editing 4 28 example of using 4 30 Include File path filename ext 4 29 Label L 4 28 Model M 4 29 Name N 4 2
36. 6 140 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation a E hop vado ECS wa O ieam Tysa M Ue Rele Vales O Une elaia Winks Ue Probe kaal io ssiect culpa ras Case Figure 6 16 Use this dialog box to set up a Parameter Sweep Analysis pai RE Ge A 8 8 eh ERE Ju IA EE O FafeGromd RES Du tir Tera Figure 6 17 Parameter Sweep sweeps a selected compo nent in this example a resistor over a defined range in defined steps and plots the output voltage of the circuit at each of those steps The waveform in Figure 6 17 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 16 Notice that it also plots the input and output voltages for the nominal run meaning all values as they are shown in the schematic Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 141 Relative Values Option If you enable the Use Relative Values option on the Parameter Sweep Setup dialog box the values entered in the Start Value Stop Value and Step Value fields are added to the parameter s default value For example suppose you do a Parameter Sweep with the following conditions e The parameter is a 1kohm resistor e The Start Stop and Step fields are 50 50 and 20 respectively You enable Use Relative Values The following resistor values would be used in the simulation runs 950 970 990 1010 1030 and 1050 CircuitMaker displays the results of the Parameter Sweep in the AC DC or Transient A
37. A 4 5 A a adaitatasnancenct E E A A 4 6 Listing and Selecting Devices urinaria iiiene 4 7 The Graphical Parts Browser ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeesaaeeseeeeesaeeeeenees 4 7 A TO 4 9 Searching for DEVICES a Ne 4 10 Placing DEVICES aaa 4 12 Selec nd DEVICES an tactica a ota 4 12 Nudging A A O sista a a annie 4 13 Wing the CIU lato lt diet idad 4 14 NS A O Seales 4 14 AN A a ea eae saat a 4 15 Quick WIG td nate tacarta eat pastetalgetaiucts Suga esinesteal eas sauanalyntaac wake Depa teuaotis 4 16 Extending Joining and Cutting Wires sucia coticuciicatdbrcci la dai dat 4 16 Moving Devices with Connected Wires ccccsceeceeeeeseesecsecseesseeseeeeseeeaeeaeenes 4 17 Working with BUS Wires ssuscarietisiac rita 4 17 Working with Bus Connection Wires said 4 18 Wiring with CONnectors cooooocccccccccononoccncconannnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnn 4 19 Input and Output Connectors anidan 4 19 Terminal Device Power Connections ccoccccnncccccncccconnccccnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnns 4 20 Labeling the Circuit aa is 4 21 Using the Text Tool to Label oy cache anio enana ne n 4 21 Changing Device Labels eraen eaaa eaea pida dianas tai 4 21 Editing DSMICOS estoi ai io i a E ai EE 4 22 BEN EAE A E AE A EN 4 22 Label adas 4 23 A badstetetahedd dante e AE Oea A AE R NE 4 23 DESCMBTON a liada 4 24 PAG AES EAE E E A E AA 4 24 Auto Designation Prefix darearen ites atl aaa e a ata 4 24 Spice Prefix Character S mua aasa e EE E
38. Advantage Regardless of the method of wiring you use CircuitMaker s SmartWires feature lets you connect a wire to a device pin or another wire without being in exactly the right place This ensures perfect connections every time and eliminates any guesswork A user definable connection area exists around each valid connection point When you place the Wire Tool in a connection area a rectangle appears highlighting the connection point Use the Preferences dialog box to set the size of the connection area and whether or not to display the rectangle For more information see Connection Area in Chapter 9 File Menu Auto Routing To quickly and easily Auto Route wires 1 Select the Wire Tool from the Toolbar 2 Move the tool over a valid connection point Note A valid connection point is any device pin or wire 4 80 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 3 Click and hold the left mouse button 4 Drag the mouse to another valid connection point and release the mouse button The wire automatically routes between the two points Auto routing requires two valid connection points You cannot draw a wire with auto routing that does not connect to something on both ends Also you cannot draw bus wires with the auto routing method The auto routing can be either Simple or Intelligent depend ing on what you have selected in the Preferences dialog box Simple routing draws only one or two wire segments horizontal and or ver
39. Analysis is based on the last cycle of transient data For example if the fundamental frequency is 1 0kHz then the transient data from the last 1ms cycle would be used for the Fourier analysis To set up and run a Fourier Analysis 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click the Transient Fourier button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 18 Figure 6 18 Use this dialog box to set up a Fourier Analysis 3 Enter the analysis settings and choose OK 4 Run the simulation 5 Assuming you have enabled the appropriate Test Points view and measure voltage current and power dissipation waveforms of the circuit in the analysis window that CircuitMaker displays The waveform in Figure 6 19 was generated by simulating the BANDPASS CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 18 This analysis shows the frequency spectrum of the square wave from the signal generator The first peak in the waveform is the amplitude of the component at the fundamental frequency Amplitudes at various harmonics within the specified range are also shown See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 143 CircuitMaker PRO only 6 144 k ik El FafeGromnd Bethy Vrroltapa Figure 6 19 A Fourier Analysis waveform Transfer Function Analysis The Transfer Function analysis calculates the DC input resistance DC output re
40. Bitmap or Device Dependent Bitmap Use the Export Options dialog box described earlier to choose the format To export the circuit as a graphic 1 Choose File gt Export gt Circuit as Graphic Select the name of the file where you want to save the circuit graphic then choose Save OR Choose Edit gt Copy to Clipboard gt Circuit then open another Windows program and Paste the circuit directly into your document See also Chapter 7 Exporting Files 4 100 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics CHAPTER 5 Digital Logic Simulation One of CircuitMaker s most powerful features is circuit simulation allowing you to try variations in a design and troubleshoot it before you invest time and money in hardware prototypes CircuitMaker s Simulation Modes CircuitMaker is one of the few simulation programs that offers 2 distinct modes of simulation Analog mode and Digital mode This gives you greater flexibility and control over how your circuit is simulated and each mode has advantages depending on the type of simulations you need Analog Mode is the accurate real world simulation mode you can use for analog digital and mixed signal circuits This mode will give you results like you would get from an actual breadboard In Analog mode the devices function just like real world parts and each individual model func tions like its real world counterpart For example digital ICs have accurate propagation delays s
41. Button Click the Reset button in the analysis window to return all of the waveform offsets to zero and restore the graph to its unzoomed state The axes will remain unchanged Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 131 Setting Up Analog Analyses CircuitMaker s powerful simulation capability includes a wide variety of standard and advanced analyses Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup to display the Analyses Setup dialog box pictured in Figure 6 7 Figure 6 7 Use the Analog Analyses Setup dialog box to setup the various analyses CircuitMaker offers the following standard and advanced analyses DC Analysis e AC Analysis DC Operating Point e Transient e Parameter Sweep e Fourier e Transfer Function CircuitMaker PRO only e Noise CircuitMaker PRO only Temperature Sweep CircuitMaker PRO only e Monte Carlo CircuitMaker PRO only e Impedance Plots CircuitMaker PRO only Always Set Defaults You can use the Always Set Defaults for Transient and Operating Points Analyses check box to simplify the task of setting up the Transient and Operating Point analyses It is primarily for the beginning user who does not completely understand or does not want to be concerned with all of the 6 132 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation settings in the Analog Analyses dialog box When this box is checked the Set Defaults button is pressed automatically every time the simulation is run For simple DC circ
42. Constant RT Standard RC charging time constant Fall Time Delay FD The point in time from t0 when the output begins to fall Fall Time Constant FT Standard RC discharging time constant 6 170 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 0 5V Editing Pulse Data To set the parameters of the pulse waveform click Pulse Triangle Sawtooth to display the dialog box in Figure 6 43 Figure 6 43 Use this dialog box to edit pulse data The waveform is described as follows where t instance of time Intermediate points are set by linear interpolation VA VI Vit VI Vit y Hp VP V t pHi pttpy VP V t y Hg Hoy tp VI Vitege E VI Initial Amplitude VI Initial amplitude of the output with respect to the negative terminal usually ground measured in volts or amps Pulse Amplitude VP Maximum amplitude of output swing in volts or amps Period 1 freq Duration of one complete cycle of the output Pulse Width PW Duration output remains at VP before ramping toward VI Rise Time TR Duration of the ramp from VI to VP Fall Time TF Duration of the ramp from VP to VI Delay to Start SD Duration that the output remains at VI before beginning to ramp toward VP the first time Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 171 Editing Piece Wise Data Click the Piece Wise button to set the parameters of the piecewise linear waveform as pictured in Figure 6 44 500m 2V Figure 6 44 Use t
43. Data This is because each V device may represent a different supply voltage However the Bus Data field can also be used on these devices to identify it as the voltage source for the digital devices For this example set the Bus Data to DVCC or DVDD In some cases it may be necessary to connect a different voltage source such as the output of a voltage regulator to the digital devices In such cases connect a Terminal device to the power source and enter DVCC in its Terminal Name field CircuitMaker will make a connection between the Terminal device and any bus that has the same name CircuitMaker will also make a connection between the Terminal and any Input or Output connector that has the same name Do not use a semicolon in the Terminal Name field For example DVCC is correct but DVCC is incorrect for the Terminal Name field Note CircuitMaker automatically copies what you enter in Terminal Name field to the Terminal s Bus Data field and appends a semicolon You can short multiple V and Terminal devices together by Bus Data for the V device and Terminal Name for the Terminal device If you short two V devices together you will receive an XSpice error when you run the simulation To avoid this problem remove the Spice Data and Spice Prefix Character from all but one of the shorted V devices See also Vec and Ground in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 93 4 94
44. Data Saved in RAW File Use the four radio buttons see Figure 6 36 to select the default level at which variables are saved in the RAW file This determines how much data is actually stored in the RAW file and which variables can be plotted in the analysis windows when the simulation is run e Select the top button to store only the node voltages and supply currents e Select the second button to store node voltages supply currents and device pin currents e Select the third button to store node voltages supply currents device pin currents and device power dissipa tion e Select the bottom button to store node voltages supply currents device pin variables and subcircuit internal variables If you have added any Exclusive Test Points to the circuit data will be saved only for each Exclusive Test Point and these radio buttons will be disabled 6 162 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 12 00 V DC V Analog Mixed Signal Instruments Following is a description of instruments found in CircuitMaker s device library that are most commonly used in analog and mixed signal circuits Multimeter In addition to the Multimeter Operating Point analysis window CircuitMaker includes a multimeter instrument for measuring resistance DC DC AVG or AC RMS voltage or current You may place as many multimeters into your circuit as you like When you run the simulation the measured value is then displayed on the meter Re
45. Default 1 0e 3 In the numerical pivoting algorithm the allowed minimum pivot is determined by EPSREL AMAX1 PIVREL MAXVAL PIVTOL where MAX VAL is the maximum element in the column where a pivot is sought partial pivoting Sets the absolute minimum value for a matrix entry to be accepted as a pivot Default 1 0e 13 Sets the relative error tolerance of the program The value must be between Oand 1 Default is 0 001 0 1 Larger values mean faster simulation time but less accuracy Sets the actual operating temperature of the circuit Any deviation from TNOM will produce a change in the simulation results Default 27 C Note TEMP can be overridden by a temperature specification on any temperature dependent instance Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 251 15 252 TNOM TRTOL VNTOL BOOLL BOOLH BOOLT BADMOS3 KEEPOPINFO TRYTOCOMPACT NOOPITER Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Sets the nominal temperature for which device models are created Default 27 C Note TNOM can be overridden by a specification on any temperature dependent device model Used in the LTE timestep control algorithm This is an estimate of the factor by which SPICE overestimates the actual truncation error Default 7 0 Sets the absolute voltage tolerance of the program Set VNTOL RELTOL lowest voltage magnitude in the circuit Default 1 microvolt Sets the low output level of a boolean expression Defau
46. Edit Buffer 16 9 editing pin information 16 8 element definitions 16 10 Element List 16 9 Grid 16 3 importing Metafile devices 16 7 moving shapes and elements 16 6 pin designations 16 4 pin names 16 4 Redraw 16 3 resizing elements 16 6 selecting multiple shapes 16 5 selecting shapes 16 5 Symbol Name 16 4 Trace 16 4 tutorial 16 14 using display controls 16 3 View 16 4 SYMBOLDB DAT file 9 8 Symbols adding new models to existing 16 24 adding new subcircuits to 16 28 changing color of 13 1 changing text color 13 1 creating device 16 2 creating device tutorial 16 14 drawing with mouse 16 4 naming 16 4 showing 4 8 Index 399 T t 17 7 17 32 TABLE 17 11 17 59 TAN 17 12 17 34 Tango PCB format 7 11 Task overview of CircuitMaker 2 4 Technical support 1 8 TEMP 15 7 17 49 Temperature Sweep Analysis running 6 35 setting up 6 35 Terminal Device 4 20 4 27 Test Points 6 5 6 7 6 46 6 48 default 6 8 exclusive 6 8 run time 6 8 types 6 8 Text adding to schematic 4 2 changing font of 10 11 Text Tool activating 4 2 changing color of text 4 2 changing text font 4 2 resizing text in rectangle 4 2 using 4 2 TH 17 52 THEN 17 25 THold 6 46 15 12 Tile Windows 13 3 Timestep too small 15 7 Timing violations 6 46 15 12 Title Block 4 5 12 6 TNOM 15 8 Toolbar displaying 13 1 introduction 2 4 tp_param 17 28 17 37 TPMNTYMX 15 11 17 28 Trace 8 8 Symbol Editor 16 4 Trace Button activating 5 5 Index 400 using 5 5
47. General Form MESSAGE lt message gt lt value pin gt Parameters lt message gt Message string including formatting characters as needed lt value gt Variable or constant value lt pin gt Pin name or index to pin variable Use The MESSAGE statement is used to output the information specified by the lt message gt string It does not interrupt the simulation The message is displayed in the XSpice window during simulation Notes A format string in MESSAGE is similar to a format that may be used in a printf statement in C Valid formatting characters include but are not limited to t tab n new line r carraige return d Deciaml display for short variable or current input output state D Decimal display for short variable or old input output state Tox Hex display for short variable or current input output state PX Hex display for short variable or old input output state Joc Character display for short variable or current input output state JC Character display for short variable or old input output state Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 351 CircuitMaker PRO only he Exponential display for real variable Tot Floating point engineering display for real variable g Short display e or f for real variable Ps String constant display The only valid string constants are INSTANCE The present SimCode device instance name FUNC The present SimCode device function name FILE The pr
48. Macro Symbol To add an existing subcircuit to a new macro symbol 1 Create a new nonfunctional macro device symbol as Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 303 described earlier in this chapter Be sure to place the pins in the same order as they are listed in the corresponding subcircuit For example if you are creating a new symbol for a 5 pin opamp you should place the Input pin first then the Input pin the Vsupply pin the Vsupply pin and finally the Output pin to correspond with the SPICE node connections for the 5 pin opamp subcircuit This is not required but it will be easier to understand when filling in the Spice Data field for the device In order to link the new symbol to an existing subcircuit file you must name the new symbol appropriately For example you may want to name the symbol Op Amp5 A to link to the OPAMPS SUB file Note Since CircuitMaker identifies pins by the order of placement in a device symbol for clarity make sure that the placement order of the pins matches the order of the nodes listed in the subcircuits The actual link between device symbol pins and SPICE subcircuits is controlled by the Spice Data field of the device where n refers to the nth pin in the element list For example in the Spice Data ole D 2 ol 1 A ol 3 A 4 ol S the node number connected to the first pin placed on the device symbol is represented by 1 the second pin by 2 etc
49. The opin is required to provide input loading characteristics This statement can only be used once in the SimCode Power pins are not listed in the IO_PAIRS statement Example IO_PAIRS IN1 IN1_LD IN2 IN2_LD In this example IN1 and IN2 are INPUTS and IN1_LD and IN2_LD are OUTPUTS IN1 and IN1_LD both refer to the same physical pin on the device See Also INPUTS OUTPUTS LOAD 17 346 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only LEVEL Sets the level of the output state General Form 1 LEVEL lt output gt lt output gt lt expression gt General Form 2 LEVEL lt output gt lt output gt ZERO ONE UNKNOWN Parameters lt output gt Name of or variable index to the output lt expression gt Any expression compared to VOL or VOH Use The state of an output pin is determined by its level and its strength Use the LEVEL command to set the level of one or more output pins lt expression gt State Level lt vol_param ZERO vol_param gt voh_param ONE voh_param other UNKNOWN v3s_param Notes Output pins can be specified by using the output pin name or by an integer variable the contains the INDEX of an output pin Pin and variable names cannot be mixed in the same LEVEL statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names Examples LEVEL Q ONE LEVEL Q1 02 Q3 Q4 ZERO LEVEL OUT 1 2 3 In the last example OUT will be
50. VOL_VOH_MIN 0 2 0 4 0 1 vol_param gnd_param 0 2 voh_param pwr_param 0 4 VIL_VIH_VALUE 1 25 1 35 set input threshold values vil and vih IO_PAIRS PRE PRE_LD DATA DATA_LD CLK CLK_LD CLR CLR_LD IF init_sim THEN BEGI select prop delay setup hold and width times MESSAGE time t tPRE tCLR tCLK tDATA tQ tON debug NOTE both ttlh and tthl are the same value tt_val MIN_TYP_MAX tt_param NULL 5n NULL temp_tp PWL_TABLE sim_temp 75 5n 125 5n tp temperature affect tplh_val MIN_TYP_MAX tp_param NULL 14n 25n temp_tp tphl_val MIN_TYP_MAX tp_param NULL 20n 40n temp_tp ts_val 20n th_val 5n trec_val 5n clk_twl 25n not specified derived from fmax clk_twh 25n pre_clr_twl 20n LS stdout drive IOL max 8mA VOL typ 0 35V rol_param 0 35V 8mA 43 75 LS stdout drive IOL max 8mA VOL max 0 5V rol_param 0 5V 8mA 62 5 rol_param MIN_TYP_MAX drv_param 62 5 43 75 NULL LS stdout drive IOS min 20mA VCC max 5 25V roh_param 5 25V 20mA 262 5 LS stdout drive IOS max 100mA VCC max 5 25V roh_param 5 25V 100mA 52 5 roh_param MIN_TYP_MAX drv_param 262 5 NULL 52 5 LS input load IIH max 20uA Vin 2 7V ril 2 7 vol_param 20uA 125k ril_val MIN_TYP_MAX ld_param NULL NULL 125k 17 322 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode LS input load IIL max 0 4mA Vin 0 4V rih MIN_TYP_MAX 1d_param rih_val Icc 5V ricc_
51. a SPICE compatible text file describing your circuit You can then import this text file into other Berkeley SPICE3 compatible simulation programs 1 Choose File gt Export gt SPICE Netlist 2 Type the name of the netlist file with a NET extension and then choose OK Exporting a SPICE Subcircuit Use the SPICE Subcircuit option to create a SUB text file describing your circuit You can then copy the text file into a SUB file which corresponds to the device symbol you intend to use Connect SCOPE Digital Instrument t devices to your circuit to indicate the connecting nodes of the subcircuit Label them TP1 1st node TP2 2nd node etc or anything that ends with a number 1 2 3 etc up toa maximum of 64 connecting nodes To export a SPICE Subcircuit 1 Choose File gt Export gt SPICE Subcircuit 2 Type the name of the subcircuit file with a SUB extension and then choose OK Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 183 7 184 Exporting a PCB Netlist Use the PCB Netlist export option to create a PCB netlist file for your circuit CircuitMaker generates PCB netlists in TraxMaker Protel Tango and many other formats allowing you to use it with a wide variety of Printed Circuit Board layout programs What is a Net Each net represents one electrical junction point or node of a circuit Numerous device pins may be connected to the same net What is a Netlist A netlist is an ASCII text file listing connections w
52. ability to read either source code models or compiled code models The keyword source identifies this as a source code model to be compiled by WXSpice When the simulation is run the source code model is compiled and the compiled code is placed in an ASCII text file called SIMLIST TXT in the same directory as WXSPICE EXE Example INPUTS VCC GND IN1 IN2 OUTPUTS VCC_LD IN1_LD IN2_LD OUT EXIT 17 330 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only CHANGE_TIME Returns time when the specified pin last changed state General Form CHANGE_TIME lt pin gt Parameters lt pin gt Input or output pin name Use This function returns a real value that indicates the last time the specified input or output pin changed states Example Tl CHANGE_TIME INA CHANGED xx Checks if the specified pin has changed state General Form CHANGED_xx lt pin gt lt lt gt gt lt var time value gt Parameters lt pin gt Input or output pin name lt var time value gt Item to which lt pin gt is compared Use The CHANGED_ xx function is used to determine if the specified lt pin gt has changed state The _xx that follows the keyword CHANGED can be eliminated to indicate any type of change or the xx can be set to LH LX HL HX XL XH LZ ZL ZH ZX HZ or XZ to indicate a specific type of change The optional compare operator lt lt gt gt and lt var time valu
53. an asterisk for example LtBlue the fill color will be the same as the pen color otherwise the fill color will be the background color General Format element type attribute xl yl x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 pin numbers Line Attribute x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices pen color start point of the line end point of the line n a n a Example Line Device 36 7 20 7 Polyline Attribute pen color x1 yl 1st point of the polyline x2 y2 2nd point of the polyline optional if Polyline x3 y3 3rd point of the polyline optional x4 y4 4th point of the polyline optional Note A preceding plus sign Polyline indicates that this is an extension to the preceding polyline element Examples Polyline Device 24 46 42 22 24 35 or Polyline Device 51 54 46 23 34 42 53 32 Polyline Device 53 19 Polygon Attribute pen color x1 y1 1st point of the polygon x2 y2 2nd point of the polygon optional if Polygon x3 y3 3rd point of the polygon optional if Polygon x4 y4 4th point of the polygon optional Note A preceding plus sign Polygon indicates that this is an extension to the preceding polygon element Example Polygon Device 39 12 0 55 61 75 or Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 285 16 286 Polygon Device 30 44 12 44 29 21 15 6 Polygon Device 25 6 42 16 Rect Attribute pen color x1 y1 left top corner of the rectangle x2 y2 right bott
54. an ellipse with the mouse while holding down the Left mouse button Note You must use the Element List or Element Buffer to change the size and shape of other elements See Element List and Edit Buffer later in this chapter for more information Adding an Existing Shape To make it easier to create a new device symbol you can use and modify existing device shapes as needed To add an existing shape 1 In the Symbol Editor dialog box click the Add Exist ing Shape drop down list box 2 Select the name of the existing shape you want to add 3 If you want to include pins for the existing device check the Include Pins check box 4 Ifyou want to change the size of the shape you are adding enter a value in the Scale edit box 16 280 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 5 Click the Add Shape button 6 Press the r key or click the Right mouse button to rotate the shape 7 Press the m key to mirror the shape S Move the shape to the desired location in the Symbol Editor s view window 9 Click the Left mouse button to place the shape or press the Spacebar to cancel Note Only the location not the size of included pins will be scaled Importing a Metafile Device The Symbol Editor can import device symbols pictures created in another drawing program only if that drawing program can copy the desired symbol to the Windows clipboard in the Metafile format To import a Metafile device 1 Copy the Metafile object on
55. analog simulation is to build a few simple circuits set up the analyses and run the simulations This tutorial covers e Simple circuit analysis e Simulating a simple AC circuit e More circuit simulation e Setting up the analyses e Running the simulation e Mixed mode simulation Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 49 3 50 Simple Circuit Analysis New Button Let s begin with a simple DC circuit 2 D Digital Simulation Analog Simulation 3 Wire Tool 4 5 Chapter 3 Tutorials Click the New button on the Toolbar This opens an untitled circuit window Click the Digital Analog Simulation mode toggle button You know CircuitMaker is in Analog mode when the transistor icon not the AND gate icon is visible on the Toolbar see pictures at left If the AND gate icon is displayed Digital mode click the button to switch Draw the circuit as shown in Figure 3 4 using the following devices e 1 Battery Analog Power b Ground Analog Power 0 zero e 2 Resistors Passive Components Resistors r lk lk lov Figure 3 4 A quick way to access the devices for this circuit is to use the HotKey shortcuts explained in Chapter 2 and type the keys for the corresponding devices Note Every analog circuit must have a Ground and every node in the circuit must have a DC path to ground Use the Wire Tool to wire the circuit together or the Arrow Tool when the Arrow Wire option is enabled Choose Simulati
56. and load the netlist If CircuitMaker can t find the TraxMaker executable file use the Find TraxMaker button to locate it Once you have located it you don t have to find it again unless the location changes Create Keep Out Layer Use this option to define the board size for the TraxMaker AutoPlacement and Autorouting features both of which attempt to stay within this area when placing and routing netlists See the TraxMaker User Manual for more informa tion Board Size in Mils Use this option to define the size of the Keep Out Layer See the TraxMaker User Manual for more information Automatically Place Components This option activates the TraxMaker AutoPlacement feature which uses several strategies when placing netlisted components on the Board AutoPlacement attempts to arrange components by first grouping then placing the groups using the placement and clearance grids you ve specified See the TraxMaker User Manual for more information Chapter 7 Exporting Files CHAPTER 8 Fault Simulation An exciting educational feature of CircuitMaker is the ability to place faulty devices in circuits This lets you as the instructor to create troubleshooting exercises for students For example you can create a working circuit then zap one or more of the devices by applying shorts opens or other faults to selected pins on those devices You can then password protect the fault data and limit the resources availabl
57. beginners CircuitMaker is perfect for learning and experi menting with electronics and circuit design For advanced users CircuitMaker s powerful analyses provide a sophisti cated environment for testing and trying all the what if scenarios for your design Best of all you can accomplish more in less time than traditional prototyping methods Required Hardware Software IBM compatible 486 or higher PC with a hard disk drive and a 342 high density disk drive e Math coprocessor recommended for analog simula tion e 8MRAM 15M hard disk space 20M during installa tion e Mouse or other pointing device e VGA or higher resolution monitor color preferred Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 21 e Microsoft Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 or greater or Windows 3 1x requires Win32s a set of operating system extensions which allows some 32 bit applica tions to run under the 16 bit operating system Installing CircuitMaker 1 Start your Windows operating system 2 Ifyou are installing from the CircuitMaker CD insert it into the CD drive and skip to Step 5 OR If you are installing with floppy disks insert Disk 1 into drive A and continue with Step 3 3 Ifusing Windows 95 or NT4 choose Start gt Run from the Taskbar OR If using Windows 3 1x choose File gt Run from Program Manager 4 Type a setup and press Enter 5 Follow the installation instructions Warning If you are reinstallin
58. box shown in Figure 11 1 appears when you use Edit Macro feature If no macro either a newly defined or an expanded one is present in the work area the Edit Macro menu item is grayed indicating that it is not available Chapter 11 Macros Menu 11 223 11 224 Figure 11 1 Use this dialog box to change an existing macro You can define a macro as having multiple parts per pack age that is you may specify that there are more than one of these macro circuits all identical in a single chip Save Macro Use the Macros gt Save Macro option to save or resave a macro device An existing macro saved in this manner will be placed in its original position in the device library All devices require a Major Device Class designation so if you use the Save Macro option to save a new macro CircuitMaker displays the Macro Utilities dialog box allowing you to specify both a major and minor class To save an existing macro in a new location refer to the Macro Utilities later in this chapter To save under a different name refer to Edit Macro Macro devices are stored in the USER LIB file Expand Macro Use the Macros gt Expand Macro option to edit a previously saved macro device Expanding a macro device means that the black box containing the macro s circuitry is opened and all internal circuitry is visible Note Most of the devices included with CircuitMaker are not macro devices and cannot be expanded To expand a macro
59. by setting the OPTION parameters 15 274 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics CHAPTER 16 Creating New Devices The devices you can create in CircuitMaker fall into two major categories 1 nonfunctional device symbols that you simply want to represent schematically or export to a PCB netlist and 2 fully functional devices that will simulate Simulation functionality is achieved by attaching internal circuitry or a SPICE model subcircuit to a device symbol The term macro device is used loosely throughout this manual to refer to any device you create or modify What s In This Chapter The following summarizes the information contained in this chapter e Creating Device Symbols Learn how to use the Symbol Editor to create or edit custom device symbols Learn how to draw symbols freehand with the mouse create new symbols based on an existing symbol and quickly create a DIP LCC or QFP symbols Learn how pins are used as connection points for wires Also learn how to prepare the symbol for use in CircuitMaker by adding the default Device Data to the symbol Go through a step by step example to create your own device symbol e Creating Macro Devices with Internal Circuitry Learn how to attach hidden internal circuitry to a custom device symbol Learn how this simple process can be used to expand the selection of simulatable devices in CircuitMaker Learn how macro devices can be nested for hierarchical construction of a circuit
60. collected for each exclusive test point To place Exclusive Test Points in the circuit 1 Make sure the simulation is stopped 2 Select the Probe Tool from the Toolbar 6 122 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Voltage Exclusive Test Point on a wire Current Exclusive Test Point on a device pin Power Exclusive Test Point on a device To add an Exclusive Test Point Right click the Probe Tool ve on a wire mn 10k To add a Run Time Test Point Left click the Probe Tool 3 Hold the Ctrl key and left click the appropriate locations in the circuit Placing Multiple Exclusive Test Points To place multiple Exclusive Test Points 1 Hold the Shift and Ctrl key while left clicking You can place Exclusive Test Points on wires to measure node voltages on device pins to measure current or on devices themselves to measure power dissipation Data is not collected for devices containing subcircuits Removing Exclusive Test Points To remove all Exclusive Test Points from the circuit 1 Hold the Ctrl key and left click the Probe Tool in any blank area of the circuit window Note that when you remove all Exclusive Test Points the Default Test Points become active again Run Time Test Points Run Time Test Points are locations you can define in the circuit where CircuitMaker will automatically display graphical data that is collected during simulation Like regular Exclusive Test Points Run Time Test
61. defined faults mentioned earlier in this chapter If a value is entered in this field it will replace the device s Label Value when the simulation is run Faulty SPICE model and subcircuit names may also be entered here If the field is left blank the device s real Label Value will be used in the simulation Faults and Device Pins Select one or more pins from the Device Pins list then click on one of the fault buttons The selected pins will be removed from the selection list and placed to the right of the associated fault button Pressing a fault button again will remove that fault from the pins listed next to it and place the pins back in the selection list Button Used For HIGH The pin s stuck high fault In Analog Mixed mode simulation the value to the left of the button indicates the voltage of an invisible voltage source to which the pins are stuck LOW The pin s stuck low fault In Analog Mixed mode simulation the value to the left of the button indicates the voltage of an invisible voltage source to which the pins are stuck Chapter 8 Fault Simulation 8 191 8 192 Button Used For OPEN The pin s open fault In Analog Mixed mode simulation the value to the left of the button indicates the resistance very high between the pin and the device SHORT Used for the pins shorted together fault In Analog Mixed mode simula tion the value to the left of the button indicates the value of the resis
62. double click mode lets you turn a wire very close to other wires or pins without connecting to them Display Toolbar When checked the Display Toolbar option will be activated by default This option is also accessible from the View Menu See Toolbar in Chapter 13 View and Window Menus Prompt to SAVE If modifications have been made to the circuit you may want to save the circuit before you run the simulation If this box is checked then each time you run the simulation CircuitMaker will warn you if the circuit has not been saved Display Variable Names When checked the Display Variable Names option will be activated by default The Display Variable Names option replaces the A B C labels used on the analog analysis windows with the variable names such as V 8 etc This allows you to identify the various points in the circuit more consistently with those being graphed in analysis windows This option is also accessible from the Simulation Menu See Display Variable Names in Chapter 14 Simulation Menu Connection Area The connection area defines a rectangle around valid connection points a valid connection point is any device pin or wire The SmartWires M feature lets you connect a wire to a valid connection point even if your cursor is not exactly on that point By setting the X and Y values you specify how close within how many pixels you must be to the connection point before the wire will snap to that poin
63. drv_param 62 5 43 75 NULL roh_param MIN_TYP_MAX drv_param 262 5 NULL 52 5 DRIVE Q ON v0 vol_param vl voh_param tt lh ttlh_val tthl tthl_val See Also LOAD Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 335 CircuitMaker PRO only EVENT Causes a digital event to be posted General Form EVENT lt time gt lt expression gt Parameters lt time gt Time at which event should occur lt expression gt Expression indicating time at which event should occur Use In most cases a digital event is posted when one or more INPUT pins for a simcode model changes state When the event is processed the simcode for the specified event is called and run This instruction allows a simcode model to post a digital event at a specified lt time gt If the specified EVENT time is greater than the simulation time indicated by present_time then a digital event will be posted If more than one EVENT is posted in a single call to a simcode model only the longest EVENT lt time gt will be used This function allows the creation of one shots and other similar device models Notes If a digital event for a specific simcode model occurs before an EVENT lt time gt posted by that simcode the EVENT lt time gt must be posted again For example if 1 the present simulation time is lus 2 a simcode model sets EVENT 2us and 3 an INPUT pin in the simcode model changes state at 1 5us then the 2us event must be posted again
64. editing 6 56 Export Options setting up 7 7 Exporting Bill of Materials 7 1 circuits as graphics 4 34 7 8 entire circuit 4 33 PCB netlist 7 10 SPICE netlist 7 9 SPICE subcircuit 7 9 TraxMaker PCB netlist 7 13 waveforms as graphics 7 8 EXT_TABLE 17 5 17 7 17 11 17 21 Extending wires 4 16 F Factory defaults restoring 2 8 Failures DC Analysis DC Sweep 15 3 of Operating Point Analysis 15 2 Transient Analysis 15 4 Faults 4 33 8 1 managing circuit 8 6 password protecting 8 10 FETs 15 25 File management CKT files 2 9 File menu Close 9 2 Merge 9 1 New 9 1 Open 9 1 Preferences 9 4 Index 389 Print Circuit 9 4 Print Setup 9 3 Print Waveforms 9 4 Reopen 9 1 Revert 9 2 Save 9 2 Save As 9 2 Files introduction to CircuitMaker 2 3 Filtering devices by name 4 8 Find and Select 10 3 Finding devices 4 10 Fit Circuit To Window 13 3 using tutorial 3 18 Fitto Page 9 4 Flipping a device 4 4 FM Signal 6 54 6 55 Fonts 10 11 changing 4 2 default 9 5 device plot 9 5 Fourier Analysis running 6 29 setting defaults 6 24 setting up 6 29 FREQUENCY FMAX 17 11 17 23 G GaAsFETs 15 27 Gates changing color of 13 1 Gaussian distribution 6 37 Gear Integration 6 48 15 4 GMIN 15 3 15 6 GMINSTEP 15 9 GND 6 6 gnd_param 17 49 GOSUB 17 13 17 24 GOTO 17 13 17 24 17 25 Graphics exporting circuits as 4 34 7 8 exporting waveforms as 7 8 Grid 4 4 12 5 Index 390 changing color of 13 1 in Symbol Editor 16 3
65. expression gt THEN GOTO lt label gt Parameters lt expression gt Any expression that can be evaluated as true or false lt label gt Location in SimCode where program flow resumes Use The ZF THEN statement is used to control the flow of the program based on whether lt expression gt evaluates to true or false Multiple IF THEN statements may be nested Notes When the BEGIN ELSE END form of this statement is used and lt expression gt evaluates to true program flow resumes from the BEGIN statement and skips any optional SimCode between the ELSE and END statements If lt expression gt Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 341 CircuitMaker PRO only evaluates to false program flow resumes from the optional ELSE statement if it exists or after the END statement if it does not exist When the GOTO form of this statement is used and lt expres sion gt evaluates to true program flow resumes from the location where lt label gt appears in the SimCode lt label gt must being with an alpha character followed by any number of alpha numeric characters or the underscore _ character Where lt label gt appears in the code it must be followed immediately by a colon Examples IF EN THEN BEGIN STATE QO UNKNOWN ELSE IF IN2 THEN BEGIN STATE Y2 ONE ELSE STATE Y2 ZERO END END IF x 2 THEN GOTO Do_Neg2 Do_Neg2 See Also GOTO WHILE DO INPUTS Declares input pins pi
66. follow these steps 1 Click a single macro device to select it 2 Choose Macros gt Expand Macro OR Click the Macro button on the Toolbar Chapter 11 Macros Menu An alert box appears warning that expansion of the macro will clear the work area Note If you haven t saved your work click the Cancel button to abort the expansion save the current workspace and then reselect Expand Macro If you don t need to save the work area click OK to complete the expansion of the macro 3 Make changes to an expanded macro using any of the available editing commands 4 When you have finished making changes to the macro choose Macros gt Save Macro Macro Lock An instructor may want to lock a macro so that it cannot be expanded by the students thus creating a black box To lock a macro follow these steps 1 2 3 Expand the macro Click the expanded macro s symbol to select it Choose Macros gt Macro Lock to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 11 2 Macro Lock x Enter 4 digit combination 0 Not Locked fo p Cancel Figure 11 2 Use the Macro Lock feature to lock a macro as a black box Enter any number up to 4 digits then save the macro When you attempt to expand the macro again you will be prompted to enter the 4 digit code A code of 0 zero leaves the macro unlocked Warning If you forget the code you will be unable to expand the macro Chapter 11 Macros Menu 1
67. following functions of real variables are defined abs acos acosh asin asinh atan atanh cos cosh exp ln log sin sinh sqrt tan u uramp u is the unit step function with a value of one for argu ments greater than zero and a value of zero for arguments less than zero uramp is the integral of the unit step for an input x the value is zero if x is less than zero or if x is greater than zero the value is x These two functions are useful in synthesizing piecewise nonlinear functions though conver gence may be adversely affected The following standard operators are defined unary In addition the following boolean operators are defined Input threshold values BOOLT and output values BOOLL and BOOLH are universally defined in the Analog Options dialog box Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 265 15 266 amp AND OR XOR NOT Older versions of SPICE used a POLY function to describe nonlinear sources For example the following statements are all equivalent El 19 0 POLY 2 7 4 2 0 3 1 5 Spice2 El 19 0 POLY 2 7 4 2 0 3 1 5 Spice2 Bl 19 0 V 3 1 V 7 4 5 v 2 0 Spice3 Bl 19 0 V 3 1 V 7 4 5 V 2 Spice3 Each statement indicates that the voltage at node 19 will equal 3 volts plus 1 times the voltage across nodes 7 and 4 plus 5 times the voltage at node 2 using ground node 0 as areference Many existing SPICE subcircuits contain this type of nonlinear
68. input pins VCC and GND pins are included in this statement The order of these pins must match the order of their corresponding pin declarations in the device s Spice Data field The OUTPUTS statement declares the names of the output pins Notice that the input pins are listed here as well but with the suffix _LD The input pins must also be declared as outputs so that the device can provide a load on the driving circuitry VCC pins are included in this statement but not GND pins The order of these pins must match the order of their corresponding pin declarations in the device s Spice Data field The PWR_GND_PINS statement declares which pins will be used for device power and ground and samples their voltage levels for use later in the SimCode SimCode Function Initialization See O in the example The IF init_sim THEN section is executed only once at the beginning of the simulation In this section we set the device characteristics that are not subject to change due to outside influences such as databook specifications The outputs states should also be initialized here to their most likely state The EXIT com mand should be placed at the end of this section LOAD and DRIVE Statements See O in the example These statements are used to declare the load and drive capabilities of the device pins Device Functionality See O in the example This section can vary dramatically from part to part In this example a
69. micrometer Sets the MOS channel width De fault 100 0 micrometer Sets the minimum conductance maximum resistance of any device in the circuit It also sets the value of the conductance that is placed in parallel with each pn junction in the circuit Default 1 0e 12 mhos Note Raising this value may help with simulation convergence in many circuits but might decrease accuracy Sets the Operating Point Analysis iteration limit Default 100 iterations Note This may need to be raised as high as 500 for many circuits Sets the DC Analysis iteration limit Default 50 iterations Note This may need to be raised as high as 200 for some circuits Sets the lower Transient Analysis iteration limit Default 4 iterations Note This is not implemented in PIVREL PIVTOL RELTOL TEMP SPICE3 It is provided in CircuitMaker for compatibility in creating SPICE2 netlists Sets the Transient Analysis timepoint iteration limit Default 10 iterations Note Raising this value to 100 or more may help to eliminate timestep too small errors improving both convergence and simulation speed Sets the Transient Analysis total iteration limit Default 5000 iterations Note This is not implemented in SPICE3 It is provided in CircuitMaker for compatibility in creating SPICE2 netlists Sets the relative ratio between the largest column entry in the matrix and an acceptable pivot value The value must be between 0 and 1
70. models subcircuit data is not varied during the analysis You can use the Parameter Sweep feature only when you have enabled one or more of the standard analyses AC DC or Transient Furthermore data is only saved for nodes that have a Run Time Test Point attached The parameter sweep requires the following data Parameter Start Value Stop Value and Step Value The parameter can be a single designation or a designation with a device parameter in brackets The following are valid examples Example What it Varies RF Resistor with designation RF Q3 bf Beta forward on transistor Q3 R3 r Resistance of potentiometer R3 R3 position Position of potentiometer R3 option temp Temperature CircuitMaker PRO only U5 tp_val Propagation delays of digital device US Normally you would use a Temperature Sweep to vary the temperature for simulation however temperature can also be varied in the Parameter Sweep useful if you want to vary the temperature as either the primary or secondary parameter in a two parameter sweep To set up and run a Parameter Sweep Analysis 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click the Parameter Sweep button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 16 3 Make the desired settings select Enabled and then choose OK 4 Place Run Time Test Points at the nodes you want to observe 5 Run the simulation 6 View the resulting waveforms in the analysis window such as the one in Figure 6 17
71. models or subcircuits using mathemati cal equations to create SPICE model parameters The generic model is placed in the linking file associated with the device symbol then referenced by an alias Devices created in this manner are selected and edited just like any other device model To edit the parameters being passed double click the device then click Edit General Form Generic Model MNAME Device Title MNAME P1 P1 Description lt lt Min gt lt Max gt gt Default MNAME P2 P2 Description lt lt Min gt lt Max gt gt Default MNAME Pn Pn Description lt lt Min gt lt Max gt gt Default Pl Default Pl Default Pn Default Desc pkg Package Pins Generic MODEL or SUBCKT using P1 P2 etc in math expressions General Form Alias Desc alias MNAME P1 Val P2 Val pkg Package Pins PARAM ANAME Data Description MNAME The name of the generic model or subcircuit including the appropriate SPICE prefix character Chapter 16 Creating New Devices Crystal Subcircuit P1 P2 etc P1 Description etc The names of the parameters being passed The description of the parameters Min and Max Optional items which limit the value that can be entered for each param eter Default The default value for each parameter if no value is specified Desc A description of the device Package and Pins Information used for export to TraxMaker for PCB layout ANAME The alias name the name of th
72. multiple 4 12 ITL1 15 3 15 6 ITL2 15 3 15 6 ITL3 15 6 ITL4 15 4 15 7 ITLS 15 7 J JFETs 15 25 Joining wires 4 16 Junction diodes 15 24 K Keep out layer controlling from CircuitMaker 7 14 KEEPOPINFO 15 8 Key cap changing color of 13 1 Keys HotKeys 2 7 shortcut 2 7 L Label L 4 28 Label Value 4 28 17 9 changing 4 23 changing tutorial 3 14 changing for resistor tutorial 3 5 changing for transistor tutorial 3 5 of device faults 8 3 Labeling circuits changing labels 4 21 with text tool 4 21 Labels Bus showing 12 3 Lamp changing color of 13 1 LCC packages adding in Symbol Editor 16 7 Id_param 17 6 17 28 17 37 LDMNTYMX 15 12 17 28 LED changing color of 13 1 LEVEL 17 11 17 31 Library of devices selecting from 3 2 4 7 License Agreement iii Lines Index 391 drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definitions 16 10 Linking files 11 6 17 2 model and subcircuit 16 32 LIST 15 9 Listing devices 4 7 LOAD 17 5 17 7 17 11 17 30 17 32 Loading 15 10 15 12 17 28 LOADMNS 15 10 17 37 LOADMXS 15 11 17 37 Locking macros 11 3 LOG 17 12 17 34 LOGIO 17 12 17 34 Lossless Transmission Lines 15 22 Lossy Transmission Lines 15 23 LOW 8 1 8 10 Low changing color of 13 1 M Macro circuits creating 16 19 Macro Copier 11 6 Macro devices creating 16 19 expanding 16 17 Macro libraries updating 16 bit 1 4 updating 32 bit 1 3 Macro Lock 8 10 11 3 Macro symbols adding existing models to 16 25
73. names and variables can be mixed in the same WIDTH statement Examples WIDTH CLK TWL clk_twl TWH clk_twh CLK WIDTH PRE CLR TWL pre_clr_twl PRE or CLR Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 381 CircuitMaker PRO only WIDTH_TIME Returns last pulse width encountered on specified pin General Form WIDTH_TIME lt input gt Parameters lt input gt Name of or index to an input pin Use This function returns a real value that indicates the last pulse width encountered on the specified lt input gt Example PW WIDTH_TIME CP2 17 382 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode Index Symbols xxxx source 17 4 17 6 17 13 17 14 path filename ext 4 29 Jl 4 30 B 4 29 D 4 29 17 8 I 4 29 PL 4 28 M 4 29 17 9 YN 4 28 Jenumber 4 30 P 4 29 Yopinorder 17 8 PS 4 29 FV 4 28 PX 4 29 V 4 27 6 6 V selecting a 3 4 CKT 2 3 CKT files basic management of 2 9 opening 2 10 reverting to previously saved 2 10 starting 2 9 DAT 2 3 AC 15 3 15 29 IC device selecting 3 10 INCLUDE 4 29 LIB 2 3 MOD 2 3 NET file and XSpice for Windows 6 45 NODESET 15 3 RAW file 6 47 6 48 analysis data saved in 6 48 and XSpice for Windows 6 45 SRP 2 3 SUB 2 3 10X Amplifier Circuit example 3 14 16 bit macro libraries updating 1 4 3 State changing color of 13 1 32 bit macro libraries updating 1 3 7 segment changing color of 13 1 A ABS 17 12 17 34 ABSTOL 15 4 15 6 AC Analysis AC Sweep decibels 3 20 log
74. next to the Label Value field to change the black check mark to a grayed out check mark This causes 15V to replace the V on the schematic 6 Enter Vecin the Designation field and click once in the Visible check box next to it so that there is a black check mark in it Click OK 3 46 Chapter 3 Tutorials Changing Resistor Transistor Label Values Now try the same editing procedure on the transistor and resistors 1 Double click resistor RB 2 Change the Label Value field to read 220k enter RB in the Designation field make it visible and click OK 15Y 3 Double click resistor RC 4 Change the Label Value field to read 870k enter RC in the Designation field make it visible then click OK RB RC sao 870k 5 Double click the transistor to display the Model Selec tion dialog box Since you have already selected the model that you want 222224 to display 2N2222A just click on the Netlist button to open the Edit Device Data dialog box 6 Enter Q1 in the Designation field and make it visible Ey Click OK and then click Exit to return to the schematic 7 If necessary drag the devices and labels around with the mouse to place them in convenient locations Wiring the Circuit Together Now it s time to hook up these devices into a working circuit by wiring them together 1 Select the Wire Tool from the Toolbar or use the Arrow Tool if the Arrow Wire option is enabled 2 Place the cursor on the emitter pin the pin
75. of or index to the input set reset pin under test TREC Recovery time for both low and high going lt mr pin gt TRECL Recovery time for low going lt mr pin gt TRECH Recovery time for high going lt mr pin gt lt message gt Text string that will be displayed if a warning occurs Use The RECOVER function compares the time difference between a level change LH or HL on the lt clk input gt and a level change on the lt mr input gt to a specified test time RECOVER test times are specified jointly using TREC lt time gt which sets TRECL and TRECH to the same value or individually using TRECL lt time gt and TRECH lt time gt If the compare time is less than the speci fied lt time gt a warning will be displayed during simulation An optional lt message gt string can be included in the RECOVER statement which will be output if a warning is displayed Notes Databook specifications should be used with this function TRECL lt time gt and TRECH lt time gt can be entered in the same RECOVER test The RECOVER test will be made only if the state of the lt mr input gt matches the time parameter TRECL LOW TRECH HIGH when the lt clk input gt makes the specified transition LH or HL For example if lt clk input gt LH and TRECL is specified then the lt mr input gt must be LOW when the lt clk input gt goes from LOW to HIGH for a RECOVER test to be made Pin names and variables can be mixed in the same RECOVER s
76. of protecting your investment from loss e You may transfer your right to use CircuitMaker to another party as long as the entire software package including the manual and a backup copy of CircuitMaker are transferred to the receiving party However before transferring this program the receiving party must agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of this agreement If you transfer the program you must remove CircuitMaker from the computer on which it is installed and destroy the backup copy at the time of transfer Your licence terminates at the time of transfer In no case is the right granted to sell distribute trade or give away copies of CircuitMaker except as stated in this paragraph You may not de compile disassemble reverse engineer or in any way modify the program code without the prior written consent of MicroCode Engineering e This agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate this agreement at any time by destroying the program documentation and any the backup copy or by returning the same to MicroCode Engineering The licence will terminate automatically if the terms of this agreement are violated The program code is provided on an as is basis without warranty of any kind whatsoever either expressed or implied MicroCode Engineering does not warrant the software to be error free nor does it warrant it to meet your specific requirements License Agreement ili MicroCode Engineering will a
77. only Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 339 CircuitMaker PRO only GOSUB Jumps to a subroutine in the SimCode General Form GOSUB lt label gt Parameters lt label gt Location in SimCode where program flow resumes Use The GOSUB instruction is used to perform non sequencial execution of the SimCode However unlike the GOTO statement SimCode execution will continue on the instruc tion following the GOSUB instruction when a RETURN instruction is encountered in the SimCode being run Example GOSUB Shift_Left Exit Shift_Left RETURN See Also RETURN GOTO Jumps to a new location in the SimCode General Form GOTO lt label gt Parameters lt label gt Location in SimCode where program flow resumes Use The GOTO instruction is used to perform non sequencial execution of the SimCode 17 340 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Notes Program flow resumes from the location where lt label gt appears in the SimCode lt label gt must being with an alpha character followed by any number of alpha numeric charac ters or the underscore _ character Where lt label gt appears in the code it must be followed immediately by a colon Example GOTO Shutdown Shutdown Exit See Also GOSUB IF THEN IF THEN Conditionally controls flow through the SimCode General Form 1 IF lt expression gt THEN BEGIN ELSE END General Form 2 IF lt
78. pins However to properly simulate these devices in Analog simulation mode Vcc and ground connections are required You can include them by placing entries in the Bus Data field of each digital device which references specific power and ground buses Create a power supply bus by placing a V device in the circuit with a bus identifier such as DVCC or DVDD in its Bus Data field A ground bus is already defined by the Ground symbol which contains GND in its Bus Data field If no bus is placed directly in the circuit the default values for DVCC DVDD and DGND are used These default values are specified in the Analog Options Spice Variables dialog box See Setting Up Analog Analyses later in this chapter for more information The Bus Data fields are predefined in CircuitMaker s digital devices with values such as DVCC 16 DGND 8 which also identify the specific pin numbers on the package that are connected to the buses 6 120 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Note You do not have to set test points before running a simulation CircuitMaker does it automatically according to the chosen analyses In the example in Figure 6 1 both the NAND gate and the inverter are connected to 5V and ground along with two bypass capacitors The DGND on the devices is connected to the GND bus through the Analog Options dialog box This is the same procedure used to connect the Vcc and ground pins in a PCB netlist for export to TraxMak
79. power data is not available then go to Simulation gt Analyses Setup gt Analog Options and select the Node Voltage Supply Current Device Current and Power radio button in the lower right hand corner of the dialog box Ctrl clicking with the Probe Tool sets a new voltage refer ence point the default voltage reference is ground for the current active analysis window Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 119 Bus Data Bus Data DVCC DVCC 14 DGND 7 OluF OluF Bus Data DVCC 14 DGND 7 5V gt lt r i Bus Data Analog Options Bus Data DGND GND Figure 6 1 Analog Options Bus Data DGND GND Trace Button The Trace button is only used in Digital mode Refer to the Digital Logic Simulation Tools section of Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Waveforms Button In analog mode click the Waveforms button or press F12 to open all analysis windows for which there is data in the RAW file for this circuit This allows you to view the graphs for this circuit without rerunning the simulation this is only available if the circuit has not been modified since the RAW file was created Clicking the button again closes all waveform analysis windows which also stops the simula tion just like clicking the Stop button and lets you edit the circuit You can open the analysis windows individually from the Windows menu Vcc and Ground CircuitMaker s digital devices do not include Vcc and ground
80. puter 1 Select the Probe Tool on the Toolbar 2 Using the left mouse button click the wire connected to the output of the Op Amp with the tip of the Probe Tool CircuitMaker places a Run Time Test Point on that node and displays a dialog box Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 59 Multimeter DC AVG x 3 60 12 00 Y Re f Ground Chapter 3 Tutorials Enable the AC DC and TRAN check boxes change the Max Scale of the DC graph to 15 and then click OK Click the Run button on the Toolbar to start the simulation The interactive XSpice simulation window displays showing the waveforms as the data is collected When the data collection process has completed CircuitMaker displays the analyses windows Select View gt Fit Circuit to Window or press F4 to make the entire circuit visible Click the Multimeter window to select it it s in the upper left hand corner of the screen and should say DC in the title bar Click on any wire in the circuit except a wire connected to ground with the tip of the Probe Tool Notice that the letter V displays on the Probe Tool when it s over a wire The DC voltage at that node will be displayed in the Value window Click the pin of the 12V power supply The DC current through that supply appears in the Value window Notice that the letter I appears on the Probe Tool when it s over a pin You can also measure current and power on other devices but only if you have enab
81. s digital simulation features Click the Run Tool on the Toolbar to start simulation You know that simulation is running when you see a Hex Display showing a count sequence Select the Probe Tool from the Toolbar and touch its tip to the wire just to the left of the label Probe Wire to the Left The following illustration describes the meaning of the letters that might appear in the Probe Tool depending on what part of the schematic you touch with the tool High State Pulse between High and Low States Low State Unknown or Tristate Probe Tool Trace Button Waveform Button Stop Button 5 Move the tip of the Probe Tool to the Logic Switch labeled Toggle Switch and click near its center The Logic Display connected to the output of this mini circuit should then start to toggle on and off rapidly 6 Click the Waveforms Tool button on the Toolbar to open the digital Waveforms window Each node in the circuit that has a SCOPE attached is charted in this window 7 Select Simulation gt Scope Probe A new waveform called Probe displays in the Wave forms window Watch what happens to this waveform as you move the Probe Tool around the circuit 8 Click the Trace button in the Toolbar to see the state of every wire in the circuit as the state changes 9 Click the Stop button in the Toolbar to stop simulation Tutorial 3 Analog Analysis The best way to get acquainted with CircuitMaker s
82. simulated with a simple model must use linking files with the SUB extension Transistors are an example of when a default file name is used Since the file NPNTRANS MOD does not exist CircuitMaker looks in the default file NPN MOD for the model reference information MOD linking files contain references to a collection of SPICE models and subcircuits specific to a particular discrete device symbol in CircuitMaker In some cases it is desirable to replace a model with a subcircuit which will more accurately model a particular device For example some RF or Power Transistors are not modeled well by a simple SPICE model In such cases it is OK to reference the subcircuit in the MOD file just like it was a model For more information on using models see Working with SPICE Models earlier in this chapter SUB linking files contain references to a collection of SPICE subcircuits specific to a particular device symbol in CircuitMaker For more information on using subcircuits see Editing SPICE Subcircuits earlier in this chapter Under normal circumstances the linking files should not be edited directly The file format is described below for information only The general format for a reference in a linking file is Device Description pkg PACKAGE DVCC 14 DGND 7 1 2 3 PARAM OXXXXXXXX File Filenam lib where PACKAGE DVCC 14 DGND 7 1 2 3 is the component name and pad designations in TraxMaker the bus data listed here
83. simulation current sources cannot be placed directly in series See Also V gt I Source example circuit 741 CKT Linear Voltage Controlled Voltage Sources General Form EXXXXXXX N N NC NC VALUE Netlist Example El 2 3 14 1 2 0 Spice Data Example SD 1 52 3 4 SV N is the positive node and N is the negative node Current flow is from the positive node through the source to the negative node VALUE is the voltage gain Note For SPICE simulation voltage sources cannot be placed directly in parallel See Also V gt V Source Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 263 15 264 Linear Current Controlled Current Sources General Form FXXXXXXX N N VNAM VALUE Netlist Example Fl 5 17 VS2 0 5K Spice Data Example V3D 3 4 DC OV measures controlling current SD 1 2 V D V current source N and N are the positive and negative nodes respectively Current flow is from the positive node through the source to the negative node VNAM is the name of a voltage source through which the controlling current flows The direction of positive controlling current flow is from the positive node through the source to the negative node of VNAM VALUE is the current gain Note You cannot place current sources directly in series for SPICE simulation See Also I gt I Source Linear Current Controlled Voltage Sources General Form HXXXXXXX N N VNAM VALUE Netlist Example H1 5 17 VS2 0 5K Spice Data Examp
84. simulation by choosing Simulation gt Reset or by pressing Ctrl Q Step Button 4 The Step button is used in Digital mode only Refer to Step Button in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Run Stop Button 2 Click the Run button to start the simulation The icon will change to a Stop Sign Click the Stop Sign icon to stop the simulation you can also choose Simulation gt Run and Stop or press F10 An interactive XSPICE simulation window appears showing the progress of the simulation see Using XSpice for Windows later in this chapter The amount of time it takes to complete the simulation is based on the analyses you have enabled the amount of data you are collecting the complexity of the circuit and the speed of your computer When the simulation has completed an analysis window appears for each of the selected analyses you have run Note If no changes have been made since the last simula tion was run clicking the Run button will not rerun the simulation but will immediately load the previous simulation data 6 118 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation y Yves Voltage Current Power Impedance Noise during Noise Analysis Input or output Resistance during Transfer Function analysis The Stop icon replaces the Run icon when the Run button is pressed Once the data collection sequence has ended and the analysis windows are displayed pressing the Stop button will stop the simulation closing
85. snap to 4 4 12 5 turning on or off 4 4 12 5 Ground 4 27 selecting tutorial 3 4 Ground and Vcc 6 6 Group Items 10 10 Groups of items selecting 4 12 H Hardware keys installing 1 2 HCOS 17 12 17 34 HI_IMPEDANCE 17 57 HIGH 8 1 8 9 High changing color of 13 1 Hints 8 4 8 7 8 8 hide from students 8 7 HOTKEYDB DAT file 9 8 HotKeys 4 9 assigning 4 9 introduction 2 7 reassigning 4 10 unassigning 4 10 using to select a device tutorial 3 2 HSIN 17 12 17 34 HTAN 17 12 17 34 I I gt I Source 15 20 I gt Switch 15 17 I gt V Source 15 20 VO Pins 17 39 i_param 17 7 17 28 17 37 Icc 17 33 IF THEN 4 16 17 5 17 6 17 13 17 25 IMNTYMX 15 12 17 28 Impedance Plot Analysis running 6 41 setting up 6 41 Importing and simulating SPICE netlist 9 2 Metafile devices 16 7 Include File path filename ext 4 29 Independent sources 15 17 Inductors 15 15 init_sim 17 28 Initial conditions 6 24 15 3 Input 10 9 Input loading 15 10 15 12 17 28 Input noise measuring 6 32 INPUTS 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 8 17 26 Installing Circuitmaker 1 2 hardware hw keys 1 2 multi user projects 1 6 INSTANCE 17 12 17 27 Instrument changing color of 13 1 INTEGERS 17 6 17 10 17 28 Integration method 6 48 Internal high low 8 4 Interpolative look up table 17 45 10 17 7 17 32 IO_PAIRS 17 6 17 10 17 30 17 32 Items changing color of all 13 1 grouping 10 10 selecting 4 12 selecting all 4 13 selecting groups of 4 12 selecting
86. supply s positive terminal divided by the current out of that same terminal see Figure 6 31 Clicking the positive terminal of a supply is already defined as an operation to plot current thus the negative terminal must be clicked on for impedance Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 155 CircuitMaker PRO only To measure input impedance 1 2 Run the desired simulation usually AC analysis Select the desired analysis window and then click on the negative terminal of the input source To measure output impedance 1 2 Remove the source from the input Ground the circuit s inputs where the input supply was connected Remove any load connected to the circuit Connect a two terminal source to the output with the source s positive terminal connected to the output and the source s negative terminal connected to ground Run the desired simulation Select the desired analysis window and then click on the negative terminal of the source with the Probe Tool This causes an impedance plot to appear in the selected analysis window as in Figure 6 32 Figure 6 31 For Impedance Plots you would normally change the Y axis to Magnitude Click the Settings button in the analysis window to change X and Y axes for that window 6 156 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker PRO only i L hpk 1 074 ab 1900 0k LER Yd 0 040 ccd Lit ok an a JAk rr rr at te BIk k ah
87. the single item per line format Bill of Materials for C CM Circuits Diffamp BOM Item Label Value Attributes Designation 1 1N914 DIODEO 4 D1 2 1N914 DIODEO 4 D2 3 2N2222A TO 92 1 4 2N2222A TO 92 Q2 5 2N2222A TO 92 03 6 3 2k AXIALO 4 R1 7 1 Sk AXIALO 4 R2 8 50 AXIALO 4 RB1 9 50 AXIALO 4 RB2 10 te oe AXIALO 4 REL Chapter 7 Exporting Files Multiple Items Per Line This Bill of Materials format lists components on the same line if the label value description and package fields match Columns are tab delimited The following is an example of the multiple items format Bill of Materials for C CM Circuits Diffamp BOM Item Quantity Label Value Attributes Designations 1 2 1N914 DIODEO 4 D1 D2 2 3 2N2222A TO 92 01 02 03 3 1 3 2k AXIALO 4 R1 4 1 1 5k AXIALO 4 R2 5 2 50 AXIALO 4 RB1 RB2 6 2 TD TOK AXIALO 4 RC1 RC2 7 1 260K AXIALO 4 RE As you can see in the examples the three main things listed for each item are Label Value Attributes and Designation The default attributes are package and description which can be set for each device in the Edit Device Data dialog box Notice that none of the items in the list had a description so only the package is listed If multiple attributes are present for devices then additional lines are added to list those attributes For example a group of items that has both a package and a description would require a second line to list the second attribute description 5 2 5
88. the time interval between zero and Start Time XSpice analyzes but does not display the circuit In the time interval between Start Time and Stop Time XSpice both analyzes and displays the circuit Step Time is the suggested computing increment but the timestep will be varied automatically by XSpice in order to properly con verge Max Step limits the varying size of the timestep that XSpice can use when calculating the transient data by default the program chooses either Step Time or Stop Time Start Time 50 whichever is smaller Typically Step Time Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 137 and Max Step would be the same value If you enable the UIC Use Initial Conditions option the Transient Analysis begins from an initial condition bypassing the Operating Point Analysis This is useful for viewing the charging of capacitors etc To set up and run a Transient Analysis 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click the Transient Fourier button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 14 Transient and Fourier Analysis Setup Vv E 2 500uS 2 500u5 Tue sanas o _ cren Figure 6 14 Use this dialog box to set up Transient and Fourier Analyses 3 Enter the analysis settings and choose OK 4 Run the simulation 5 Assuming you have enabled the appropriate Test Points you can view and measure voltage current and power dissipation waveforms of the circuit in the analysis window that is displ
89. to revise the program and or manual from time to time without obligation of MicroCode Engineering Inc to notify any person or organization of such change or revision MicroCode Engineering Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to the program CircuitMaker or the manual either express or implied including implied warranty of merchantability or implied fitness for a particular purpose No liability of any form shall be assumed by MicroCode Engineering Inc or its representatives nor shall direct consequential or other damages be assumed by MicroCode Engineering Inc even if MicroCode Engineering Inc has been advised of such damages This program is supplied As Is Any user of this software uses it at their own risk In any case the liability of MicroCode Engineering Inc is limited to the price the user actually paid License Agreement iv U S Government Restricted Provisions If this software is acquired by or in behalf of a unit or agency of the United States Government these provisions apply This Software a Was developed at private expense and no part of it was developed with government funds b Is a trade secret of MicroCode Engineering Inc for all purposes of the Freedom of Informa tion Act c Is commercial computer software subject to limited utilization as provided in the contract between the vendor and the governmental entity and d In all respects is proprietary data belongin
90. to set the simulation speed Choose Simulation gt Digital to display the dialog box shown in Figure 5 4 Car m E po E Figure 5 4 Use the Digital Options dialog box to control the size of a step and other digital simulation options You can define the Step Size in either ticks or cycles A cycle always consists of 10 ticks A tick is the smallest unit of delay for the digital simulator It takes one tick to perform a single step of the simulation for all devices Adjust X Magnification to view a larger or smaller section of the waveforms in the digital Waveforms window By default the magnification is set to 8 A smaller value zooms out a greater value zooms in Use Simulation Speed to control how fast the simulation runs This could be useful for example if the simulation is running too fast to view the states of a seven segment display Setting this field to a lower number slows down the simulation so you can view the changes of the display Another method of slowing the simulation would be to run it in single step mode or set breakpoints Use the Breakpoint and Conditions options in conjunction with the waveforms window to set breakpoints The follow ing table illustrates the results of various combinations of settings 5 108 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Combination Result Level And All break conditions must be met before the simulation stops Level Or Any one of the break conditions stops the simulatio
91. to voltage value v7 through resistance roh_param The low to high transition time is set by ttlh and the high to low transition time is set by tthl Notes Pin names and variables cannot be mixed in the same DRIVE statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names The values used for rol_param should be derived using the databook specs for VOL This value represents the total saturation resistance of the pull down structure of the device s output A standard LS output in the LOW state for example sinking 8mA will not exceed 0 5V typically closer to 0 35V Therefore 17 334 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only for typ LOW state drive rol_param VOLtyp IOLmax rol_param 0 35V 8mA rol_param 43 75 ohms for min LOW state drive rol_param VOLmax IOLmax rol_param 0 5V 8mA rol_param 62 5 ohms The values used for roh_param should be derived using the databook specs for IOS if available This value represents the total saturation resistance of the pull up structure of the device s output A standard LS output in the HIGH state with the output shorted to ground and Vec 5 25V will source at least 20mA but not more than 100mA Therefore for min HIGH state drive roh_param VCCmax 1OSmin roh_param 5 25V 20mA roh_param 262 5 ohms for max HIGH state drive roh_param VCCmax TOSmax roh_param 5 25V 100mA roh_param 52 5 ohms Example rol_param MIN_TYP_MAX
92. used within these strings If any of these required items is missing an error message will appear Exporting to Popular PCB Netlist Formats CircuitMaker can export PCB netlists in the following formats making your design usable in any product that supports these PCB netlist formats e TraxMaker e Protel e Tango e Orcad PCB II CircuitMaker PRO only e PADS CircuitMaker PRO only e CadNetix CircuitMaker PRO only e Calay CircuitMaker PRO only e Calay 90 CircuitMaker PRO only Note that package description names and pin numbers for each device in CircuitMaker must have exact matches to the library footprints of the pcb layout program you are using For example let s say your schematic contains a resistor and you want that resistor to use an AXIALO 4 footprint when the netlist is imported into TraxMaker You would need to make sure that the name AXIALO 4 is in the Package field of that resistor double click on a part in CircuitMaker to access the Edit Device Data dialog box to view and edit the package field To export a PCB netlist format other than the TraxMaker format 1 Choose File gt Export gt PCB Netlist 2 Select the appropriate format from the drop down list such as Orcad PCB II 3 Type the name of the netlist file and then choose Save Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 185 TraxMaker PCB Netlist Format TraxMaker is a powerful pcb layout and autorouting program from MicroCode Engineering
93. with the Wire Tool arrow of the transistor When the cursor gets close to the pin a small rectangle appears 3 Click and hold the left mouse button then drag the wire to the pin of the Ground symbol 4 Release the mouse button to make the connection If Options gt Show Pin Dots is enabled a small dot will be placed at each connection point to verify the connection see circuit example on the following page Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 47 3 48 Vee 15V RB RC 220k 870k A 2N2222A The completed schematic Open Button DIO Rl Run Tool Chapter 3 Tutorials Place the cursor on the bottom pin of RC and then click and hold the mouse button to start a new wire Drag the end of the wire to the collector pin of the transistor and release the mouse button Connect a wire from the top pin of RC to Vcc Connect another wire from the bottom pin of RB to the base of the transistor Finally connect a wire from the top pin of RB to the middle of the wire which connects Vcc to RC You can move device and wire positions by dragging them with the mouse Tutorial 2 Simulating a Digital Circuit The best way to see how the digital simulation works is to load an example circuit and try some commands 1 2 Click the Open button in the Toolbar Select the SIM CKT file from the list of available circuits The SIM CKT circuit contains several mini circuits and is useful for demonstrating CircuitMaker
94. you enter is contained in a device s major class name minor class name symbol name or model description However only the symbol name and model description appear in the match list Figure 4 4 This example shows the found set after typing the word voltage in the Device Search dialog box If a search produces items that don t seem to match the search text you entered it might be because the match occurred with the major or minor class names which are not displayed The Device Search feature accepts partial words to match devices For example a search text of op would find Op Amp or loop You can also use an asterisk as a wild card For 4 76 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics example entering 74 8 matches 748 7408 74LS08 74138 74285 and so on If you enter multiple words as the search text a match for each word is found though not in the order you enter them For example typing 741 op amp and op amp 741 would both give the same results To search for a device 1 Click the Device Search button on the Toolbar OR Select Devices gt Search or press Shift X 2 Type a device name number or description in the text box then choose Find 3 Use the scroll bar if necessary to scroll through the list When you find the device click it to highlight it 4 Select Return after Place to return to the Device Search dialog box after placing an item 5 Toeliminate the need to click the Place butt
95. 0 AXIALO 4 RB1 RB2 5 Resistor Saving Displaying and Printing the Bill of Materials To save the Bill of Materials to a file 1 Enter the desired output file path and name in the Bill of Materials dialog box 2 Click the Save button Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 177 7 178 To display the Bill of Materials 1 Click the Display button The Bill of Materials appears in the Notepad editor 2 Choose File gt Print in the Notepad editor to print the Bill of Materials Including Attributes Use the Include Attributes field in the Bill of Materials dialog box to enter items that you want to appear in the attribute column of the Bill of Materials These items must be separated by commas and should be listed in the order that you want them to appear in the Bill of Materials There are two predefined attributes package and description These are listed as the default attributes in the Include Attributes field Deleting an item from the Include Attributes field excludes that attribute from the Bill of Materials You can enter other attributes in the Include Attributes field if they are defined an attribute file as described below Creating an Attribute File You can create an attribute file to define additional at tributes To use an attribute file 1 Create an attribute file 2 Select the attribute file in the Attribute File field of the Bill of Materials dialog box by typing the full path and naming the file or by clicking
96. 0 should be derived using the databook specs for ICC For a 74LS151 Icc typ is 6mA at Vec 5V and Icc max is 10mA at Vec 5 25V Therefore for Icc typ r0 5V 6mA 833 ohms for Icc max r0 5 25V 10mA 525 ohms If creating a multiple parts per package device such as a 74LS00 quad NAND gate you should adjust the Icc load for the individual parts accordingly Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 349 CircuitMaker PRO only 17 350 Examples r0_val MIN_TYP_MAX 1d_param NULL NULL 125k rl_val MIN_TYP_MAX ld_param NULL NULL 10 5k ricc_val MIN_TYP_MAX ld_param NULL 833 525 LOAD PRE_LD DATA_LD CLK_LD CLR_LD v0 vol_param r0 r0_val vl voh_param rl r1_val io le9 t 1p LOAD VCC_LD v0 gnd_param r0 ricc_val t 1p See Also IO_PAIRS DRIVE MATH FUNCTIONS Function POW ACOS ATAN HSIN HCOS HTAN See Also OPERATORS Chapter 17 Digital SimCode Description power absolute value square root exponent natural log log base 10 sine cosine tangent arc sine arc cosine arc tangent hyperbolic sine hyperbolic cosine hyperbolic tangent Example X 12 POW 3 X ABS 12 X SORT 2 X EXP 10 X LOG 0 1 X LOG10 0 1 X SIN 0 1 X COS 0 1 X TAN 0 1 X ASIN 0 1 X ACOS 0 1 X ATAN 0 1 X HSIN 0 1 X HCOS 0 1 X HTAN 0 1 CircuitMaker PRO only MESSAGE Displays a message without pausing
97. 1 225 Macro Utilities The Macro Utilities option on the Macros menu displays the dialog box pictured in Figure 11 3 which enables you to save expand or delete a macro The following sections describe the use of these features Figure 11 3 The Macro Utilities dialog box lets you save expand or delete a macro Save Macro The Save Macro button on the Macro Utilities dialog box lets you to save or resave a macro device If there is no macro expanded or newly defined in the work area this button is grayed Refer also to the section Save Macro described earlier in this chapter To save a macro follow these steps 1 Select both a major and minor device class to indicate where the device is saved in the device library Note You can add new major and minor class names by typing in a new name in the Major Device Class and Minor Device Class text edit fields 2 Click Save Macro CircuitMaker saves the macro in the USER LIB file and clears the workspace 11 226 Chapter 11 Macros Menu Class Selected Device Use the Add and Remove buttons in the Class Selected Drive group box to move devices into different major and minor device classes To use this group box follow these steps 1 Select the device in the circuit window 2 Choose Macros gt Macro Utilities 3 Select the major and minor device classes from the list boxes 4 Click Add to add the device to the selected classes OR Click Remove to remove the d
98. 3 20 running 6 20 setting up 6 20 show wave grid 3 20 tutorial 3 17 Access faults 8 5 Accessing a project 1 8 ACCT 15 9 ACOS 17 12 17 34 ADCSTEP 15 12 Adding existing models to new macro symbol 16 25 existing shapes 16 6 new models to existing symbols 16 24 new subcircuits to existing symbol 16 28 text to schematic 4 2 ADDSHUNTS 15 2 Agreement Software License iii Alias models 16 36 parameter passing 16 38 subcircuits 16 37 Always Set Defaults 6 18 Ammeter 6 50 Analog Analyses AC 6 20 and test points 6 7 DC 6 19 DC Operating Point 6 22 Fourier 6 29 Index 383 Impedance Plot 6 41 in fault simulations 8 8 Monte Carlo 6 36 Noise 6 32 Parameter Sweep 6 26 setting up 6 18 setting up tutorial 3 16 Sweep Trace Labels 6 28 Temperature Sweep 6 35 Transfer Function 6 30 Transient 6 23 tutorial 3 7 Analog only devices 5 2 6 2 17 9 analog check box 6 3 editing 4 25 showing 4 8 Analog simulation definition 6 1 running 6 11 tools 6 3 using Digital Simcode devices 3 20 Analog Digital devices 5 2 6 2 Analog SPICE variables setting up 6 47 Analysis Probe Name 4 30 Analysis Windows displaying waveforms 6 12 using 6 11 Angle of bus connection wire changing 4 19 Arcs drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definition 16 13 Arrow Tool activating 4 2 Arrow Wire option 12 2 flipping switches 4 2 moving items 4 2 selecting 4 2 selecting items with 4 2 selecting other tools 4 2 using 4 2 wiring with 12 2 Index
99. 48 Integration Method nia iaini 6 48 Analysis Data Saved in AAW PllE coonio ico nietas 6 48 Analog Mixed Signal Instruments ooooccccnnncccccnnoocccncnnnanancnonarnncn naar nn 6 49 A A tates ethos dese tues ven AMA 6 49 Multifunction Signal Generator iia ida 6 50 Accessing the Signal Generator Editor ocococciciincnnoncnnonennonennrncnornonornnnornoneronennss 6 51 Editing Sms Wave Dalai uct cel Rereceeni cance tania 6 52 Editing AM Signal Data st EA 6 54 Editing FM Signal Dat ita 6 55 Editing Exponential Data o ls 6 56 Editing Pulse Data i 6 57 Editing Piece Wise Data da 6 58 Data SS QUIEN as 6 59 Chapter 7 Exporting Files Bill of Materials seins AA edi edduauceelietalaiees 7 1 Single item Per Line ci A iia deeded 7 2 Multiple Items Per Line wos assesses eee Sheahan iaa 7 3 Saving Displaying and Printing the Bill of Materials ooononinidnnnnininnccnnnnnnnnncco 7 3 Including Attributes A 7 4 Creating an Attribute aa 7 4 Setting Up Export Options scort 7 7 Exporting Waveforms as Graphics ccoooooccccccnnonocccccccnnnancccncnnnnnanccnnnnnnnnns 7 8 Contents xii Exporting Circuits as Graphics seua 7 8 Expo rting a SPIGE Netlist esses octets wert eseriieice des eeeamnnad enaena iiaa 7 9 Exporting a SPICE SUDCICUI isis ctcscccucactensecetedencssnanaccededenie tien cidade 7 9 Exporting a PCB Netlist oooccccnccnnccccnccncnnnnnnccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnnn 7 10 A A O amslncs E ansenctavaintnae eats 7 10
100. 6 Creating New Devices Macro Copier The following steps illustrate how you can use the Macro Copier to copy your macros into a new version of USER LIB 1 Choose Macros gt Macro Copier to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 11 4 Figure 11 4 Use this dialog box to copy macros from one macro library to another 2 Click lower left Open button to display the Open dialog box CircuitMaker asks you if you want to list only the user defined devices 11 228 Chapter 11 Macros Menu 3 If you are copying devices that you have created click Yes 4 Select the file from which macros will be copied This is the library file which has your macros in it probably USER LIB in your old CircuitMaker directory 5 Click the lower right Open or New button to display either the Open or the Save As dialog box 6 Select the file to which macros will be copied This is usually the USER LIB file in your new CircuitMaker directory 7 Select a macro to copy from the left hand file list If a macro already exists with the same name CircuitMaker will delete the existing macro 8 Click the gt gt gt Copy gt gt gt button CircuitMaker might prompt you for information regard ing the simulation mode for which the device is in tended If the device can be used in digital simulations check the Digital box if it can be used in analog simulations check the Analog box If it can be used in either simulation mode check both box
101. 6 16 using measurement cursors 6 15 using Setup button 6 15 viewing multiple 6 5 6 13 Waveforms Button activating 5 5 selecting 6 6 using 5 5 6 6 WHILE DO 17 13 17 64 WIDTH 17 7 17 11 17 65 WIDTH_TIME 17 12 Window menu Cascade Windows 13 3 Tile Windows 13 3 Windows metafile 7 7 Wire Tool 4 2 8 7 activating 4 2 disabling for instruction 8 7 drawing bus wires 4 2 drawing dashed lines 4 2 using 4 2 using tutorial 3 12 Wires auto routing 4 14 bus connection 4 18 bus working with 4 17 changing color of 13 1 cutting 4 16 extending 4 16 joining 4 16 moving devices with connected 4 17 routing manually 4 15 Index 402 straightening 10 4 using SmartWires feature 4 14 Wiring 4 14 acircuit 4 14 a circuit tutorial 3 5 auto wire routing 4 14 manual wire routing 4 14 with Arrow Wire Tool 12 2 with connectors 4 19 with Quick Connect 4 14 4 16 with the Wire Tool 4 2 Word Generator 5 11 see also Data Sequencer 6 59 Workspace introduction 2 1 Worst case distribution 6 37 Wrong value 8 2 X XSpice for Windows 17 1 17 6 NET file output 6 45 RAW file output 6 45 about 6 43 using 6 43 Z ZERO 17 7 17 31 17 53 17 55 Zoom Tool 13 2 activating 4 3 magnifying the circuit 4 3 reducing the circuit 4 3 setting the scale step 4 3 using 4 3 using page down key instead 4 3 using page up key instead 4 3
102. 7 fault simulations 8 7 Device Symbol 4 8 Device Plot Font 9 5 DEVICEDB DAT file 9 8 Devices analog only 5 2 6 2 analog digital 5 2 6 2 browsing 4 7 changing color of 13 1 changing labels of 4 21 creating macro 16 19 creating new 16 1 creating symbols 16 2 designation 4 23 digital only 5 2 6 2 editing 4 22 elementary SPICE 15 13 expanding macro 16 17 filtering list of 4 8 flipping 4 4 moving when wires connected 4 17 naming 4 22 nudging 4 13 placing 4 12 renumbering designations of 12 1 repeating placed 12 1 rotating in 90 degree increments 4 3 schematic symbol only 5 2 6 2 searching for 4 10 selecting from library 4 7 selecting in schematic 4 12 symbol 3 3 DGND 6 6 6 48 Digital digital options 5 7 model parameters 17 49 options for fault simulation 8 8 SimCode devices 17 1 SimCode example 17 4 SimCode language 17 1 Digital devices editing 4 25 showing 4 8 Digital instruments data sequencer 5 11 pattern editor 5 12 pulser 5 10 Digital logic simulation debugging with Trace feature 5 5 definition 5 1 digital options 5 8 measuring wire states 5 4 observing operation of circuit 5 5 opening closing waveforms 5 5 performing 5 2 resetting the simulation 5 3 running 5 4 Step button 5 4 stopping 5 4 tutorial 3 6 types of devices permitted in 5 2 using the Digital Analog button 5 3 using Trace feature 5 2 what is 5 1 Digital model parameters editing 16 40 Digital only devices 5 2 6 2 Digital options 5 8 bre
103. 8 Named Subcircuit X 4 29 Node number 4 30 Package P 4 29 Subcircuit S 4 29 Value V 4 28 SQRT 17 12 17 34 SRCSTEP 15 9 Starting a CKT file 2 9 CircuitMaker 2 1 TraxMaker from CircuitMaker 7 13 STATE 17 7 17 11 17 53 State of Probe Tool I current 3 10 6 5 N noise 6 5 P power 3 10 6 5 R input or output resistance 6 5 V voltage 3 9 6 5 Z impedance 6 5 STATE_BIT 17 5 17 11 17 55 Step Button using 5 4 STEP_OFF 17 13 17 56 STEP_ON 17 13 17 56 Stopping a simulation 3 20 6 4 Storing waveforms 6 16 Straighten Wires 10 4 STRENGTH 17 11 Strength 17 54 17 55 STRONG 17 57 Student use disabling circuit options 8 6 displaying access faults 8 5 fault password 8 4 hint message 8 4 managing circuit faults 8 6 Subcircuit S 4 29 Subcircuit Linking Files 11 6 Subcircuits 4 29 15 27 adding to exiting symbol 16 28 adding to new macro symbols 16 29 and model linking files 16 32 editing SPICE 16 27 exporting SPICE 7 9 linking files 17 2 plotting internal variables 6 13 Suggested readings for SPICE 15 30 Supply current 15 11 15 12 Supply voltage 6 46 15 12 SUPPLY_MIN_MAX 17 6 17 10 17 58 Support getting Technical 1 8 Sweep trace labels using 6 28 Switching between digital analog mode 3 8 Symbol Editor adding DIP packages 16 7 adding existing shape 16 6 adding LCC packages 16 7 adding QFP packages 16 7 deleting shapes and elements 16 6 drawing symbols with mouse 16 4
104. AME lt AREA gt lt OFF gt lt IC VDS VGS gt lt TEMP T gt Netlist Example J2 6 3 21 J2N3819 OFF Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 SM 67 ND NG and NS are the drain gate and source nodes respectively MNAME is the model name AREA is the area factor and OFF indicates an optional initial condition on the device for Operating Point Analysis The initial condition specification using IC VDS VGS only applies if you have enabled UIC for the Transient Analysis TEMP is the temperature at which this device operates and overrides the temperature specification in the Analog Options dialog See Also N JFET P JFET Example circuit CSJEAMP CKT Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 269 15 270 MOSFETs General Form MXXXXX ND NG NS NB MNAME lt L VAL gt lt W VAL gt lt AD VAL gt lt AS VAL gt lt PD VAL gt lt PS VAL gt lt NRD VAL gt lt NRS VAL gt lt OFF gt lt IC VDS VGS VBS gt lt TEMP T gt Netlist Example M6 23 16 0 17 MRF150 Spice Data Example SD 1 52 3 3 SM TEMP 55 ND NG NS and NB are the drain gate source and bulk substrate nodes respectively MNAME is the model name L and W are the channel length and width in meters AD and AS are the areas of the drain and source diffusions in meters Note that the suffix U specifies microns 1e 6 m and P sq microns le 12 m If any of L W AD or AS are not specified default values are used The use of defaults simplifies input file prepa
105. Breaks in the View menu CircuitMaker supports all printers and printer options in the Printer dialog box Printer setups will vary depending on the device you are printing to but typically options such as page orientation and reduction factor are available Print Waveforms Choose File gt Print Waveforms to print the waveforms to a printer or save them to a print file Only the information currently displayed in the active Waveforms or Analysis window is printed Preferences Choose Preferences Figure 9 2 to change the default settings of CircuitMaker Preferences are stored in the CIRMAKER DAT file FP das Repas D imana Tool E Single Dick Canas F bop Tobar DV Parent io Sa E D Denig sai ayer Connection raa Hace alee ring Delak Turai Ari 2p mPp angle Trt raja E r ied F ha T ipa Pira Pes pecker fa E qa Orei Ea Denpasar peed Fit xe a Tiin fimi Emo E E a 5i F irene FP T Fin Page desta D She Hodes Humber Depp D Lot Pee Moret ae on eee T Pepe C ihai D bh Peo Cte r sa foia T M Paducad 1 Fag E iher Doge FF baso Piin ee ee sacon Fcio rg Carcel Figure 9 2 The Preferences dialog box lets you change everything from program defaults to circuit defaults The options you set in the Program Defaults group box remain in effect no matter what circuit is loaded while the items in the Circuit Defaults group box are saved with each individual circuit Click Factory Settings to reset all the Preferences to the
106. CircuitMaker Integrated Schematic Capture and Circuit Simulation 407 c221 Y R230 ce v v yi EWptrig te 360p 47K 8 40 400 409 vee LY o CRZOS 1 R226 cz10 CRZO5 R221 2 2K 1N4004 33p 1N4004 y 15K R223 0208 cz10 c207 100p 33p ft 47K 100p R231 10k R225 R227 20k 27K 6 8K 2N4931 R222 cR207 23904 1 0207 184004 0206 23904 iz 2N3904 gana 39K 100R R232 27K R229 0208 a47 OR ia vdd 213250 O 5Y User Manual CircuitMaker 6 CircuitMaker PRO Revision C Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of MicroCode Engineering The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license or nondisclosure agreement The purchaser may make one copy of the software for backup purposes No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the express written permission of MicroCode Engineering Copyright O 1988 1998 MicroCode Engineering Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in the Unit
107. Current controlled current sources 15 20 switches 15 17 voltage sources 15 20 CURRENTMNS 15 11 17 37 CURRENTMXS 15 11 17 38 Cursors 6 15 Curve tracer 6 19 Cut 10 1 disabling for instruction 8 7 Cutting wires 4 3 4 16 D Dashed lines drawing with the Wire Tool 4 2 Data Sequencer 5 11 10 9 selecting 3 21 start address 5 11 stop address 5 11 Index 386 user external clock 5 11 DC Analysis DC Sweep running 6 19 setting up 6 19 troubleshooting failures 15 3 tutorial 3 16 warnings 15 3 Debug 17 13 DEFAD 15 6 DEFAS 15 6 Default Font 9 5 Default Test Points description 6 8 Defaults 9 4 restoring 2 8 DEFL 15 6 DEFW 15 6 DELAY 17 6 17 7 17 11 17 16 Delete Macro 11 5 Delete Tool activating 4 2 cutting or dividing wire 4 3 deleting items 4 2 deleting wires 4 2 disabling for instruction 8 7 using 4 2 using tutorial 3 10 Deleting items 10 2 shapes and elements 16 6 tutorial 3 10 with Delete key 4 3 with Delete Tool 4 2 Dependent sources 15 21 Description in spice data string I 4 29 label 4 24 Designation 4 23 4 29 10 5 changing tutorial 3 14 device designations 12 1 in spice data string D 4 29 prefix 4 24 renumbering new device 12 1 Device Dependent Bitmap 7 7 Device Display Data 12 4 Device faults 8 3 8 4 adding 8 3 enabling 8 3 label value 8 3 Device Independent Bitmap 7 7 Device library 4 7 and fault simulations 8 8 using tutorial 3 1 Device replacement disabling for instruction 8
108. Disable the fault data for all selected devices does not delete the fault data Clear Hints Replacements Clear the flags Circuit Default Values Use the Circuit Default Values group box to set the default values that correspond to the various faults in Analog Simulation mode These defaults can be overridden for each device individually Value Default Value For the Invisible HIGH Voltage source to which the specified pins of a device are connected when a HIGH fault is specified The factory default is 5V Chapter 8 Fault Simulation 8 197 8 198 Value Default Value For the Invisible LOW Voltage source to which the specified pins of a device are connected when a LOW fault is specified The factory default is OV OPEN Resistor placed between the specified pins and the device The factory default is 1G ohm SHORT Resistors that are daisy chained between the specified pins of the device The factory default is 1m ohm Fault Lock Password The instructor might enter a password in this field to restrict access to the fault data If you enter a password here all fault data is password protected If the password is deleted the fault data will no longer be protected Passwords are case sensitive and may be up to 15 characters in length They may include any printable character excluding Tab or Enter Warning If you forget the password you will not be able to access the fault data for the circuit Creating Black Box Ma
109. E atat 4 24 POO A A dak Wuasata duthts 4 25 Contents ix A O A stargate 4 25 o ec de E R i 4 26 B s Data sais 4 26 Spics D la taria 4 28 Example of Using SPICE Dalarnas ia 4 30 Exclude from PCB os ios ios 4 31 Exclude from Bill of Materials ccccccsecsesscsssscsscsscsesscsecsecsecessecseceeeesesaeeatees 4 31 A a a A ines E E E 4 31 Faults se E 4 33 Printing and Exporting Circuits vicio id 4 33 Ei ner eee tee eae Nee en Eerie ety Penn ee pater 4 33 Exporting Circuits as Graphics uranio nme TT ne 4 34 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation CircuitMaker s Simulation Modes ooooooccccccnnccoconccccccccnnnnnannnnnnnnonanannnons 5 1 Devices and Simulation cccccccccccseessecsecsesseseesecsesecsecsesseseecessessesaesaesasseesesansaees 5 2 Using the Digital Logic Simulator ooonnnnnccccnnnnccccnonccccnnnnnnnnnaccncnnnnnnn 5 2 Digital Logic Simulation Tools variar aa 5 3 Digital Analog Button cdi 5 3 Reset BUOM nasienia raei a aN ea aa aea aiana iaeia eeii 5 3 Step BUON soii 5 4 RUS BUON eeestis aei aen eiea aaa eE EE aa a e eS T E 5 4 Probe Tool O o eastern ce etooetars 5 4 A e a DONE a ern Se eee 5 5 Waveforms A nnne 5 5 Propagation Delays cine 5 6 Digital WS iaa 5 7 Digital OPIO suit aia 5 8 Setting Breakpoints in a Circuit ooicccnnnnncnnnnnnnnncccnnoncnnnnccnn arar cnn 5 9 Di ital ASTM GINS sarao 5 9 A A A A 5 9 Pc A A ete ees a eccc aie 5 10 A ame secetsese est veins end steers acnues ees es cehuoseseesicnue
110. G rol_param and tblIndex is set to 4 See Also REALS STATE STATE_BIT TABLE 17 338 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only FREQUENCY FMAX Tests inputs for minimum and maximum frequency violation General Form FREQUENCY lt input gt lt input gt MIN lt frequency gt MAX lt frequency gt lt message gt Parameters lt input gt Name of or variable index to the input pin under test MIN Minimum frequency allowed on the pin under test MAX Maximum frequency allowed on the pin under test lt message gt Text string that will be displayed if a warning occurs Use The FREQUENCY function compares the lt input gt period the time from one low to high edge to the next low to high edge with the reciprical of the specified lt frequency gt 1 freq If the time period for the lt input gt is smaller than the reciprical of the specified MAX lt frequency gt or the time period for the lt input gt is greater than the reciprocal of the specified MIN lt frequency gt then a WARNING will be displayed An optional lt message gt string can be included in the FREQUENCY statement which will be output if a WARNING is displayed Notes Databook specifications should be used with this function Pin and variable names can be mixed in the same FRE QUENCY statement Only the first FREQUENCY failure for each pin listed will be reported Example FREQUENCY CLK MAX 10MEG CLK check fmax
111. IN gt value the first lt OUT gt value is returned If the lt IN var gt value is greater than the last lt INn gt value then the last lt OUTn gt value is returned Linear interpolation is done between enteries according to the formula value OUTA OUTB INA INB lt IN var gt INA OUTA where lt IN var gt falls between the input compare values INA and INB The actual output value will fall between output values OUTA and OUTB Notes Two or more IN OUT data value pairs must be entered and the IN values must be entered in assending order There is no limit to the maximum number of IN OUT data pairs that can be entered Example twh PWL_TABLE var 5 180n 10 120n 15 80n In this example if var 10 then twh 120n and if var 12 then twh 104 See Also SELECT_VALUE Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 361 CircuitMaker PRO only PWR_GND_PINS Declares power and ground pins records supply voltage General Form PWR_GND_PINS lt pwrpin gt lt gndpin gt Parameters lt pwrpin gt name of the power pin lt gndpin gt name of the ground pin Use The PWR_GND_PINS statement defines which of the INPUTS pins are power and ground and sets the Power and Ground parameters of the device to absolute voltages as follows pwr_param voltage on lt pwrpin gt gnd_param voltage on lt gndpin gt Notes This statement can only be used once in the SimCode Only one pin can be defined for power and one for groun
112. Inc Itis fully compat ible with CircuitMaker and the products are designed to work together seamlessly giving you a complete start to finish design system TraxMaker s netlist format is identical to the Tango and Protel netlist formats and TraxMaker accepts either a dash or acomma delimiter between the designator and pin number U1 16 or U1 16 Some netlists including TraxMaker netlists provide separate formats for component descrip tions and connections Others combine the two sets of data in a single section The following describes the TraxMaker pcb netlist format Character What it Does Marks the start of each component description U8 Labels the Component Designator Designation field DIP16 Indicates the package description type or pattern Package field An identical description is required in the TraxMaker component library TALS 138 Shows the component s comment or value Compare with Label Value field Blank line Left blank for future provision There are usually three blank lines Marks the end of the component descrip tion Marks the start of each net NET3 Names the net U8 3 Shows the first component by designa tor and pin number Pin numbers in TraxMaker library components must be an exact match 7 186 Chapter 7 Exporting Files Export to TraxMaker automatically using the TraxMaker Button J21 1 Indicates the second pin in the net U5 5 Indicates another pin
113. L LENGTH gt lt W WIDTH gt lt TEMP T gt Netlist Examples R1 1 2 10K R3 5 6 RMODEL L 12u W 1u Spice Data Example SD 1 2 SM TEMP 100 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 257 15 258 This is the more general form of the resistor It allows modeling of temperature effects and calculation of the actual resistance value from strictly geometric information and the specifications of the process If VALUE is specified 1t overrides the geometric information and defines the resistance If MNAME is specified then the resistance may be calculated from the process information in the model MNAME and the given LENGTH and WIDTH If VALUE is not specified then MNAME and LENGTH must be speci fied If WIDTH is not specified then it is taken from the default width given in the model The optional TEMP value is the temperature at which this device is to operate and overrides the temperature specification in the Analog Options dialog box Capacitors General Form CXXXXXXX N N VALUE lt IC INCOND gt Netlist Example C2 13 0 0 1UF C5 7 0 10UF IC 3V Spice Data Example SD 1 2 SV IC 12V N is the positive node and N is the negative node VALUE is the capacitance in Farads The initial condition is the initial time zero value of the capacitor voltage Initial conditions only apply if the UIC option is enabled for the Transient Analysis If N is at a higher voltage than N the current flow through the capacitor is positive
114. LAI A LELE F F Missouri Li Dir Figure 6 9 A DC Analysis waveform The waveform in Figure 6 9 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 8 Notice that the x axis represents the voltage of the primary source and the y axis is the voltage at the output of the circuit The waveforms correspond with each step of the secondary source See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms AC Analysis AC Sweep AC Analysis generates output like that of a Bode plotter computing the small signal AC output variables as a function of frequency It performs an Operating Point Analysis to determine the DC bias of the circuit replaces the signal source with a fixed amplitude sine wave generator and analyzes the circuit over the frequency range you specify The desired output of an AC small signal analysis is usually a transfer function voltage gain transimpedance etc To set up and run an AC Analysis 1 Connect at least one Signal Generator to the circuit and enable it as an AC Analysis source 6 134 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Do this by double clicking the Signal Generator clicking Wave and setting up the AC Analysis Source options 2 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 3 Click the AC Sweep button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 10 AC Analysis Setup iv 1 000MegHz EJ
115. Note the square brackets surrounding the input nodes and the output nodes In the Spice Data field the power and ground buses include the letter b to indicate that node numbers for these pins come from the Bus Data field See Also Digital SimCode Devices Example circuit Logic Probe ckt See Chapter 17 Digital SimCode NODESET Statement General Form NODESET V NODNUM VAL V NODNUM VAL Netlist Example NODESET V 7 3 33 V 11 1 5 The Nodeset line helps the program find the dc or initial transient solution by making a preliminary pass with the specified nodes held to the given voltages The restriction is then released and the iteration continues to the true solu tion The INODESET line may be necessary for convergence on bistable or astable circuits In general this line should not be necessary See Also NODESET Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics IC Statement General Form IC V NODNUM VAL V NODNUM VAL Netlist Example IC V 3 2 5 V 4 1 V 9 1 The IC line is for setting transient initial conditions It has two different interpretations depending on whether or not you have enabled the UIC parameter in the Transient Analysis Also don t confuse this line with the NODESET line The NODESET line is only to help DC convergence and does not affect final bias solution except for multi stable circuits The two interpretations of this line are as follows e When you have enab
116. OLD test will be made only if the state of the lt data input gt matches the time parameter TSL or THL LOW TSH or THH HIGH when the lt clk input gt makes the specified transition LH or HL For example if lt clk input gt LH and TSL is specified then the lt data input gt must be LOW when the lt clk input gt goes from LOW to HIGH for a SETUP test to be made Pin names and variables can can be mixed in the same SETUP_HOLD statement Example SETUP_HOLD CLK LH DATA Ts ts_val Th th_val CLK gt DATA STATE Sets outputs to the declared logic state General Form 1 STATE lt output gt lt output gt lt expression gt General Form 2 STATE lt output gt lt output gt ZERO ONE UNKNOWN Parameters lt output gt Name of or variable index to the output pin lt expression gt Any expression to be compared to VIL or VIH Use The state of an output pin is determined by its level and its strength The STATE command sets the level and strength for one or more output pins or variables If lt expression gt is less than or equal to vil_param the output will be set to ZERO If lt expression gt is greater than or equal to vih_param the output will be set to ONE Otherwise the output will be set to UNKNOWN The level and strength values are set according the the state Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 369 CircuitMaker PRO only lt expression gt State Level Strength lt vol_param
117. P Inserts the Package label into the SPICE data string Bus Data B Inserts the entire Bus Data field into the SPICE data string Named Subcircuit X Inserts the specified subcircuit into the SPICE data string If the subcircuit resides in a SUB file other than the one associated with the symbol name of the current device the SUB file name where the subcircuit is located must also be specified For example XUA741 or XUA741 0PAMPS Include File path filename ext Inserts the ASCII text file filename into the SPICE data string by using SPICE s INCLUDE command Path is the same as the current circuit unless enclosed in quote marks Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 95 Node number Inserts the node number for the specified pin into the SPICE data string Number refers to the position of the pin in the Edit Device Pin Data dialog box For example the pin at the top of the list is represented by 1 the next pin down is 2 etc See Pins later in this section Analysis Probe Name Inserts the output node number associated with an Analysis Probe For example TP1 or TP1 inserts the node number associated with the pin of the Analysis Probe that has the name TP1 TP1 inserts the node number associated with the pin Example of Using SPICE Data The following examples show how you can use the SPICE Data field when creating custom devices Example 1 If resistor R3 h
118. PEs Digital Instrument t to points of interest in the circuit you can graph the states of these nodes over time as the simulation runs Choose Simulation gt Display Waveforms or click the Waveforms button in the Toolbar to display or hide the digital Waveforms window An example of the waveforms window is shown in Figure 5 3 A Orr Breakpoint check boxes n Dirr Orm Figure 5 3 The Waveforms window lets you graph the states of nodes over time as the simulation runs Before you can view timing waveforms for any node in your circuit you must connect a SCOPE to each node you want to monitor or choose Simulation gt Scope Probe to monitor the states of the Probe Tool in the Waveforms window Changing Waveform Order To change the order of waveforms 1 Point the mouse at any of the scope labels in the waveform window 2 Press and continue to hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the rectangle to the desired position 4 Release the mouse button Notice that the waveforms are automatically reordered in the window Repeat this process as often as desired in order to position the waveforms in any order When you save a circuit to disk CircuitMaker also saves the order of the waveforms Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 107 Digital Options Use the Digital Options dialog box to control the size of a step when running the simulation in single step mode to set the conditions for break points and
119. Points can measure voltage current or power dissipation Note that you can also plot waveforms by simply clicking with the Probe Tool after the simulation is complete You can place Run Time Test Points on wires to measure node voltages on device pins to measure current or on devices themselves to measure power dissipation CircuitMaker displays waveforms only if it actually collects data by default or by the Test Points you define CircuitMaker does not display waveforms for some devices such as those containing subcircuits To place Run Time Test Points in the circuit 1 Stop the simulation 2 Select the Probe Tool from the Toolbar 3 Click the appropriate locations in the circuit using the left mouse button to display the Run Time Test Point dialog box pictured in Figure 6 2 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 123 Figure 6 2 Use the Run Time Test Point dialog box to choose the type of analysis data you want to see 4 Specify which type of analysis data you want to see by checking the applicable check box AC AC in decibels DC or Transient 5 If you like you can specify the minimum and maximum Y scale values that will be used on each graph This is optional 6 Place a check in the Combine Plots With Same Analy sis and Scale check box for each Run Time Test Point that you want to combine for displaying multiple waveforms on the same graph during simulation 7 Choose OK When combining Run Time Test Poi
120. Specify the series resistance parameters of your models and increase the GMIN option by a factor of 10 Specify the initial condition of semiconductor devices especially diodes as OFF Use initial conditions Enable the UIC check box for Transient Analysis in the Analyses Setup dialog box Place IC devices in your circuit or set the applicable initial conditions to assist in the initial stages of the Transient Analysis Solving DC Analysis Failures 1 Check the circuit topology and connectivity See the common mistakes listed under Step 1 of Solving Operating Point Analysis Failures earlier in this chapter Increase ITL2 to 200 in the Analog Options dialog box This will allow the DC Analysis to go through more iterations for each step before giving up Make the steps in the DC sweep larger or smaller If discontinuities exist in a device model perhaps between the linear and saturation regions of the model increas ing the step size may allow the simulation to step over the discontinuity Making the steps smaller will allow the simulation to resolve rapid voltage transition discontinuities Do not use DC Analysis Some problems such as hysteresis cannot be resolved by DC Analysis In such cases it is more effective to use Transient Analysis by ramping the appropriate power sources Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 247 Solving Transient Analysis Failures 1 Check the circuit topology and connectivity See th
121. Spice Data This field is used to specify the SPICE simulation data for the device The analog devices provided with CircuitMaker already have default SPICE data included If you create your own devices to use with the analog simulation you will need to fill in this field yourself You can enter SPICE data into this field directly or you can reference it to the other fields in the dialog box The percent sign 9 is used as a flag to tell CircuitMaker to reference the already defined fields Their meanings are Name N Inserts the Device Name into the SPICE data string This is the name found in the library menus Label L Inserts the Label Value into the SPICE data string This requires the first character in the Label Value string to be an alpha character The label may not exceed 8 characters Value V Inserts the Label Value into the SPICE data string This requires the first character in the Label Value string to be numeric The value may be an integer 12 44 a floating point number 3 14159 either an integer or floating point number followed by an integer exponent 1e 14 2 65e3 or an integer or floating point number followed by one of the following multipliers T 10 u 10 G 10 n 10 Meg 10 p 10 K 10 f 10 m 10 If multipliers are used they must immediately follow the number with no spaces Letters that are not multipliers immediately following a number are ignored and letters immediately
122. The node numbers which are determined by CircuitMaker are used for simulation pur poses They correspond to the variable names used in the analog analysis windows and can be used as a reference when viewing waveforms Chapter 12 Options Menu 12 233 12 234 Show Prop Delays Use Show Prop Delays to display the propagation delay of all devices in the circuit If Show Prop Delays is checked the delay values for each device will be shown within a rounded rectangle located at the center of each device Some devices pulsers LED s macro devices etc do not have a delay so no value will be shown on them In the case of macro devices the delay is determined by the individual delay setting of each device contained within the macro If Show Prop Delays is not checked all devices will be drawn in normal form without the delay value being visible To change the propagation delay of one or more devices select Edit gt Set Prop Delays Device Display Data This feature pictured in Figure 12 2 allows you to quickly change the display settings of all selected devices If the display item is currently visible on some of the selected devices but not on others the check box will be gray Refer to Editing Devices in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for more information Sa Daia D thebe Piera I Shor epim D heb Laa F Shoes Pr Hera E helpar D Sho Pr Harter Figure 12 2 Use the Device Display Data dialog box to quickly chan
123. When used with a subcircuit which begins SUBCKT XMR9933A 21 23 6 15 node 21 in the subcircuit connects to the first pin on the device symbol etc 2 With the new macro expanded double click on the device then click on the Netlist button to view the Edit Device Data dialog box Enter the following data Enter an appropriate Auto Designation Prefix for the device For example U or IC for integrated circuits etc e Set the Spice Prefix Character s to X for subcircuit devices 16 304 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices e Place an appropriate SPICE instruction for this device into the Spice Data field Refer to Editing Devices in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for more information or refer to the examples provided with other devices Click OK Choose Macros gt Save Macro to save the macro After you have entered the appropriate data SPICE subcircuits can be linked to the new symbol by follow ing the instructions in Adding New Subcircuits to an Existing Symbol earlier in this chapter Example To create a new device symbol for optoisolators 1 Create a new macro symbol for an optoisolator using the symbol editor described earlier in this chapter Name the new macro device symbol Opto Isol A When placing pins on the new device place the first pin on the anode N the second pin on the cathode N the third pin on the collector and the fourth pin on the emitter They should be placed in t
124. Where to Go from Here Once you have mastered a few Windows basics you ll be ready to learn CircuitMaker Use the following table to help you get around this User Manual Topic Where to Go CircuitMaker Basics Chapters 2 3 Drawing and Editing Schematics Chapter 4 Simulation Chapters 5 6 Exporting Files Chapter 7 Fault Simulation Chapter 8 CircuitMaker Menus Chapters 9 14 Advance SPICE Tips Chapter 15 Creating New Devices Chapter 16 SimCode Chapter 17 Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 31 Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 32 CHAPTER 2 Getting Started CircuitMaker Basics This chapter gives you an overview of the CircuitMaker workspace conventions preferences shortcuts and HotKeys It s a great place to start if you need some guidance before using CircuitMaker to draw edit test and simulate electronic circuits Starting CircuitMaker If you have installed CircuitMaker on your hard disk you re ready to run the program 1 Open the Start menu 2 Choose Programs gt CircuitMaker 6 or CircuitMaker PRO 3 Choose the CircuitMaker program You can also create a shortcut for CircuitMaker and have the icon display on your desktop all the time CircuitMaker Workspace When you start CircuitMaker the blank workspace appears This is where you place devices that represent real life components such as resistors transistors power supplies etc The CircuitMaker workspace also includes the Toolbar Menu Bar
125. YYYY N N VALUE lt IC INCOND gt Netlist Example L3 12 9 1UH L4 5 0 100UH IC 12 3MA Spice Data Example SD 1 2 V IC 5MA N is the positive node and N is the negative node VALUE 1s the inductance in Henries Initial condition which applies only if UIC is enabled for Transient Analysis is the initial time zero value of the inductor current If N is at a higher voltage than N the current flow through the inductor is positive If N is at a higher voltage than N the current flow is negative Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 259 6 5 ke L2 LI Z 8 Q L3 9 Note A transformer that is simulated in this manner will not reflect the impedance of the second ary winding back into the primary Inductors induce voltage across their coils based on the amount of magnetic flux consider them as voltage sources and therefore inductors in SPICE Don t connect them directly in parallel Solution connect a small value resistor such as 0 001 ohms in series with each inductor to account for the winding resistance of that inductor See Also Inductor Var Inductor Coil 3T Coil 5T see RESONANT CKT Coupled Mutual Inductors General Form KXXXXXXX LYYYYYYY LZZZZZZZ VALUE Netlist Examples K12 L4 L3 0 999 KXFRMR Ll L2 0 87 Spice Data Example center tap inductor DA 1 2 50UH inductor A DB 2 3 50UH inductor B K D DA DB 85 inductive coupling LYYYYYYY and LZZZZZZZ are the names of
126. ZERO vol_param rol_param gt voh_param ONE voh_param roh_param other UNKNOWN v3s_param r3s_param Notes Output pins can be specified by using the output pin name or by an integer variable that contains the index of an output pin Pin and variable names cannot be mixed in the same STATE command References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names Examples STATE Q ONE STATE 01 02 03 Q4 ZERO STATE OUT 1 2 3 In the last example OUT will be ZERO if vil_param gt UNKNOWN if vil_param lt 1 and vih_param gt 1 ONE if vih_param lt 1 See Also REALS STATE_BIT LEVEL STRENGTH TABLE EXT_TABLE 17 370 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only STATE_BIT Sets outputs to binary weighted logic states General Form STATE_BIT lt output gt lt output gt lt expression gt Parameters lt output gt name of or variable index to the output pin lt expression gt any expression which can be bitwise matched with the listed outputs Use The state of an output pin is determined by its level and its strength The STATE_BIT command is used to set the level and strength for one or more output pins based on the value of the lt expression gt The state of the first pin listed is set according to the first least significant bit of the expression s value the state of the second pin listed is set according to second bit of the expression s value and so on The l
127. a list of all standard SPICE3 Option parameter settings Default NO no list Enables the device bypass scheme for nonlinear model evaluation Default 1 on Sets the minimum time between breakpoints Default 0 seconds sets the time automatically Sets the maximum number of analog event alternations for DC operating point convergence Default 0 Sets the maximum number of event iterations for DC operating point convergence Default 0 Enables DC operating point alterna tions Default NO Controls turn on time of independent sources and capacitor and inductor initial conditions from zero to their final value during the time period specified Default 0 0 seconds 15 253 15 254 CONVLIMIT CONVSTEP CONVABSSTEP AUTOPARTIAL PROPMNS PROPMXS TRANMNS TRANMXS LOADMNS Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Disables convergence algorithm used in some built in component models Default NO Sets the limit of the relative step size in solving for the DC operating point convergence for code model inputs Default 0 25 Sets the limit of the absolute step size in solving for the DC operating point convergence for code model inputs Default 0 1 Enables the automatic computation of partial derivatives for XSpice code modules Default NO Sets scale factor used to determine minimum propagation delay when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 0 5 50 of typical propagat
128. actor gt Notes If lt index gt is not one of the predefined variables listed below then lt min scale factor gt 0 5 and lt max scale factor gt 1 5 The lt min scale factor gt and lt max scale factor gt for each of these predefined variables can be changed in CircuitMaker s Analog Options dialog box The lt min scale factor gt and lt max scale factors gt are reversed for ld_param drv_param and i_param because these parameters control a resistance value rather than a current value i e maximum load equates to minimum resistance Variable Spice Option Parameter Default tp_param PROPMNS lt min scale factor gt 0 5 tp_param PROPMXS lt max scale factor gt 1 5 tt_paran TRANMNS lt min scale factor gt 0 5 tt_paran TRANMXS lt max scale factor gt 1 5 ld_param LOADMNS lt min scale factor gt 1 5 ld_param LOADMXS lt max scale factor gt 0 5 drv_param DRIVEMNS lt min scale factor gt 1 5 drv_param DRIVEMXS lt max scale factor gt 0 5 i_param CURRENTMNS lt min scale factor gt 1 5 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 353 CircuitMaker PRO only i_param CURRENTMXS lt max scale factor gt 0 5 vth_param WTHMNS lt min scale factor gt 0 5 vth_param WTHMXS lt max scale factor gt 1 5 user_param USERMNS lt min scale factor gt 0 5 user_param USERMXS lt max scale factor gt 1 5 Examples tplh_val MIN_TYP_MAX tp_param NULL 5n NULL In this example if we assume that PROPMNS and PROPMXS are set to their def
129. adding existing subcircuits to 16 29 Macro Utilities 11 4 Class Selected Device 11 5 Delete Macro 11 5 Expand Macro 11 5 Model Data 11 6 Macros changing color of 13 1 creating new 11 1 editing 11 1 expanding 11 2 Index 392 saving 11 2 11 4 Macros menu Convert ASCII Library 11 7 Expand Macro 11 2 Macro Copier 11 6 Macro Lock 11 3 Macro Utilities 11 4 Save ASCII Library 11 7 Save macro 11 4 Update Search List 11 8 Magnifying the circuit 4 3 Major Device Class 3 2 4 8 11 4 Managing circuit faults 8 6 Manual routing 4 15 Manual wire routing 4 15 MATH FUNCTIONS 17 34 MAX 17 23 MAXEVTITER 15 9 MAXOPALTER 15 9 Measurement cursors using 6 15 Merge Command 9 1 MESFETs 15 27 MESSAGE 17 6 17 7 17 13 17 35 Metafile devices importing into Symbol Editor 16 7 Metafile for Windows 7 7 MIN 17 23 MIN_TYP_MAX 17 6 17 12 17 36 MINBREAK 15 9 Minor Device Class 3 2 4 8 Mirror Button activating 4 4 disabling for instruction 8 7 using 4 4 using m key instead 4 4 Mirroring devices 4 8 Mixed Signal simulation example tutorial 3 20 in Analog mode 6 1 Model M 4 29 Model Data 11 6 Model linking files 11 6 17 2 Model parameters editing digital 16 40 MODEL_PATH 17 2 Models adding to existing symbols 16 24 adding to new macro symbols 16 25 and subcircuits linking files 16 32 updating from previous version 1 5 working with SPICE 16 21 Models SPICE creating new with parameter passing 16 38 editing i
130. ages or currents do not converge within a specified number of iterations SPICE produces error messages such as singular matrix Gmin stepping failed source stepping failed or iteration limit reached and aborts the simulation SPICE uses the results of each simulation step as the initial guesses for the next step If you are performing a Transient Analysis that is time is being stepped and SPICE cannot converge on a solution using the specified timestep the timestep is automatically reduced and the cycle is repeated If the timestep is reduced too far SPICE displays a Timestep too small message and aborts the simulation Use the Analog Options dialog box to specify the tolerances and iteration limits for the various analyses Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 245 The Operating Point may fail to converge for various reasons For example the initial guesses for the node voltages may be too far off the circuit may be unstable or bistable there may be more than one solution to the equations there may be discontinuities in the models or the circuit may contain unrealistic impedances Use the following techniques to solve most convergence problems When you have a convergence problem first identify which analysis is causing the problem Keep in mind that the Operating Point analysis is generally performed automatically before each of the other analyses even if you have disabled Operating Point Anal
131. akpoint 5 8 conditions 5 8 setting up breakpoints 5 9 simulation speed 5 8 step size 5 8 x magnification 5 8 Digital Oscilloscope 6 23 Index 387 Digital SimCode devices 15 28 using in analog simulation mode 3 20 Digital Analog Button 6 4 activating 5 3 toggling 5 3 using 5 3 using tutorial 3 8 Diodes 15 24 DIP packages adding in Symbol Editor 16 7 Directories and Files 9 8 Disclaimer iv Display data of circuit showing 12 4 Display hints 8 5 8 7 8 9 Display Variable Names 6 14 14 2 Displaying waveforms 6 12 Dividing a wire 4 3 Dots changing color of 13 1 showing pin 12 3 Drawing a schematic 3 1 DRIVE 17 5 17 11 Drive capacity 15 11 15 12 17 28 DRIVEMNS 15 11 17 37 DRIVEMXS 15 11 17 37 drv_param 17 6 17 28 17 37 DRVMNTYMX 15 12 Duplicate 10 2 DVCC 6 6 6 48 DVDD 6 6 6 48 E Edit Buffer in Symbol Editor 16 9 using 16 10 Edit Bus Connection 10 6 Edit Bus Wire Number 10 7 Edit Data Sequencer 10 9 Edit device data 4 22 17 8 Edit Input Output 10 9 Edit menu Copy 10 1 Index 388 Copy Circuit 10 2 Copy Waveforms 10 2 Cut 10 1 Delete Items 10 2 Duplicate 10 2 Edit Bus Connection 10 6 Edit Bus Wire Number 10 7 Edit Data Sequencer 10 9 Edit Device Data 10 7 Edit Digital Params 10 7 Edit Input Output 10 9 Edit Multimeter 10 9 Edit PROM RAM 10 8 Edit Pulser 10 8 Edit Run Time Test Point 10 7 Edit Scope Probe Name 10 10 Edit Signal Generator 10 10 Edit Select Spice Model 10 7 Font 10 11 Grou
132. all analysis windows and returning to schematic editing mode Probe Tool The context sensitive Probe Tool which you can also select by pressing Alt P allows you to quickly probe any point s in the circuit during simulation and see the resulting waveform or data in the selected analysis window Note that the Probe Tool is used differently in Analog mode than it is in Digital mode Before running a simulation you can left click the Probe tool in the circuit to add or remove Run Time Test Points Or by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl key you can add or remove Exclusive Test Points in the circuit Note however that you do not have to pre define test points before running a simulation in CircuitMaker See Working with Test Points later in this chapter for more information on using test points During simulation touch the tip of the Probe Tool to a wire device pin or device body to observe or plot data at that point The tool displays one of six letters V I P Z N or R The meanings of these letters are illustrated at left Click the left mouse button while the Probe Tool is at the point in the circuit you wish to probe and a value or waveform appears instantly in the current active analysis window To see multiple waveforms simply Shift click with the Probe Tool on as many points as you wish and the corresponding waveforms stack in the current analysis window Note If CircuitMaker indicates that current or
133. ameter can be set independently for each digital device in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box If a Spice Option parameter is set in the Analog Options dialog box that setting will globally override the Digital Model Parameter settings for all digital devices If the variable is set explicitly in the SimCode that setting will override all other settings warn_param can be set to any positive value to condtionally display warning messages for the device Different levels of warning could be created by the device programmer accessed by entering different positive values The value of init_sim is set 1 during SimCode initialization otherwise it is set to 0 The value of tran_pin is set to the index of the pin being set during a DELAY CASE statement This index is used to determine which pin the TRAN_xx instruction is applied to Example INTEGERS tblIindex count data 64 See Also DELAY MIN_TYP_MAX Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 345 CircuitMaker PRO only IO_PAIRS Declares input output pin associations for input loading General Form IO_PAIRS lt ipin opin gt lt ipin opin gt Parameters lt ipin opin gt Pin names of associated input and output pins Use The JO_PAIRS statement defines which of the INPUTS pins are associated with which of the OUTPUTS pins This association is used by the LOAD statement Notes Each physical input pin on a device consists of both an ipin and an opin in SimCode
134. and special windows for circuit simulation and testing purposes After placing devices exactly where you want you simply wire them together The wiring lines you draw form intelli gent links between devices which then allow the circuit to be simulated tested and analyzed using CircuitMaker s powerful simulator Figure 2 1 shows the CircuitMaker workspace filled in with the Drawing Window and several analysis windows Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 33 Menu Bar Drawing Window Analysis Windows Title Bar Toolbar Figure 2 1 The CircuitMaker workspace Connectivity An important feature of CircuitMaker is the way electrical connections between the elements in your design are recognized The concept of connectivity is the key to using CircuitMaker to draw and simulate electronic circuits The program stores connection information for simulation and it is also used for creating and exporting netlists into TraxMaker or other pcb layout programs to create a working printed circuit board PCB About CircuitMaker Windows In addition to the Drawing window CircuitMaker offers several other windows most of which display information and waveforms for analog and digital simulations During simulation the windows for the selected analyses appear showing waveforms and simulation data Multiple analysis windows can be open simultaneously however only one window of each of analysis type can be open at a time 2 34 Chapter 2 G
135. apacitor will charge quicker For this example you will change the component values Stop the simulation by clicking the Stop button Double click the Resistor to display the Edit Device Data dialog box Change the Label Value from 1k to 100 and then click OK Double click the Capacitor change the Label Value from luF to 001uF and then click OK Compare your schematic with Figure 3 7 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 53 3 54 Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 3 7 Notice that the resistor and capacitor now have different label values 10 Run the simulation again This time you will see the charge curve of the capacitor Simulating a Simple AC Circuit Now let s create a simple AC circuit using a Signal Generator and two Resistors 1 2 Click the New button on the Toolbar Draw the circuit as shown in Figure 3 8 using the following devices e I Signal Gen Analog Instruments g Ground Analog Power 0 zero e 2 Resistors Passive Components Resistors r lk lk GP LOOO 1kHz Figure 3 8 A simple AC circuit with a Signal Genera tor and two Resistors Use the Wire Tool to wire the circuit together or the Arrow Tool when the Arrow Wire option is enabled 4 Make sure you are in Analog simulation mode the transistor icon is showing on the simulation mode button then run the simulation 5 Click the Transient Analysis window to select it then click the wire connected to the output of the Signa
136. aram Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 337 CircuitMaker PRO only It also allows INPUT and or OUTPUT pin names with optional prefixes to specify the output states Prefixes are State is the previous state State is the inverse of the state State is the inverse of the previous state Output state letters can be followed by a colon and a letter to indicate strength s STRONG set output to rol_param for L and roh_param for H Z HI_IMPEDANCE set output to r3s_param If a strength character is not specified after an output state then STRONG will be used for L and H states and HI_IMPEDANCE will be used for Z states Notes Each row is tested sequencially from top to bottom until the input conditions are met The outputs are set for the first row to meet the input conditions lt line gt is set to the line number in the table that was used If no match was made then lt line gt is set to 0 Pin names used to specify output states do not need to be in the table heading Unlike the TABLE statement input variables are not allowed Example EXT_TABLE tblIndex PRE CLR CLK DATA Q ON 0 1 X X H L 1 0 X X L H 0 0 X X H H 1 1 A X DATA DATA 1 1 X X Q Q This example is representative of 1 2 of a 7474 D type flip flop If input pins PRE CLR and DATA are all high gt vih_param and CLK has a low to high transition Q is set to high voh_param and STRONG roh_param QN is set to low vol_param and STRON
137. as a value of 27 ohms and is connected between node 5 and ground the SPICE data for R3 could be written as R3 5 0 27ohms However by using a generalized form of the SPICE data it can be updated automatically if items such as designations or node numbers change For example the items in the above example can be substituted accordingly Value Description Substitution R3 Designation D 5 First pin node number 1 0 Second pin node number 2 27ohms Label Value IN Using these substitutions the generalized form of the SPICE Data becomes SD 1 2 SV 4 96 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Example 2 Tf transistor Q2 is a 2N3904 with its collector connected to node 7 its base to node 4 and its emitter to node 12 the SPICE data may be written as Q2 7 4 12 Q2N3904 However you may need to enter SPICE model data into the netlist manually A more universal method would be to enter the following string 6D 1 2 3 SM Example 3 If op amp U4 is an LM741 where the input is connected to node 3 the input is connected to node 1 the V pin to node 5 the V pin to node 12 and the output to node 9 the SPICE data may be written as XU4 3 15 12 9 XLM741 But again a more universal method would be to enter the following string SD 1 2 3 4 5 S Exclude From PCB Use this check box to exclude a device from the PCB netlist Typically devices used for simulation purposes only external inputs like a signa
138. ascsasebeuersueenteaseaevisontonne 8 6 Disable Circuit COU OME via di tit 8 6 PGS nd Replacements vrai traia blas tdi lts 8 9 AAA A 8 9 Fault E A seslyedansbteltassanenlerataiou tcesibuaateell 8 10 Creating Black Box Macros uscar anane 8 10 Fadlt Example sae e E E E EE 8 11 Contents xiii Chapter 9 File Menu NEW ios 9 1 8al y A Pon oo oc een E rere rere 9 1 O A 9 1 PR ena etectemeenrtast E 9 1 A NR E 9 2 SIVE e a E a E cages giveguat sls tic E E EEEE aes ines 9 2 SWE AS A a a a e A a r Eaa 9 2 BEA te dese te deah a escheat eed naka dad eeaetieatnchedulbiehorabbimeauseetesietanteond 9 2 Import gt Simulate SPICE NetliSt o ooocccnnonocccccononoccccccononancccncnonanananns 9 2 dola a SE EEE aren rrerr errr tre 9 3 Bill of Materials rara AAA ii 9 3 PP aaa O E G E 9 3 Fitto O eanan PE po AE aE A TA doedeh 9 4 A A ER O 9 4 PRL AV CONS eii NAO 9 4 Preferences nsusoicrtaii iii 9 4 O A A 9 10 Chapter 10 Edit Menu O A A A neeten dae 10 1 HN eccentrics E EE E E 10 1 CODY man ar an tee o oo o eE 10 1 Pasie es 10 1 MOVE anae a a A 10 1 D lete PAINS cie 10 2 Pm ee ings see aterm dee eee 10 2 Copy Circuit to Clipboard esccninicnoi iii 10 2 Copy Waveforms to Clipboard oooooocciicccccoooooooncncncnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnaninnn 10 2 Selec Alisa 10 3 Find and Select iria 10 3 A A AN 10 3 A AP PP A ETET 10 4 Straighten Wires moran naa is 10 4 A eT a i aien 10 4 Contents xiv SEL Prop Delays iaa iyaetuodaasatamanin 10 4 Se
139. ata input gt Name of or index to the input data pin under test TS Setup time for both low and high going lt data input gt TSL Setup time for low going lt data input gt TSH Setup time for high going lt data input gt TH Hold time for both low and high going lt data input gt THL Hold time for high going lt data input gt THH Hold time for low going lt data input gt lt message gt Text string that will be displayed if a warning occurs Use The SETUP_HOLD function compares the time difference between a level change LH or HL on the lt clk input gt and a level change on the lt data input gt to a specified test time SETUP test times are specified jointly using TS lt time gt which sets TSL and TSH to the same value or individually using TSL lt time gt and TSH lt time gt HOLD test times are specified jointly using TH lt time gt which sets THL and THH to the same value or individually using THL lt time gt and THH lt time gt If the compare time is less than the specified lt time gt a WARNING will be displayed An optional lt message gt string can be included ina SETUP_HOLD statement which will be output if a WARNING is displayed 17 368 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Notes Databook specifications should be used with this function TSL lt time gt TSH lt time gt THL lt time gt and THH lt time gt can be entered in the same SETUP_HOLD statement The SETUP and or H
140. ately model the actual characteristics of a digital output VOH is not generally set to its specified databook value The reason for this deviation is that databook values for VOH are specified for maximum IOH load In digital SimCode VOL and VOH represent an unloaded output voltage PWR_GND_PINS must be defined to use this function The vol_param and voh_param values set by VOL_VOH_MIN are overridden by any values set for VOL value and VOH value in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box These are offset values rather than absolute voltages The lt voh offset gt is negative so that when added to pwr_param the resulting VOH will not be greater than pwr_param If the difference between the resulting vol_param and voh_param is less than lt min voh vol gt then vol_param will be set to the value of gnd_param and voh_param will be set to gnd_param lt min voh vol gt Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 379 CircuitMaker PRO only Example VOL_VOH_MIN 0 2 0 4 0 1 In this example 1 If gnd_param 0V and pwr_param 5 0V then vol_param 0 2V and voh_param 4 6V 2 If gnd_param OV and pwr_param 0 5V then vol_param 0 0V and voh_param 0 1V See Also REALS PWR_GND_PINS WHILE DO Conditionally controls looping in the SimCode General Form WHILE lt expression gt DO BEGIN END Parameters lt expression gt Any expression that can be evaluated as true or false Use The WHILE DO statemen
141. ative of the type of device models you are using For example an NPN Bipolar Junction Transistor must have the prefix QN Refer to Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for a listing of valid prefix characters Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 299 Enter an appropriate SPICE instruction for this device into the Spice Data field Refer to Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for more information Click OK Click Macros gt Save Macro to save the macro After you have entered the appropriate data SPICE models can be linked to the new symbol by following the instructions under Adding New Subcircuits to an Existing Model later in this chapter Example To create a new device symbol for standard junction diodes 1 Create a new macro symbol for a diode using the Symbol Editor described in Creating a New Macro Device earlier this chapter Name the new macro symbol DIODE A When placing pins on the new device place the first pin on the anode N and the second pin on the cathode N They should be placed in this order to match the syntax for the diode model Expand the new macro symbol if it is not already expanded by clicking it once with the left mouse button and then click the Macro button in the Toolbar Double click on the device symbol and click on the Netlist button Enter the following information in the Edit Device Data dialog box of the expanded macro to set the defaults for this macro dev
142. ault values then if tp_param 1 then tplh_val 2 5n if tp_param 2 then tplh_val 5n if tp_param 3 then tplh_val 10n ricch_val MIN_TYP_MAX i_param NULL 2500 1250 In this example if we assume that CURRENTMNS and CURRENTMXS are set to their default values then if i_param 1 then ricch_val 5000 if i_param 2 then ricch_val 2500 if i_param 3 then ricch_val 1250 See Also INTEGERS SELECT_VALUE 17 354 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only NO_CHANGE Leaves output state of I O pins unchanged General Form NO_CHANGE lt output gt lt output gt Parameters lt output gt Name of or variable index to the output pin Use Use the NO_CHANGE function to indicate no change for specified output pins Use this statement on bi directional pins when the bi directional pin is being treated as an input Notes Pin names and variables cannot be mixed in the same NO_CHANGE statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names Example NO_CHANGE Q1 Q2 Q3 04 NUMBER Returns number based on binary weighted pin states General Form NUMBER lt MSB pin gt lt pin gt lt LSB pin gt Parameters lt pin gt Name of or index to a pin Use The NUMBER function returns a short integer that repre sents the decimal value of the binary number represented by the list of lt pin gt Each bit represented by a lt pin gt is set t
143. ause before returning to the CircuitMaker workspace If you have chosen the Stop When Simulation Is Complete option then a dialog box will appear when the simulation is complete asking if you wish to exit XSPICE Click Yes to exit and return to the CircuitMaker analysis windows which let you analyze the simulation data or click No to remain in XSpice for Windows exit later by clicking Quit If you clicked No in Step 3 and are remaining in the XSPICE area click Rescale All in the XSpice menu to rescale all of the plots to fit the Min and Max data that has been collected You can do this even if the simulation is still running While the XSpice window is displayed you can change the scale for a single plot window by clicking the window to pause the simulation and display the dialog box shown in Figure 6 34 Enter the desired scale limits or click the Auto button to scale to the data that is already in the window then choose OK Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Select Scale Figure 6 34 Use this dialog box to enter new scale limits for the XSPICE plots 7 Use the Up and Down options in the XSpice menu to move the graphs into view if there are more graphs to be displayed than can be shown on your monitor 8 Click Quit in the XSpice menu to stop at any time When you click Quit the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 35 appears asking if you want to save the simulation data collected This option is very u
144. ayed Set Defaults Use the Set Defaults button to set up the default parameters of the Transient Analysis Start Time is set to zero and Stop Time Step Time and Max Step are set to display 5 cycles of the lowest frequency Signal Generator in the circuit with a resolution of 200 data points You can define these default values in the Preferences dialog box If the Always Set Defaults check box is checked CircuitMaker acts as if this button is pressed before each simulation 6 138 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CEA IE Tis Ea es i Mb 0 00 meic Ade frey 2 0Z1k wer es Ft Ter ee 2 400 Raise Heap eis Trote Figure 6 15 The circuit ANALOG CKT and the Transient Analysis window The waveform in Figure 6 15 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 14 This analysis shows the voltage at the test points during the time frame specified in the Start and Stop fields Notice that the x axis shows the time in seconds and the y axis is voltage The larger waveform represents the voltage at the circuit output while the smaller waveform is voltage at the source signal generator or input See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 139 Parameter Sweep Use a Parameter Sweep for two variables including transistor parameters You can vary only basic components and
145. be more accurate than the lossless transmission line due to implementation details See Also LossLessLine example circuit LLTRAN CKT Lossy Transmission Lines General Form OXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 MNAME Netlist Example 02 3 0 2 0 OXLINE Spice Data Example SD 1 52 3 4 SM This is a two port convolution model for single conductor lossy transmission lines N1 and N2 are the nodes at portl N3 and N4 are the nodes at port 2 Note that a lossy transmission line with zero loss may be more accurate than the lossless transmission line due to implementation details See Also LossyLine Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 267 15 268 Uniform Distributed RC Lines Lossy General Form UXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 MNAME L LEN lt N LUMPS gt Netlist Example U1 1 2 0 UXLINE L 50UM N 6 Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 SM L 25u N1 and N2 are the two element nodes the RC line connects while N3 is the node to which the capacitances are con nected MNAME is the model name LEN is the length of the RC line in meters LUMPS if specified is the number of lumped segments to use in modeling the RC line if omitted a default value based on the model parameters will be used See Also URC Line Junction Diodes General Form DXXXXXXX N N MNAME lt AREA gt lt OFF gt lt IC VD gt lt TEMP T gt Netlist Example D3 2 10 D1N914 OFF D5 7 12 D1IN4001 3 0 IC 0 2 Spice Data Example SD 1 2 SM OFF IC 6 TEMP 70 N is the positi
146. be omitted If the source is time invariant e g a power supply then the value can be preceded by the letters DC The letters AC indicate a small signal AC source MAG AC magnitude and PHASE AC phase are used for AC analysis only If MAG is omitted following the keyword AC a value of 1 is assumed If PHASE is omitted a value of 0 is assumed Any independent source can be assigned a time dependent value for Transient Analysis If a source is assigned a time dependent value the time zero value is used for DC operat ing point analysis There are five independent source functions pulse exponential sinusoidal piece wise linear and single frequency FM These are discussed in the Multifunction Signal Generator section of this chapter Note For SPICE simulation voltage sources cannot be placed directly in parallel and current sources cannot be placed directly in series See Also V V Source I Source Battery Signal Gen example circuit CEAMP CKT Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Linear Voltage Controlled Current Sources General Form GXXXXXXX N N NC NC VALUE Netlist Example Gl 2 0 5 0 0 1MMHO Spice Data Example SD 51 52 3 4 SV N is the positive node and N is the negative node Current flow is from the positive node through the source to the negative node NC is the positive controlling node and NC is the negative controlling node VALUE is the transconductance in mhos Note For SPICE
147. box Depending on the macro device you are editing you might need to specify mandatory parameters for the device including Label Value Package Auto Designa 16 292 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices tion Prefix Spice Prefix and Spice Data 7 Click the Symbol button to display the Symbol Editor where you can edit the expanded macro s schematic symbol 8 Click OK when you have finished drawing and specify ing parameters for the symbol Clicking OK returns you to the expanded macro where you can add or edit circuitry before the new device is saved See Creating Macro Circuits later in this chapter for the step by step procedure Creating Macro Devices with Internal Circuitry If you cannot find a device in CircuitMaker s library of devices or elsewhere that performs a particular function you can create a functional macro device by attaching hidden circuitry to a custom symbol A macro device can contain internal circuitry that you can base on CircuitMaker s library of existing devices You can also nest macro devices meaning that a macro can be used within another macro device letting you create building blocks and piece them together in order to create the final device When you save a macro all of the circuitry you have added to itis hidden within its symbol The new macro device functions according to the circuitry hidden within You can then use the new macro in any circuit To create a macro device with i
148. bus must have a different bus number Enter a unique bus number Note If two separate buses are given the same number they are considered to be the same bus even though they are not physically connected on the screen You can extend join or cut bus wires just like regular wires However you don t need to hold down the Shift key when extending bus wires Working with Bus Connection Wires Regular wires that are connected to a bus wire are called bus connection wires These wires connect to the individual wires within the bus To create bus connection wires 1 2 Select the Wire Tool from the Toolbar Move the tool over a valid connection point Note A valid connection point is any device pin or wire including a bus wire At least one end of the bus connection wire must be connected to a bus Click and hold the left mouse button Drag the mouse to another valid connection point and release the mouse button When you make the connection a dialog box appears asking you to assign a bus connection wire number Specify a bus connection wire number Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 6 Choose Angle Connection to Top Left if you want to change the angle of the connection To edit a bus wire or bus connection wire number double click it with the Arrow Tool and change the number CircuitMaker displays bus and bus connection labels by default but you can disable them by unchecking Options gt
149. butes for the same device type can be listed by using the plus character The plus character means that the Label Value package and description for the new line are the same as the line above This means that only the new attribute name and attribute data are listed Here is the above ua741 example restated with additional attributes ua741 DIP8 MFG FairChild COST 0 25 MFGID UA741N Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 179 7 180 The information in the Include Attributes field of the Bill of Materials dialog box could be as follows Package Description MFG MFGID cost A corresponding entry in a Bill of Materials would then be 24 3 UA741 DIP8 Ul U2 U3 Fairchild UA741N 0 25 Even though Description is listed in the Include Attributes field a description does not appear in the Bill of Materials because the Description field in the Edit Device Data dialog is blank for this device Note that the order of the attributes in the Bill of Materials depends on the order in the Include Attributes field not the order in the attribute file The following are examples of additional entries from an attribute file LM741 DIP8 MFG National COST 0 26 MFGID LM741 r AXIALO 4 MFG TRW COST 5005 LF411 CAN8 MFG National COST 0 26 MFGID LM741N c CAP0 2 MFG Mallory Chapter 7 Exporting Files Setting Up Export Options Use the Export Options dialog box to specify the format used when transf
150. c Simulation 10 218 Chapter 10 Edit Menu Edit Multimeter This feature allows you to change the function of the selected digital multimeter device not the Multimeter analysis window 1 Select the Multimeter by clicking it once then choosing Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Multimeter OR Double click the device with the Arrow Tool Refer to Multimeter in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation for additional information Edit Input Output This feature Figure 10 6 lets you change the name associ ated with an INPUT or OUTPUT device 1 Select the Input or Output device by clicking it once then select Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Input Output OR Double click the device with the Arrow Tool Edit Input Output Name xj In Out Name Cancel Figure 10 6 Change an Input Output name Netlist i Edit Data Sequencer Use the Edit Data Sequencer option to change the pro grammed settings of a Data Sequencer This device lets you specify up to 32K bytes which can be outputted in a defined sequence 1 Select a Data Sequencer by clicking it once then choosing Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Data Sequencer OR Double click the Data Sequencer with the Arrow Tool Chapter 10 Edit Menu 10 219 10 220 For a complete description of the Data Sequencer refer to Data Sequencer in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Edit Signal Generator Use Edit Signal Generator to change the programmed settin
151. cccccccncnanoccccnancnnnnnccnnnannns 6 11 Displaying Waveforms oir aneneen 6 12 Scaling Wave 6 13 Offsetting Waveforms cccccccccscsessecsessessessesecstceececseseesaecaesaeseeseeausausassecausaeeatens 6 15 Using Measurement Cursors cists sanisescatianssxenvecasdarsviacaseascaaicarenbevssantdiceusiaabietivds 6 15 a 6 15 O A 6 17 Setting Up Analog Analyses oooooccccccnonoccccccnoccnancccncnnnanannnncnnnnnnnnnccnnnnn 6 18 Always Set Defaults rad do 6 18 DC Analysis DC Sweep ciones 6 19 AC Analysis AC Sweep seisisssidvoasveaaiasensnesanitswesbephainsrestiuhedundaedabaniuledsediedwnniected 6 20 DC Operating Point Analysis accionante sai 6 22 ransient Analysis oi trdtili 6 21 Contents xi Parameter Sweep Analysis in ee eeeeetiietatantntnisnntananenrararnnean enen 6 26 A AN 6 29 Transfer Function Analysis a iia 6 30 Noise Analysis satis 6 32 Temperature Sweep Analysis inicia dl 6 35 Monte Carlo Analysis aia in A a a 6 36 Impedance Plot Analysis inronpissvit ld ii 6 41 Using XSpice for WINdOWS 0oooccconoccccconooonccnonancncnnnnnnncn naar cnn canon nncnnnnnos 6 43 NET and RAW File QUID screens 6 45 Warning Messages vs Error Messages oococcoicocociccconconcoconononcnnnoonco noo nonncancnnnos 6 46 Setting Up Analog SPICE VarlablesS ooooooccccccccccccccnoccncnnncnnnnninano 6 47 ASGIIOQUTPUT Check BOX escitas 6 47 DVCC DVDD and DGND cccccccnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnononononnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnanannnnnnnos 6
152. ce symbol names with the following exceptions Linking file names are limited to 8 characters so the device symbol name is truncated to 8 characters when searching for a match Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 307 All spaces and punctuation characters are removed Tf the last 1 or 2 characters of a truncated device symbol name are numbers those numbers replace the last characters in the file name If a device symbol name includes a colon the colon and all characters after the colon are ignored For example the devices NPN Trans NPN Trans A NPN Trans B and NPN Trans C are all associated with the linking file NPNTRANS MOD If CircuitMaker cannot find a linking file using the file name formed from the device symbol name and if that symbol can be simulated using simple SPICE models a default file name is used instead The default file name is based on the SPICE Prefix Character s Following is a list of the SPICE prefix character s and their corresponding default file names SPICE Prefix C D DZ JN JP MN MP O QN QP S U WwW ZN ZP Default File Names CAP MOD DIODE MOD ZENER MOD NJFET MOD PJFET MOD NMOS MOD PMOS MOD LTRA MOD NPN MOD PNP MOD RESISTOR MOD SW MOD URC MOD CSW MOD NMESFET MOD PMESFET MOD All others including subcircuit only device symbols do not have a default file name Subcircuit only device symbols 16 308 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices symbols that cannot be
153. ces with analog characteristics such as analog switches time delayed one shots etc nor can it be used to create new components for Digital Logic Simulation Digital SimCode is a proprietary language created specifi cally for use with CircuitMaker and devices created with it are not compatible with other simulators nor are digital components created for other simulators compatible with CircuitMaker Note Programming in the Digital SimCode language is not intended for the average CircuitMaker user It requires a basic understanding of standard programming techniques as well as a complete understanding of the characteristics of the device that you are trying to create These topics are not covered in this manual Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 317 CircuitMaker PRO only Creating New SimCode Devices Digital SimCode used in conjunction with XSpice is what allows digital components to be simulated in Analog Mixed Signal Simulation mode To create a new digital SimCode device 1 Create a symbol to represent the device in your sche matic See Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for more detailed information about the process Note This step may not be necessary if you are creating a new device that has an equivalent function in another family For example if you are creating a 74F190 we recommend that you use the equivalent symbol for the 74190 for a couple of reasons First the function of the device is identical and the symbo
154. cify the number of parts per package For this example use the default of 1 part per package This refers to the number of devices found in the same chip For example a 7400 package contains 4 NAND gates and a 556 package contains 2 timers Click OK to display the Symbol Editor For this example begin by placing an 8 Pin DIP package in the drawing window Type 8 in the Pins Per Pkg field then click the Add Pkg button Click the left mouse button to place the package in the center of the drawing window Change the View to 200 by clicking the Up Arrow in the View group box The macro name AND NOR displays in the center of the drawing window Click and drag the name into position near the top of the DIP Notice that this device consists of 1 Rect 4 PinLefts and 4 PinRights You will remove 3 of the 4 PinRights Click the top right hand pin in the drawing to select it and then click Delete Repeat for the 2 bottom right hand pins Click the remaining right hand pin to select it and then click Copy to copy the pin from the Element List to the Edit Buffer Change PinRight to PinRight and change P7 to O1 Click Replace to replace the selected pin with the new pin Notice that the pin in the drawing now has a bubble Click the top left hand pin to select it Click Copy to copy the pin from the Element List to the Edit Buffer Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 289 16 290 16 17 18 19 20 21 C
155. connected to pin 1 next to the tab the base is connected to pin 2 and the collector is connected to pin 3 These pin numbers correspond to the pad designations in TraxMaker CircuitMaker identifies pins by the order of placement in a device symbol and TraxMaker identifies pads by their designation This information can be used to create a netlist linking one program to the other If the same device is available in different packages you may specify additional packages using an alias Notice the SPICE prefix character is replaced with the letter A and the file reference is removed 350mW 40V 800mA alias Q2N2222A pkg TO 92B 1 2 3 PARAM APN2222A If there are multiple devices in the same package the pins need to be specified for each device with a letter to indicate the designation extension Dual Op Amp pkg DIP8 A 3 2 8 4 1 B 5 6 8 4 7 PARAM XMC1458 File Mcemods lib These two methods may be combined if you have multiple devices that are available in different packages 16 310 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices Linking Inside Subcircuits Using an Alias Sometimes it is necessary to link two different devices to the same subcircuit This may be required when two devices contain identical internal circuitry but different package or pin information The best way to do this is to add an ALIAS to the subcircuit sub file using any text editing program like NotePad WordPad etc The file must be saved in standard text forma
156. cros The instructor may lock a macro so that it cannot be expanded by the students thus creating a black box macro To create a black box macro 1 Choose Macros gt Expand Macro 2 Choose Macros gt Macro Lock 3 Enter any number up to 4 digits and then save the macro When you attempt to expand the macro again a display prompt asks you to enter the 4 digit code A code of 0 zero leaves the macro unlocked Warning If you forget the code you will not be able to expand the macro Chapter 8 Fault Simulation Fault Example The following step by step example illustrates how to use the Circuit Faults dialog box 1 Open the example circuit PS1 CKT 2 Click the Run button on the Toolbar to run the simula tion 3 Select the Transient Analysis window and then probe around on the circuit to verify that the circuit is working properly If you click on the positive side of the filter capacitor C1 you should see a ripple on waveform at about 15VDC If you click on the emitter side of the transistor Q1 you should see a DC voltage of about 6V 4 Stop the simulation by clicking the Stop button on the Toolbar 5 Double click the filter capacitor C1 to display the Edit Device Data dialog box then click the Faults button gt 6 Click on device pins 1 and 2 shown in the Device Pins list box Click on the short button This will cause a short to be placed across the capacitor 7 Click on th
157. ct the first element in the list click the Clear button to erase the drawing window and then click the Trace button repeatedly This helps you identify elements that are hidden behind other elements etc Drawing a Symbol with the Mouse You can draw symbols or parts of symbols freehand with the mouse To draw a symbol element with the mouse 1 Select the color and fill Any enclosed element will be filled with either the element color or the background color Select an element type by clicking its radio button You can draw the following element types Line 1 4 Arc 1 2 Arc Circle Ellipse Polyline Polygon Rectangle Round Rect and Pins Pins can point up down left or right and can have bubbles to indicate negative logic Pins with bubbles are indicated with a tilde Note Any device symbol you want to wire into a circuit must have pins as connection points for wires Chapter 16 Creating New Devices To place a line arc circle ellipse rectangle or pin hold down the left mouse button drag and release To place a polyline or polygon click and release the mouse to begin then single click to turn double click to end Note After you place a pin a dialog box appears that lets you enter a pin name and designation Pin names and designations are required for circuit simulation and PCB netlist generation When you place an element its description is appended to the Element List The element s descr
158. d Example PWR_GND_PINS VCC GND See Also INPUTS OUTPUTS REALS VIL_VIH_ PERCENT SUPPLY _MIN_MAX 17 362 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only READ_DATA Reads data from an ASCII file into arrays General Form READ_DATA lt array gt lt array gt Parameters lt array gt Name of the array into which the value is placed Use The READ_DATA function opens the file specified by the data parameter in the device s MODEL statement and reads ASCII text data The number and type integer real of the values per line that will be read is based on the number and type of array variables that are specified in the function call The number of data lines read is determined by the number of data lines in the specified file and or the size of the smallest array in the function call The READ_DATA function returns the number of lines read A negative number is returned if an error is encountered 1 Invalid file name 2 Can t find file 3 Invalid array 4 Illegal array access 5 Data type 6 Expected data value Notes Multiple values per line in the data file must be seperated by commas The real values in the data file must be in scientific notation The device s MODEL statement which contains the data parameter must be placed in the device symbol s MOD file Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 363 CircuitMaker PRO only Example MYDEVICE MOD file MODEL AMYDEVICE XSIMCODE
159. d in the OUT PUTS statement which is not listed in the LOAD or NO_CHANGE statements The order in which the delays are set is based on the order in which these pins are listed in the DELAY command i e first pin listed is set first Each lt conditional expression gt is evaluated in the order it is listed until one expression evaluates TRUE When this occurs the lt delay gt value associated with the TRUE expression is posted for the output being set When using the CASE option at least one lt conditional exp gt should evaluate as TRUE for each output pin listed If no lt conditional exp gt evaluates to TRUE the lt delay gt associated with the last CASE statement is posted Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only In addition to the standard expression functions the following terms apply only to the output pin being set and can be used in the lt conditional exp gt TRAN_LH low to high TRAN_LX low to other TRAN_HL high to low TRAN_HX high to other TRAN_HZ high to tristate TRAN_XL other to low TRAN_XH other to high TRAN_LZ low to tristate TRAN_ZL tristate to low TRAN_ZH tristate to high TRAN_ZX tristate to other TRAN_XZ other to tristate TRAN_XX other to different If the lt delay gt value is less than or equal to 0 0 a run time error message will be displayed Output pins can be speci fied by using the output pin name or by an integer variable the contains the index of an output pin Pin names and var
160. del To do so click it with the mouse then click Edit to display the dialog box in Figure 16 17 Figure 16 17 Use the Digital Model Parameters dialog box to alter certain parameters of a model 16 314 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices The radio buttons let you specify whether each of the parameters of the model will be minimum typical or maximum values for the selected device s Refer to Edit Items in Chapter 10 Edit Menu for information about changing the parameters of multiple devices The Default setting allows the parameter to remain unchanged All parameters can vary from pin to pin part to part and family to family Parameter Description Propagation Delays The time it takes for a signal change on an input to affect the data on the output Transition Times The rise and fall times of the outputs Input Loading The amount of load resistance that will be applied to the output of the driving device Output Drive The amount of output current available Device Current The amount of current drawn through the supply pin to ground User Defined This parameter does not affect digital models provided with CircuitMaker The edit fields let you enter specific values for certain parameters The values take precedence over family specific values Under normal conditions they should be left blank Parameter Description GND amp PWR These two parameters must be programmed as a pair if you set one you must also set the ot
161. des respectively For the current controlled switch the controlling current is that through the specified voltage source The direction of positive controlling current flow is from the positive node through the source to the negative node See Also I gt Switch V gt Switch example circuit SWITCHES CKT Independent Sources General Form VXXXXXXX N N lt lt DC gt VALUE gt lt AC lt MAG lt PHASE gt gt gt IYYYYYYY N N lt lt DC gt VALUE gt lt AC lt MAG lt PHASE gt gt gt Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 261 15 262 Netlist Examples vec 10 0 DC 6 V Source ISRC 1 2 AC 3 45 SIN O 1 1MEG Signal Gen VMEAS 12 9 Ammeter Spice Data Example D 1 2 DC 0 SIN O 1 1k O 0 AC 1 0 Signal Gen N is the positive node and N is the negative node Voltage sources need not be grounded Positive current is assumed to flow into the positive node through the source and out of the negative node A current source of positive value forces current to flow into the N node through the source and out of the N node Voltage sources in addition to being used for circuit excitation are the ammeters for SPICE that is zero valued voltage sources may be inserted into the circuit for the purpose of measuring current They of course have no effect on circuit operation since they represent short circuits VALUE is the DC operating point value or offset of the source If the source value is zero it may
162. dialog box and choose Open to display the dialog box shown in Figure 6 6 Select Waveform Name Xi Figure 6 6 This dialog box indicates the number of data points in the file 6 130 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 3 To rename the waveform to avoid naming conflicts with other waveforms type a new name in the Waveform Name text box 4 Select the Persistent Waveform check box to keep the waveform displayed on the graph no matter where else you click on the circuit A persistent waveform has an asterisk placed in front of the name 5 Deselect the Persistent Waveform check box to display the waveform only when you click the corresponding point in the circuit it will be displayed together with the waveform for the loaded circuit 6 Toremove a persistent stored waveform select it in the Remove list box and click the Remove button OR Select the waveform by clicking its label on the left side of the graph then press the Delete key on the keyboard You can display multiple waveforms for the same point in a circuit by naming the waveforms the same up to the or character in the name By adding different characters after the or you can plot multiple waveforms for the same point in the circuit For example suppose you name one recalled waveform v 4 1 and another v 4 2 This causes both waveforms to display simultaneously along with the current v 4 waveform when you click on node 4 in the circuit Reset
163. displayed during simulation Notes Databook specifications should be used with this function PWR_GND_PINS must be defined to use this function Example SUPPLY_MIN_MAX 4 75 5 25 See Also INTEGERS PWR_GND_PINS 17 374 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only TABLE Sets output logic states based on truth table General Form TABLE lt line gt lt input gt lt input gt lt output pin gt lt output pin gt lt input state gt lt input state gt lt output state gt lt output state gt Parameters lt line gt Variable into which the line number used in the table is placed lt input gt Name of the input pin or variable lt output pin gt lt input state gt lt output state gt Use index to the input pin Name of the output pin State of the individual inputs State of the individual outputs based on input conditions The TABLE statement operates like a truth table to set the level and strength of the specified outputs Valid input states are 0 1 X low input voltage is lt vil_param high input voltage is gt vih_param don t care what input voltage is Valid output states are L H Z ZERO set output level to vol_param ONE set output level to voh_param UNKNOWN set output level to v3s_param Output state letters can be followed by a colon and a letter to indicate strength S STRONG set output to rol_param for L and
164. diting and simulation options Auto Repeat This option lets you control how devices are selected from the library If Auto Repeat is checked as soon as a device is selected from the library and placed another identical device 1s automatically selected and made ready for placement This repeat placement process continues until you cancel it by pressing any key on the keyboard or by double clicking the mouse If Auto Repeat is not checked you must select and place each device separately Auto Refresh This option lets you control the refresh mode When Auto Refresh is on the screen refreshes automatically as the circuit is edited When it is disabled the screen must be refreshed manually while editing see the Refresh Screen option in the Edit menu Disabling this option lets you work more quickly on a slower computer system Quick Connect This option allows you to simply place a device pin on a wire or other device pin and CircuitMaker will automatically wire the parts together for you By default Quick Connect is enabled when you start CircuitMaker See Wiring in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for more details Device Designations CircuitMaker automatically assigns a designation to each device when it is placed Use the Device Designations dialog box pictured in Figure 12 1 to specify certain designation options Chapter 12 Options Menu 12 231 12 232 Figure 12 1 Use this dialog box to specify designat
165. draw a box around the devices OR Hold down the Shift key while clicking the devices you want to select 2 Choose Edit gt Set Designations 3 Type a number in the Starting Number text box Chapter 10 Edit Menu 10 215 10 216 4 Select All if you want all devices to be renumbered OR Click Selected Devices to renumber only those devices you have selected 5 Select Show Device Designations if you want the designations to appear in the schematic Designation assignments will start at the stated starting number and proceed from there skipping any designations that are already in use Note Set Designations is not the same thing as the Device Designations feature on the Options menu which numbers newly placed devices with a specified number or the next available number after the starting number you specify For more information see Device Designations in Chapter 12 Options Menu You can set the designation prefix for individual devices using the Edit Device Data dialog box described in Editing Devices of Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Each device must have a unique designation in order for analog simulation to work Edit gt Edit Items While some item parameters can be edited by double clicking the item some item parameters cannot The Edit Items submenu provides editing access to all parameters The following sections describe the items on this submenu Edit Bus Connection This feature lets you
166. during the SPICE data collection process showing the progress of the simulation When the SPICE data collection process is completed the Multimeter Window appears 8 Click the wire connected to the terminal of the battery with the tip of the Probe Tool Notice that the letter V appears on the Probe Tool when you move it over a wire Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 51 3 52 Stop Button Delete Tool Chapter 3 Tutorials 10 11 12 The DC voltage at that node 10V appears in the Multimeter Window Click the wire connected between the two resistors The DC voltage at that node 5V appears in the Multimeter Window SPICE data is not collected for the Ground node in the circuit it is always at zero volts Click the pin of the battery or one of the resistor pins Notice that an T displays on the Probe Tool when it is over a device pin The current through that device SmA appears in the Multimeter Window Click directly on one of the resistors Notice that a P displays on the Probe Tool when over a device The power dissipated by that resistor 25mW appears in the Value Window Click the Stop button on the Toolbar to stop the simulation and return to editing mode Creating a Simple RC Circuit Now let s replace one of the resistors with a capacitor to create a simple RC circuit where you can see the charging of the capacitor Transient Analysis begins its simulation in a stable DC condition
167. e Enable the following selected Device Faults check box to enable the fault 8 Click OK to exit the Device Faults dialog box then click OK to exit the Edit Device Data dialog box 9 Choose File gt Preferences 10 Click the Circuit Fault Data button to display the Circuit Faults dialog box 11 Click Device Data Display so it is checked 12 Click the Clear Hints Replacements button to clear these flags 13 Type xxx in the Fault Lock Password text box 14 Click OK to exit the Circuit Faults dialog box then click OK to exit the Preferences dialog box Chapter 8 Fault Simulation 8 199 8 200 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 If you want to save the fault settings for the circuit not required for this example you must now save the circuit Click the Run button on the Toolbar to restart the simulation Look at the waveform on the positive side of the filter capacitor You should see a sine wave of very low amplitude about 80mV peak to peak The student might determine from this measurement that the filter capacitor is shorted and needs to be replaced Stop the simulation by clicking the Stop button in the Toolbar Double click the filter capacitor C1 to display the Access Faults dialog box then click the Display Hint button to view the hint Double click the filter capacitor again to display the Access Faults dialog box then click the Replace Device button to disable
168. e specific device Valid operators in the math expressions include Following is an example of a generic subcircuit for a crystal which can be used as a building block for creating other crystals XCRYSTAL Crystal Subcircuit Parameters XCRYSTAL FREO Fundamental frequency 1 1MEG XCRYSTAL RS Series resistance 1 750 XCRYSTAL CX Parallel capacitance 0 13pf XCRYSTAL Q Quality Factor 10 1000 1000 FREQ 1Meg RS 750 C 13pf Q 1000 Generic 1MHz Crystal crystal pkg XTAL1 1 2 SUBCKT XCRYSTAL 1 2 LS 1 2 Q RS 6 2831852 FREQ IC 0 5M CS 2 3 1 Q 6 2831852 FREQ RS RS 3 4 RS CX 1 4 CX ENDS XCRYSTAL alias XCRYSTAL FREQ 2E6 RS 250 pkg XTAL1 1 2 PARAM A2 000MHZ Since CX and Q are not passed in the alias parameter list the default values of 13pF and 1000 will be used Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 313 Editing Digital Model Parameters When you double click a device that has digital simcode models associated with it Figure 16 16 appears Figure 16 16 Digital simcode devices are mixed signal digital devices which you can simulate in analog mode using features of XSpice Digital simcode devices use event driven behavioral models created at MicroCode Engineering You cannot add new simcode models however simcode devices can be used in macro circuits to create new mixed mode digital devices While you cannot edit the model itself you can alter certain parameters of the mo
169. e are hereby on notice that use of this Software is subject to restrictions which are the same or similar to those specified above License Agreement v License Agreement vi Table of Contents Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker DE STAC TON raso 1 1 Required User Background ccoocooococcccccnonononacccononancnncncnnnn anno nc cnn nana nrccn nana 1 1 Required Hardware Softwatre ooooooccconccccnnncccnconancnnnnncccnnn cnn nono nnnnnnn cnn naar acc nanr ranas 1 1 Installing CircuitMaker cta 1 2 Installing the Hardware HW KeyS ooocoonoccccccnococcccccononncncccnnonnnccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnccnnns 1 2 Updating from a Previous Version ii a 1 3 Multi User Project Installations ccccccccseseceecseeeeeeecceeeeesaeceeeeesaeeaesaeeeeaeeatens 1 6 Technical Support ess scccieneseadceieeecteeransketat steve dindeterdodhenaddeieniateale 1 8 About the Documentation cccooonncccccnnnccnnnnconcccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 9 Manual Conventions cis dans 1 9 Using Online Help eaeeeenr ee nee ere ner ie ae rer Peneoni teen Str ares een ne ne Ne oe ner rer oer ee 1 10 Watching the Online Tutorial ccccecccsccsssessesecseseesececcecseseesessesaesaeseeassaesesaeees 1 11 Where to Go from Here c csssscescsscsessesseseeseseeseesecseseeseeaecaesesaesaecaesesatsasensseeatees 1 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started CarculiMaker BASICS nice 2 1 Starting CircuitMaker cio ici 2 1 CircuitMaker Workspace acierta 2 1 A A s aniden den
170. e circuit Shift to place bus wires Add text to the circuit Delete devices wires and text Shift to snip wires Magnify and reduce the circuit Shift to reduce Rotate one or more selected devices Mirror one or more selected devices Toggle between Digital or Analog simulation mode AND Gate Digital Transistor Analog Initialize analog and digital simula tions Single step digital simulations Setup in Digital Options Run and stop simulations Observe plot data at any point s in the circuit context sensitive Interactively see the logic state of all nodes in Digital simulation mode Show digital waveforms in Digital simulation mode Display and select devices from the graphical parts browser Search for devices in the library by name number Create anew macro or expand a selected macro Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 37 Figure 2 3 Right click the mouse on different areas to access many CircuitMaker features Help Tool Display information on devices and wires TraxMaker Automatically create a PCB netlist and launch TraxMaker Using the Mouse As in other Windows applications CircuitMaker uses the mouse for clicking selecting and dragging When moving the mouse a corresponding selection tool or cursor movement occurs on the screen The familiar pointer Arrow Tool is used for standard Windows operations such as choosing from menus and dialog boxes You ca
171. e common mistakes listed under Step 1 of Solving Operating Point Analysis Failures earlier in this chapter Set RELTOL to 0 01 in the Analog Options dialog box By increasing the tolerance from 0 001 0 1 accuracy fewer iterations will be required to converge on a solution and the simulation will complete much more quickly Increase ITL4 to 100 in the Analog Options dialog box This will allow the Transient Analysis to go through more iterations for each timestep before giving up Reduce the accuracy of ABSTOL VNTOL if current voltage levels allow Your particular circuit may not require resolutions down to luV or 1pA You should allow at least an order of magnitude below the lowest expected voltage or current levels of your circuit Realistically model your circuit Add realistic parasitics especially stray junction capacitance Use RC snubbers around diodes Replace device models with subcircuits especially for RF and power devices Increase the rise fall times of the Pulse Generators Even the best pulse generators cannot switch instanta neously Change the integration method to Gear Gear integration requires longer simulation time but is generally more stable than the trapezoidal method Gear integration may be particularly useful with circuits that oscillate or have feedback paths 15 248 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics SPICE Option Variables Use SPICE option variables to control certain aspects of a simulat
172. e information Valid prefixes are Prefix Meaning A XSpice Model BV Nonlinear Dependent Voltage Sources BI Nonlinear Dependent Current Sources C Capacitors D Junction Diodes DZ Zener Diodes E Linear Voltage Controlled Voltage Sources F Linear Current Controlled Current Sources G Linear Voltage Controlled Current Sources H Linear Current Controlled Voltage Sources I Independent Current Sources Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics JFETs N channel JFETs P channel Coupled Mutual Inductors Inductors MOSFETs N channel MOSFETs P channel Lossy Transmission Lines Bipolar Junction Transistors NPN Bipolar Junction Transistors PNP Resistors Voltage Controlled Switches Lossless Transmission Lines Uniform Distributed RC Lines Lossy Independent Voltage Sources Current Controlled Switches Subcircuits MESFETs N channel GaAs FETs MESFETs P channel GaAs FETs 2ozgrrez NN xzE lt cJ3 g Analog This check box identifies this as a device that can be used in CircuitMaker s Analog simulation mode The analog simulator can only simulate a device if there is SPICE simulation data for that device If you attempt to run an Analog simulation using a device that does not have the Analog check box checked CircuitMaker displays a warning message and that device will be ignored in the simulation When creating your own device this box should be checked only if you have supplied SPICE data for the device o
173. e ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 20 This analysis shows the gain from the specified source to the output the point you click with the Probe Tool Notice that it shows DC resistance seen by the source and the DC resistance seen by the output load Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 145 CircuitMaker PRO only Noise Analysis Noise Analysis lets you measure the noise in your circuit due to noise contributions of resistors and semiconductor devices CircuitMaker can plot the Noise Spectral Density which is the noise measured in Volts squared per Hertz V 2 Hz Capacitors inductors and controlled sources are treated as noise free The following noise measurements can be made in CircuitMaker Measurement Output Noise Input Noise Component Noise Description The noise measured at a specified output node The amount of noise that if injected at the input would cause the calcu lated noise at the output For example 1f the output noise is 10p and the circuit has a gain of 10 then it would take 1p of noise at the input to measure 10p of noise at the output Thus the equivalent input noise is Ip The output noise contribution of each component in the circuit The total output noise is the sum of individual noise contributions of resistors and semiconductor devices Each of these components contributes a certain amount of noise which is multiplied by the gain from that component s po
174. e Carlo Analysis Uniform distribution Values are uniformly distributed over the specified tolerance range Suppose you have a 1K resistor with a tolerance of 10 percent There is an equal chance of the generated value being anywhere from 900 ohms to 1100 ohms Itis a flat distribution Gaussian distribution Values are distributed according to a gaussian bell shaped curve with the center at the nominal value and the specified tolerance at 3 standard deviations Given a 1K 10 percent resistor the center of the distribution would be at 1000 ohms 3 standard deviations at 1100 ohms and 3 standard deviations at 990 ohms Worst Case distribution This is the same as the uniform distribution but only the end points worst case of the range are used Given a 1K 10 percent resistor the value used would be randomly chosen from the two worst case values of 990 ohms and 1100 ohms On any one simulation run there is an equal chance that the high end worst case value 1100 or low end worst case value 990 will be used To set up and run a Monte Carlo Analysis 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click the Monte Carlo button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 27 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 151 Enter tolerances as actual values or as percentages for CircuitMaker PRO onl i p y the six general categories of devices then choose OK see Specifying Default Tolerances later in this secti
175. e Model Selections dialog box the first character of the device description will be an asterisk To remove an existing model 1 Select it by clicking it with the mouse 2 Click Delete This only removes the model reference from the linking file it does not remove the actual model from the library Adding New Models to an Existing Symbol When you obtain new models from an outside source they are generally provided in a single ASCII library file Note If you edit this file with a word processor be sure to save the file in TEXT ONLY format Use the Model Data button in the Macro Utilities dialog box to create a link to each model in the new library file The following steps illustrate an example of adding a new model To add a 2N5209 transistor to CircuitMaker 1 Choose Macros gt Macro Utilities 2 Select the symbol for an NPN transistor then click Model Data 3 Click Open and open the library file MCEBJT LIB in which the 2N5209 model resides All of the model and subcircuit names found in this library will be displayed in the list box on the left 4 Click 2N5209 5 Enter appropriate information about the model in the Description field for example Si 625mW 50V 50mA 30MHz Amp 6 Inthe Pkg Name field enter TO 92B to match the name of the component pattern in TraxMaker 7 Enter pin numbers to match the pad designations of the component in TraxMaker On the TO 92B in TraxMaker with the flat side facing you
176. e difference between the two Y cursors is shown as c d Click the b cursor at the top of the Transient Analysis graph and drag it to the top peak of the first cycle of the output waveform Click the a cursor and drag it to the top peak of the second cycle of the output waveform The period period 1 frequency of the signal is shown as the difference between the two X cursors a b The frequency also appears directly Draw a selection rectangle around a portion of the waveforms in the Transient Analysis window that is of interest to you Do this by clicking the mouse once and holding the mouse while you draw a box Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 61 Reset Button Notice that when you release the mouse button the view zooms in on the portion of the waveform that you selected To restore the original view click the Reset button in the graph window 17 Click the DC Analysis window to select it then click on any wire in the circuit A DC analysis waveform displays in the window similar to what would be seen on a curve tracer Use the cursors to get measurements from the waveforms 18 Click the AC Analysis window to select it and then click the wire at the output of the Op Amp An AC analysis waveform displays in the window 19 Click the Setup button the left button in the upper left hand corner of the AC Analysis window 20 Select Log scale for the X Grid select Decibels for the Y Axis click the Show Wave Grid check box then c
177. e green waveform label along the left hand edge of the Transient Analysis window to select the wave form Press the Up Arrow key briefly to change the vertical position of the waveform moving the waveform near the top of the graph While holding down the Shift key click the QO output of the 74LS168A A yellow waveform appears near the center of the graph Click the corresponding yellow label along the left hand edge of the Transient Analysis window to select this waveform 25 Press the Up Arrow key to change the vertical position of the waveform moving it near the green waveform 26 Repeat this procedure for each output of the 74LS168A The resulting graph should appear similar to the one shown at the left You can run this same circuit in Digital Logic simulation mode To try it stop the simulation switch to digital and run simulation In Digital Logic simulation mode the displays will be animated to show the correct output Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 65 3 66 Chapter 3 Tutorials CHAPTER 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Using CircuitMaker s robust set of drawing and editing tools you can create simple to complex schematics quickly and easily This chapter covers schematic drawing and editing tools and features PA oh ES p par ap 4 KE a E sm E qu pa E 7 A L u 7 a i L i j aman gt 4 T OM E i a a E I Pe x an Los 1 P A s a aji 1m F bob Ll oa LN LJ L a E 3 f
178. e gt would be included to check for a more specific change If they are not included the function will return 1 if the pin has changed at the current simulation step Examples IF CHANGED_LH CLK THEN IF CHANGED DATA lt 10n THEN Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 331 CircuitMaker PRO only 17 332 DELAY Sets propagation delay to specified outputs General Form 1 DELAY lt output gt lt output gt lt delay gt General Form 2 DELAY lt output gt lt output gt CASE lt conditional exp gt lt delay gt CASE lt conditional exp gt lt delay gt CASE lt conditional exp gt lt delay gt END Parameters lt output gt Name of variable index to the output pin lt conditional exp gt Conditional expression that determines which delay is used lt delay gt Propagation delay time to the output pin Use The DELAY command is executed once for each pin listed and posts a propagation delay for each pin that has changed its level The CASE option allows more than one lt delay gt to be specified The lt conditional exp gt then determines which lt delay gt will be used If a delay is set for a pin that has not changed then the pin will be flagged as NO CHANGE and the delay will not be posted The lt delay gt can be a real constant a real variable or a real expression Notes The DELAY command must be executed exactly once for each output pin that is for each pin declare
179. e identified as PART A PART B etc from the Edit Device Pin Data dialog box See Pins later in this chapter Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 89 4 90 Description Use this field for schematic reference only You can use it to display additional information such as custom part numbers tolerances etc This field does not affect simulation Use the Visible check box to make the field visible or not You can also drag the Description label around on the schematic with the mouse The Description label will remain right side up no matter how the device is rotated Package Use this field to identify the type of physical package footprint the device is in DIP14 TO 92B etc When you are creating pcb netlists for TraxMaker or other pcb layout programs make sure the Package name you enter exactly matches the name of the corresponding component footprint in your pcb layout program s library Auto Designation Prefix This is the prefix used when CircuitMaker automatically assigns a device s designation whenever you place a device or select Edit gt Set Designations The prefix may be up to 4 characters in length Spice Prefix Character s This is the SPICE prefix used in conjunction with the D and M flags described later under Spice Data You would normally use this field when linking the macro symbols you define to the proper model selections when creating new devices see Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for mor
180. e itself Using the Text Tool to Label To label the circuit using the Text Tool 1 Select the Text Tool 2 Click in the workspace where you want to place text 3 Resize the text box as necessary see picture at left 4 Type the text Text can be multi lined and fully stylized Always visible text may be repositioned at any time Changing Device Labels Don t confuse a device designation with a device label value Figure 4 7 illustrates the difference R1 LOk AA Designation Label Value Figure 4 7 A Label Value is information about a device whereas a Designation identifies the device in the circuit To label devices using the Edit Device Data dialog box 1 Double click the device 2 Ifadialog box other than the Edit Device Data dialog box appears click the Netlist button 3 Type the appropriate text in the Label Value Designa tion or Description text box 4 Make the text visible on the schematic by selecting its Visible check box You can reposition label values designations and descrip tions anywhere around the device by dragging them with the Arrow Tool Even if you reposition a label around a device it remains attached to the device when the device is moved around the workspace For a detailed description of these labels refer to the following section Editing Devices Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 87 Editing Devices You can easily edit a wide range of device information
181. e negative terminal usually ground measured in volts or amps Edit FM Signal Data a p Figure 6 41b Use this dialog box to edit an FM signal Peak Amplitude VA Maximum amplitude of the output swing excluding the DC Offset measured in volts or amps Carrier Frequency F Frequency of the unmodulated output in hertz Modulation Index MDI Value corresponding to a function of amplitude of the modulating signal indicating the level of modulation MDI frequency deviation F Signal Frequency F Frequency of the modulating signal in hertz Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 169 Editing Exponential Data Use the dialog box in Figure 6 42 to set the parameters of the O 5V exponential waveform The waveform is described by the following formulas where t instance of time eos Vit to tpp VI V tko tO tpp VI VP VI 1 et RD RT Vi tO toro VI VP VI e RD RT VI VP 1 et FD FT Ede Experrenttal Dala Figure 6 42 Use this dialog box to edit exponential wave data Initial Amplitude VI Initial amplitude of the output with respect to the negative terminal usually ground measured in volts or amps Pulse Amplitude VP Max amplitude of output swing measured in volts or amps Rise Time Delay RD The point in time from t0 when the output begins to rise This provides a phase shift of the output by delaying the start of the exponential waveform Rise Time
182. e operators and functions in expressions to manipulate data and to make comparisons which control program flow Expressions are always contained within parentheses Operator precedence is from left to right starting with the inner most parentheses Operators 1 828 Il amp gt gt lt lt gt lt l gt lt Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 327 CircuitMaker PRO only Math Functions POW ABS SQRT EXP LOG LOG10 SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN HSIN HCOS HTAN Expression Functions Use these functions various expressions PARAM_SET PWL_TABLE SELECT_VALUE MIN_TYP_MAX NUMBER VALUE CHANGE_TIME WIDTH_TIME INSTANCE CHANGED_xx READ_DATA Chapter 17 Digital SimCode Determines if a predefined SimCode param has been set Returns value from interpolative lookup table Returns value from simple lookup table Returns value from MIN_TYP_MAX lookup table Returns number based on binary weighted pin states Returns state of the specified pin Returns time when the specified pin last changed state Returns last pulse width encountered on specified pin Checks to see if this is the specified device instance Checks to see if the specified pin has changed state Reads data from an ASCII file into arrays CircuitMaker PRO only Program Control Use these statements to control the flow of the program XXXX source Identifies the beginning of the
183. e or mirror devices in the circuit Use the Cut and Move commands to modify the circuit Use the Copy Duplicate and Copy Circuit commands Note This prevents the student from copying faulty devices into another circuit which is not password protected Use the Paste and Duplicate com mands to modify the circuit Use the Replace Device button in the Access Faults dialog box Note This does not prevent the student from deleting the device or selecting a new device from the device library View a message when a device is replaced The message indicates whether or not the replaced device was faulty View any hint messages Run any of the script functions Select a new SPICE model for any device Select a new SPICE subcircuit for any device Chapter 8 Fault Simulation 8 195 8 196 Option Signal Selection Device Data Display Device Libraries Digital Options Digital Trace Show Node Numbers Analog Options Analysis Selections Save Circuit Chapter 8 Fault Simulation Disables Student s Ability To Change the settings of the Signal Generators View or edit the device data in the Edit Device Data dialog box and change the Visible status of the device labels and values Select new devices from the device library Note This does not prevent the student from replacing a device by clicking on the Replace Device button in the Access Faults dialog box Access the Digital Options dialog box
184. e projects each with separate libraries and preferences Note A site license is required for network installation ae Up Multiple Projects Install and run CircuitMaker as described above to initialize the default file paths then exit 2 Create a separate directory for each user or project 3 Place acopy of the Cirmaker dat file in each user s project directory This file contains the Preferences data which allows each user to specify their own circuit and library paths and other circuit and program preferences 4 Ifauser will need to make modifications or additions to the Macros library changes that must not affect other users place a copy of the USER LIB DEVICEDB DAT SYMBOLDB DAT and HOTKEYSDB DAT files into that user s project directory The DEVICEDB DAT Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 26 10 11 12 13 SYMBOLDB DAT and HOTKEYSDB DAT files must always be placed in the same directory as USER LIB If a user will need to make modifications or additions to the SPICE models or subcircuits place a copy of the entire Models directory into that user s project direc tory If accidental modification of files which are common to multiple users is a concern see your network adminis trator for details on how to protect these files from modification In Windows 95 NT4 Right click the Start button and select Open Browse to the CircuitMaker icon right click it and Select Properties Click the Shortcut tab
185. e to the student You can add faults to both digital and analog circuits Hints Create a working circuit before adding fault data While CircuitMaker s comprehensive fault simulator lets you create multiple complex faults use discretion when adding faults to a circuit One or two damaged pins on an IC a burnt resistor or a shorted capacitor might be enough to challenge the student Device Faults Each device might have multiple faults but each device pin can have only a single fault There are 6 basic types of device faults that can be simulated in CircuitMaker Pin s Stuck High In Digital Simulation mode the specified pins will be con nected to a logic high In Analog Simulation mode the specified pins will be connected to an invisible independent voltage source of an instructor specified value Pin s Stuck Low In Digital Simulation mode the specified pins will be con nected to a logic low In Analog Simulation mode the specified pins will be connected to an invisible independent voltage source of an instructor specified value Chapter 8 Fault Simulation 8 189 Pin s Open In Digital Simulation mode the specified pins will be discon nected from the device In Analog Simulation mode the specified pins will be connected to the device through an invisible resistor of an instructor specified value Pins Shorted Together In Digital Simulation mode the specified pins will be shorted directly together In Analog Simula
186. e voltage level of the incoming signal deter mines which load will be used If the voltage level goes 17 348 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only below VIL and remains below VIH then the input is consid ered to be in the LOW state and the v r is applied If the voltage level goes above VIH and remains above VIL then the input is considered to be in the HIGH state and the v0 r0 1s applied o is the input state off resistance The unused load is essentially removed from the circuit by changing its r value to the value specified for io The values for v0 r0 v and r1 can be either real constants or real variables The values for io and t must be real constants Pin names and pin variables cannot be mixed in the same LOAD statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names For input pins the values used for rO should be derived using the databook specs for ITH A standard LS input for example will sink amaximum of 20uA at Vin 2 7V Therefore if vol_param 0 2V then for max HIGH state load rO Vin vol_param WHmax r0 2 7V 0 2V 200A r0 125k ohms The values used for r should be derived using the databook specs for IIL A standard LS input for example will source a maximum of 400uA at Vin 0 4V Therefore if voh_param 4 6V then for max LOW state load r1 voh_param Vin WLmax rl 4 6V 0 4V 400uA rl 10 5k ohms For power pins the value used for r
187. ears allowing you to save it under a specific name Save As Choose Save As to save the current circuit to disk using a file name that is different than the one shown in the Title Bar CircuitMaker will display a file selector dialog box allowing you to choose the path and a file name of up to eight characters The circuit is saved in an ASCII format with a default file extension of CKT Revert Choose Revert to abandon any changes made since last saving the circuit to disk and load the last saved version back into the work area CircuitMaker will then display a dialog box asking you to confirm that you want to revert to the last saved version Import gt Simulate SPICE Netlist Use this option to import and simulate a SPICE netlist that you might have created in another simulation program When you use this feature CircuitMaker does not display the actual schematic drawing Instead it runs the simulation displays the waveform data and provides a plot variable which you can use to choose different variables to plot To import and simulate a SPICE netlist 1 Choose Import gt Simulate SPICE Netlist 2 Selecta file with a NET extension and choose Open 3 When the simulation is complete select an analysis window and then click the Probe Tool on the plot variable 4 Selecta variable from the list that appears then choose OK A waveform plots data for the variable you selected 5 To plot multiple variables hold down the S
188. ect when running AC Analysis AC Analysis temporarily replaces each AC source with a sinusoidal wave of a fixed magnitude and phase The Source check box allows you to specify whether this generator will be used as an AC source in the AC Analysis The Magni tude and Phase edit fields allow you to specify the fixed values that will be used Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 165 Edit Signal Generator ca Y e Eu CO i Figure 6 39 Use the Edit Signal Generator dialog box to select the waveform you want to edit Editing Sine Wave Data a Click the Sine Wave button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 40 Use this dialog box to set the parameters of the sinusoidal waveform 2 0 Ke The waveform beginning at Start Delay is described by the following formula where t instance of time Vit tot VO sp Vit tot stop VO VA sin 2pF t SD et SP THETA 6 166 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Edi Giro Ra Dala le EEN Figure 6 40 Use this dialog box to edit sine wave data DC Offset VO Used to adjust the DC bias of the signal generator with respect to the negative terminal usually ground measured in volts or amps Peak Amplitude VA Maximum amplitude of the output swing excluding the DC Offset measured in volts or amps Frequency F Frequency of the output in hertz Start Delay SD Provides a phase shift of the output by delaying the start of the sine
189. ed States of America CircuitMaker TraxMaker and SimCode are trademarks or registered trademarks of MicroCode Engineering Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners MicroCode Engineering Inc 927 West Center Orem UT 84057 USA Phone 801 226 4470 FAX 801 226 6532 www microcode com 11 MicroCode Engineering Software License Agreement PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE OPEN ING THE ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE OPENING THIS ENVELOPE INDICATES THAT YOU HAVE READ AND ACCEPTED ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS IN THIS AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THIS PRODUCT FOR A REFUND CircuitMaker is a proprietary product of MicroCode Engineering and is protected by Copyright Law MicroCode Engineering grants you a non exclusive license to use CircuitMaker subject to the terms and restrictions of this license agreement You are receiving a license to use CircuitMaker MicroCode Engineering retains title to CircuitMaker and is the sole copyright owner You as an authorized end user of CircuitMaker are permitted certain rights to use CircuitMaker as defined in this license agreement e You are authorized to use CircuitMaker on only one 1 computer at a time You must obtain additional license agreements before using the software on additional computers or on a computer network e You may make a backup copy of CircuitMaker for the sole purpose
190. ee rEn cy peerrrer rr ey ere ee 14 1 PIN NMS TONG spot cier 14 1 O ere nee eee eee ere eres 14 1 SlOP uno ea car A ete eee 14 2 A 14 2 e AA o O O E A 14 2 Display Wavef rmS praia Rd 14 2 A A eerie rere 14 2 Display Variable Name Sisi ale 14 2 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Troubleshooting SPICE Convergence coccccccccconoccccncccccnnnnnanancncnnccnanannns 15 1 Solving Operating Point Analysis Failures c cccccscseseesecscsecsessesseesseseeeseesens 15 2 Solving DC Analysis Failures ccccccccccsscsesscsscsessessesecseseesecaseessesateesseseteeeaeeaes 15 3 Solving Transient Analysis Failures c ccccccsececsseecssssessesecsesesesessesseereaeeeeaes 15 4 SPICE Option Variables iaa 15 5 SPICE s Elementary Devices ooooooocccnncccconcccccconnnncccncncnnnnnnnannncnnnnnnnns 15 13 o A 15 13 Semiconductor RAS ia cla Sa ccene shee deee sdeaddeniensiemaeiaants 15 13 o A A 15 14 Semiconductor Capacitors iii 15 15 NAUC S eas e ta 15 15 Coupled Mutual Inductors rai aia 15 16 Voltage Current Controlled Switches ccccccccccceseessececsessessesessesecsecsesaeeatens 15 17 Independent Sources sure ion 15 17 Linear Voltage Controlled Current Sources oococcinnccoocoonocoonoononnonnoncnnonnnononnonos 15 19 Linear Voltage Controlled Voltage Sources ooococonociocnonocnonconoonoononconconoonoononos 15 19 Linear Current Controlled Current Sources cccccsecsesseseesesecsesseeeteessesseeneeaes 15 20 Linear Curr
191. el Value can be dragged around the device on the schematic with the mouse and will remain attached to the device when the device is moved If you set the Visible check box to gray see diagram at left the Label replaces the Device name and retains the same orientation as the device when rotated Otherwise the label value will remain right side up no matter how the device is rotated Designation Use this field to identify the device in the circuit such as U3 CR7 RLOAD etc You can also make this field visible with the Visible check box This field must contain the device designation in order for simulation and pcb netlists to work properly The Designation label may also be dragged around on the schematic with the mouse It will remain right side up no matter how the device is rotated This field is filled in automatically when you place the device See Auto Designation Prefix later in this section for more information See also Set Designations in Chapter 10 Edit Menu and Device Designations in Chapter 12 Options Menu for other features that affect device designations Important Individual parts of multipart packages must be grouped properly CircuitMaker takes care of this automati cally if you use devices as they are from the library How ever if you have altered multipart packages they must be grouped using the Edit gt Group Items command Just changing the Designation field is not sufficient Each individual part must b
192. elay of all selected devices The default delay for all devices is one 1 but by using Set Prop Delays you can change this value to any integer from 1 to 14 The units assigned to delay are arbitrary and it is left 10 214 Chapter 10 Edit Menu to you to determine what they are The concept is that if one device has a delay of one and another a delay of three then in the real world the second device would have a propaga tion delay three times larger than the first device Set Designations Choose Edit gt Set Designations to display the Set Designa tions dialog box pictured in Figure 10 3 Use this feature to renumber devices designations of devices you have already placed in the schematic You can renumber all devices or a group of devices you have selected A fr pig a ee ogg Seeders jaor Fe Sto recs lero E toes Figure 10 3 Use this dialog box to renumber device designations for all devices or a group of devices The Set Designations feature is useful if you want the devices in a schematic or a particular group of devices to have designations numbered with a certain range of num bers For example you might want to renumber all the resistors in your schematic R40 R41 R42 R43 and so on To renumber device designations 1 Unselect all devices that is don t select any devices to renumber all devices on the board OR Select a group of devices by holding the left mouse button while you
193. eneral the value of RSHUNT should be set to a very high resistance 1e 12 Default 0 no shunt resis tors The minimum step size required to register an event on the input of the internal A D converters Default 0 01 volts SPICE s Elementary Devices Each device used in a circuit requires certain information for the SPICE simulation to run This section describes each type of device and information that each requires CircuitMaker provides this information to the SPICE netlist provided you properly draw and label the circuit See Editing Devices in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for more information The information provided here will help you better under stand how each of the components affects the simulation of the circuit Parameters that are enclosed in lt gt symbols are optional Refer to Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for more information about the models mentioned here Resistors General Form RXXXXXXX N1 N2 VALUE Netlist Example R1 1 2 10K Spice Data Example SD 1 2 SV N1 and N2 are the two element nodes Value is the resistance in ohms and may be positive or negative but not zero If N1 is at a higher voltage than N2 the current flow through the resistor is positive If N2 is at a higher voltage than N1 the current flow is negative See Also Resistor Var Resistor example circuit ANALOG CKT Semiconductor Resistors General Form RXXXXXXX N1 N2 lt VALUE gt lt MNAME gt lt
194. ent Analysis the oscilloscope is enabled and set to its default conditions Under normal conditions you probably won t need to change these settings Selecting Analog Simulation Mode You know Analog simulation mode is selected when the transistor icon is displayed on the Digital Analog button on the Toolbar Analog Simulation Tools Several buttons in the Toolbar are used specifically for simulation This section describes these tools Note The functionality of these buttons is somewhat different in Digital logic mode See Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation for more information Step Button Probe Tool Analog Mixed Mode 2 17 pe Simulation icon ra fe N K Reset Button Run Stop Button Trace Button Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 117 Digital Analog Button Dj Click the Digital Analog button to choose which simulation mode you want to operate in When the AND gate icon is displayed you are in CircuitMaker s Digital mode when the transistor icon is displayed you are in Analog mode See the CircuitMaker s Simulation Modes earlier in this chapter for an explanation of the differences between Analog and Digital mode Reset Button In Analog mode clicking the Reset button generates the node numbers for the circuit without running the simulation This is important if you want to save a SPICE netlist file or view the node numbers on the schematic but not run the simulation You can also reset the
195. ent Controlled Voltage Sources ooooccconocioononocnonconconoononconconoonoanonos 15 20 Non Linear Dependent Sources ccccccccceecsecsscsesseseesessesecsecaecaeseseesseseeeaeeass 15 21 Contents xvii Lossless Transmission Lines 1 ccssccccceeesceeesceeceececcetceeseceececeeeseseeeesnsecees 15 22 Lossy Transmission IMSS a A 15 23 Uniform Distributed RC Lines LOSSY c ccceceeceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeaeeee 15 24 Junction DIOS iia 15 24 Bipolar Junction Transistors BJTS iaa 15 25 Junction Field Effect Transistors JFETS ccccccsscsscscsssseseeecsecseseeseeessesesaeees 15 25 MOSFETS Gustan iia aa Eiaa iaaa 15 26 MESFETs GaASFETS cceescscsssessccssssesessccssesecssssssecrscssessccssnsesenressuesserseneesesten 15 27 SimCode Devices adi 15 28 NODESET Salem cort 15 28 A aecnec aca ac sen sees becaeseceseemabeeesterse 15 28 Suggested Reading ci ics ela aie 15 30 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices What s In This Chapter acsscc ccccceeres scusatveeeceeteesecenseeedes eneyesteneeeeeeteeeevies 16 1 Creating Device Symbols scientists 16 2 Using Symbol Editor Display Controls ooononcncnncnnnonoccocnocnoonnonconcn nc ncnn canino 16 3 Drawing a Symbol with the MOUSE cccccceeseeeceeeeeeeeeseeseecaeeeeseeseeseeeeeesaeeaees 16 4 Selecting Shapes A a sone aa scionee ewes oewieeen omic tae 16 5 Adding an Existing Shape a 16 6 Importing a Metafile Daria ia 16 7 Adding DIP LCC and QFP Packages
196. er See Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Note You can tie together Multiple Vs by using one normal V to supply power and multiple Vs with the SPICE data field deleted You can also use one normal V to supply power and multiple terminal devices Connectors Misc Connect these together using the Bus Data field of the V device and the Terminal Name field of the Terminal device Using the terminal devices instead of additional V devices eliminates the step of deleting the SPICE Data field CircuitMaker will make a connection between the Terminal device and any bus that has the same name CircuitMaker will also make a connection between the Terminal device and any Input or Output connector that has the same name Do not use a semicolon in the Terminal Name field For example to connect a Terminal device to the VEE bus enter VEE not VEE in the Terminal Name field CircuitMaker automatically copies what you enter in Terminal Name field to the Terminal s Bus Data field and appends a semicolon Working with Test Points Test Points are set in a circuit to tell CircuitMaker where to collect simulation data Note that you do not have to set test points before running a simulation CircuitMaker does it automatically Test Points determine how much data is actually stored in the RAW file and they determine which variables are displayed in the analysis windows when the simulation runs As a result more test points require a longer s
197. er 12 Options Menu Title Block The Title Block options in the Preferences dialog box allow you to set default Title Block settings that will be used every time you open CircuitMaker This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Title Block in Chapter 12 Options Menu Border The Border options in the Preferences dialog box allow you to set default border settings that will be used every time you open CircuitMaker These options include view and print preferences This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Border in Chapter 12 Options Menu Chapter 9 File Menu 9 209 9 210 Chapter 9 File Menu Circuit Fault Data Button Click on the Circuit Fault Data button to access and modify the circuit fault options CircuitMaker will use See Circuit Faults in Chapter 8 Fault Simulation for more information Circuit Display Button Click on the Circuit Display button to access and modify the default circuit display options CircuitMaker will use This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Circuit Display Data in Chapter 12 Options Menu Select Colors Button Click on the Select Colors button to access and modify the default color options CircuitMaker will use This option is also accessible from the View Menu and from the right click pop up menu when right clicking on an analysis window See Colors in Chapter 13 View and Window Menus Exit Choose File gt Exit to exit CircuitMaker and r
198. erring graphics to the clipboard or when exporting a graphic to a file To setup export options 1 Choose File gt Export gt Options to display the dialog box shown in Figure 7 2 2 Choose On Off or Simulation for the Show LED LAMP Display State option 3 Choose Color or B W Black and White to specify the output color Figure 7 2 The Export Options dialog lets you specify output settings 4 Choose an export format Format Characteristics Windows Metafile Windows format for vector graphics Device Independent Bitmap A pixel by pixel represen tation of a graphic that looks good at any resolution Device Dependent Bitmap Apixel by pixel represen tation of a graphic that only looks good at its original resolution Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 181 7 182 Exporting Waveforms as Graphics You can export CircuitMaker waveforms and use them in documentation presentations etc You can either save the waveform as a graphic file or copy and paste the waveform directly into another software program Use the Waveforms as Graphics export option to save the waveforms for the current circuit as a Windows Metafile Device Independent Bitmap or Device Dependent Bitmap Use the Export Options dialog box described earlier to choose the format Note CircuitMaker saves only the information currently displayed in the active Waveforms or Analysis window To save waveforms as graphics 1 Runa simulation so that wa
199. erting to Previously Saved File If you made changes to a CKT file that you don t wish to save you may revert to the last version of the CKT file you saved under the same filename To revert to the previously saved file 1 Choose File gt Revert Chapter 2 Getting Started CHAPTER 3 Tutorials This chapter covers step by step processes in the order you would normally perform them Working through the follow ing examples will provide a general understanding of the way CircuitMaker works and will illustrate that there is often more than one way of doing a task Tutorial 1 Drawing a Schematic This tutorial covers the following topics e Using the Device Selection dialog box e Selecting a transistor e Selecting resistors e Selecting a V and ground device e Changing resistor and transistor label values e Wiring the circuit Using the Device Selection Dialog Box Drawing a schematic is as easy as pointing and clicking with the mouse Let s walk through a simple example by con structing the circuit shown in Figure 3 1 VER 15V RB RC 220k 870 Y Ql UN 2N2222A Figure 3 1 This is a very simple circuit that consists of one transistor two resistors a power source and a ground Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 43 1 Begin by starting the CircuitMaker program and if necessary clearing the workspace by choosing File gt New or clicking the New button on the Toolbar New Button 2 Choose Devices gt Brow
200. es Save ASCII Library Use Save ASCII Library to write the currently loaded USER LIB file to an ASCII file CircuitMaker displays a file selector dialog box asking for the name of the ASCII file In this format user defined symbols which have been saved in Windows metafile or bitmap format will be lost and replaced by asimple rectangle The pins however remain intact The ASCII format is used for conversion between 16 and 32 bit systems This library may be converted back to binary format by choosing Macros gt Convert ASCII Library Convert ASCII Library Use Convert ASCII Library to convert an ASCII user library file created with the Save ASCII Library option to binary format CircuitMaker displays a file selector dialog box asking for the name of the ASCII user library file to be converted Then a second file selector dialog appears Chapter 11 Macros Menu 11 229 asking for the name of the new binary file This option is provided for compatibility between 16 and 32 bit systems Update Search List Use this feature to refresh the SEARCHDB DAT file Normally the SEARCHDB DAT file is updated automatically when necessary If for any reason the Device Search list seems incorrect or out of date you can create a new search list file by choosing Macros gt Update Search List 11 230 Chapter 11 Macros Menu CHAPTER 12 Options Menu The Options menu contains commands which enable you to control various display e
201. es and pin designations are required for circuit simulation and PCB netlist generation For compatibility with TraxMaker each pin designation should match the Pad Designation of the corresponding pad in the TraxMaker component To edit pin names and pin designations 1 In the Symbol Editor select the Select Move option in the Element Type group box 16 282 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices Tip You can create barred pin names by entering braces f around all or part of a pin name Barred pin names work correctly only with monospaced fonts such as Courier New CircuitMaker s default font You can also orient pin names perpendicu lar or parallel to the pin 2 Right click a pin to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 16 3 3 Give each pin a name up to 15 characters and a designation up to 5 alphanumeric characters even if the names are not displayed Note For multipart packages one pin designation should be listed for each part in the package separated by commas Symbol Pin Figure 16 3 Use the Symbol Pin dialog box to edit pin names and designations Element List and Edit Buffer As you add elements to the drawing they are also added to the Element List The Element List contains a text descrip tion of each element in the device s symbol The link between the drawing window and the Element List is interactive When you select an element in the drawing window it is highlighted in the Element List
202. esent SimCode device file name Examples MESSAGE time t tCLK tDATA tQ tON MESSAGE device instance s INSTANCE MESSAGE 3e tSd t d t d t d present_t ime CLK DATA Q ON See Also PROMPT MIN_TYP_MAX Returns value from MIN_TYP_MAX look up table General Form MIN_TYP_MAX lt index gt lt min gt lt typ gt lt max gt Parameters lt index gt Input variable index to select min typ or max values lt min gt Minimum databook value lt typ gt Typical databook value lt max gt Maximum databook value Use The MIN_TYP_MAX function is similar to the SELECT_VALUE function except that three 3 values variables must be entered The keyword NULL can be 17 352 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only substitued for one or two unknown values If a predefined integer variable see INTEGERS is used as the lt index gt unknown NULL values are calculated from the known values as follows Known Values Formula lt min gt lt max gt typical lt max gt lt min gt 2 lt min gt only typical lt min gt lt min scale factor gt maximum lt min gt lt min scale factor gt lt max scale factor gt lt typ gt only minimum lt typ gt lt min scale factor gt maximum lt typ gt lt max scale factor gt lt max gt only minimum lt max gt lt max scale factor gt lt min scale factor gt typical lt max gt lt max scale f
203. esults Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 147 CircuitMaker PRO only Click the Noise analysis window then click on the noise output node S Choose Simulation gt Display Variable Names This labels the input noise waveform as NI and the output noise waveform NO For example if the specified noise output node is node 6 then the output noise waveform would be labeled NO 6 and the input noise waveform would be labeled NI 6 9 Click a component to measure the output noise contri bution of that component If the component you click on is a subcircuit then you may select from a list of contributing noise sources within the subcircuit Note that component noise data is not available if 0 zero was entered in the Points Per Summary field in the Noise Analysis Setup dialog box 1 DR 1 040k atb 30S ok De LS Yd 9 090 ccd WDa 15 a R ij Mil ha ead aja Ye Figure 6 24 This Noise Analysis waveform shows noise at the output and the equivalent input noise at the specified source over a specified frequency range The waveform in Figure 6 24 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figures 6 22 and 6 23 See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms 6 148 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation A a temperature Sweep You can use a Temperature Sweep only when you have enabled o
204. etting Started Anatomy of a Schematic Drawing Figure 2 2 shows a basic schematic including device symbols label values and designations wires and pindots 3 Device designation Device label value 100k Vin 100m 100107 RI 10 Device symbol Pin dot Ground Vee Figure 2 2 CircuitMaker s straightforward approach makes it easy to identify each part of a schematic drawing CircuitMaker Conventions If you are experienced with Windows applications you already know how to start and quit CircuitMaker select menus using the mouse save your work and locate and organize your documents On the other hand CircuitMaker has special features that are not common to other Windows applications These options let CircuitMaker perform some of the special tasks unique to circuit design CircuitMaker Files CircuitMaker includes a number of special purpose files in addition to the CircuitMaker application The following table lists the various types of files you will use by file extension CKT Schematic or Circuit files DAT Data files HotKeys device library classifications UB Device library files SRP Script files MOD Model files SUB Subcircuit files RAW Simulation data files Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 35 2 36 Accessing Tools and Features This section shows you the fundamental tools and processes used to draw schematics Task Overview Using CircuitMaker involves six basic procedures
205. etup and hold times etc Outputs of the devices see the effect of loading on them and nearly all the parameters of the real world are taken into account See Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation for more on this mode Digital Mode on the other hand is designed for purely digital logic simulation This mode is only used for digital circuits and depends solely on the logic states of the devices that make up the circuit Digital mode simulation still takes into account propagation delays but they are unit delays instead of actual propagation delays No power supply is required and the digital device output levels are constant in this mode Digital electronics is the world of the computer The binary 1 s and 0 s of the computer are actually the high and low voltage levels of tiny electronic devices known as integrated Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 101 5 102 circuits Digital logic simulation then becomes a relativel y simple task because of the limited number of digital states that must be represented CircuitMaker s digital logic simulator is very fast and fully interactive meaning you can flip switches and alter the circuit while the simulation is running and immediately see the response Devices and Simulation CircuitMaker provides four types of devices which can be used in different simulation modes Device Type Will Function In Digital Only device Digital simulation mode only Analog Only device Analog s
206. eturn to Windows If there are unsaved changes you will be asked if you want to save them CHAPTER 10 Edit Menu R Normal cursor Paste cursor The commands in the Edit menu provide some of the tools necessary to construct and modify circuit diagrams Undo Many of CircuitMaker s editing commands can be undone Edit operations which can be undone are Cut Paste Delete and Move Only the most recent edit can be undone and many commands are not able to be undone including Run Single Step Reset Define New Macro Expand Macro and Delete Macro Cut Use Cut to remove all selected items and place them in the paste buffer and on the system clipboard Copy Use Copy to place all selected items in the paste buffer and on the system clipboard Paste The Paste option displays the contents of the paste buffer in the CircuitMaker workspace and the displayed items follow the mouse around the screen The cursor is replaced by the paste cursor indicating the top left corner of the paste area When the items are positioned at the desired location click the mouse to finalize the paste To cancel the paste press any key or double click the mouse Note You cannot use Paste to paste items from the system clipboard Move Use the Move option to perform both a Cut and a Paste This provides a quick way to move an entire circuit or portion of a circuit to a new position on the screen Connections to other portions of the circu
207. evel and strength values are set by the bit s value Bit Value State Level Strength 0 ZERO vol_param rol_param 1 ONE voh_param roh_param Notes Output pins can be specified by using the output pin name or by an integer variable that contains the index of an output pin Pin and variable names cannot be mixed in the same STATE_BIT statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names The maximum number of output pins vars is limited to 16 Example STATE_BIT Q1 02 Q03 Q4 internal_reg In this example if internal_reg 11 1011 binary then Q1 LSB ONE Q2 ONE Q3 ZERO and Q4 MSB ONE See Also REALS STATE LEVEL STRENGTH TABLE EXT_TABLE Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 371 CircuitMaker PRO only STEP_OFF Turns off the SimCode trace mode General Form STEP_OFF Use The STEP_OFF statement turns off the SimCode TRACE mode See Also STEP_ON STEP_ON Turns on the SimCode trace mode General Form STEP_ON Use The STEP_ON statement turns on the SimCode TRACE mode This causes the SimCode to display the Program Counter PC number and each SimCode instruction before it is executed See Also STEP_OFF 17 372 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only STRENGTH Sets the strength of the output state General Form 1 STRENGTH lt output gt lt output gt lt expression gt General Form 2 STRENGTH lt output gt lt output gt
208. evice from the selected classes If a device is removed from all classes it will be inserted in the User Defined major class To remove a device completely see Delete Macro below Expand Macro Use the Expand button in Expand Delete Macro group box to perform the same function explained earlier in this chapter To expand a macro device select the macro then click the Expand button Delete Macro Use the Delete button in the Expand Delete Macro group box to delete a macro device from the USER LIB file Warning You cannot open a circuit which uses a macro that has been deleted from the library unless you first create a new macro with the same name To delete a macro device follow these steps 1 Save the workspace if you need to save When the macro is deleted the workspace will be cleared 2 Makea backup of the USER LIB file before you create or delete macros in case something goes wrong and you want to restore the original library Chapter 11 Macros Menu 11 227 Note Most of the devices listed in the Macro Utilities dialog box are actually in the DEVICE LIB file and cannot be deleted 3 Select the macro 4 Click Delete Macro Model Data Use the Model Data button on the Macro Utilities dialog box to add new SPICE models to CircuitMaker s library This button displays a dialog box that lets you place new references into the linking file for selected symbol Refer to Model and Subcircuit Linking Files in Chapter 1
209. f which you can select and edit The currently selected subcircuit is highlighted in the list To select a different subcircuit click on it with the mouse then click Select or just double click it with the mouse Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 301 To edit or view an existing subcircuit 1 Click it with the mouse 2 Click Edit to display the dialog box in Figure 16 14 A HET OPTA 2 Ta 1 7 E CTE a 27 tate A Figure 16 14 Use this dialog box to edit or view an existing subcircuit This dialog box lists the subcircuit beginning with the description line and ending with the ENDS line Any changes you make to the subcircuit cause the modified subcircuit to replace the reference in the subcircuit linking file The original subcircuit remains unchanged in the library file but the reference to it will be lost Naming conventions for SUB files are discussed in Model and Subcircuit Linking Files later in this chapter Adding New Subcircuits to an Existing Symbol When you obtain new subcircuits from an outside source they are generally provided in a single ASCII library file Note If you edit this file with a word processor be sure to save the file in TEXT ONLY format Use the Model Data button in the Macro Utilities dialog box to create a link to each model in the new library file The following steps illustrate adding a new subcircuit to an existing symbol 16 302 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices Note
210. fica tacucecs cual ance trex sea enciesagectwusive ade 17 51 SELEGT VALUE ninan a a tilo callo ias 17 51 SETUPSHOLD ca a 17 52 SAP E E EEE A da adas 17 53 STATE BUM EEE E AA E E alicia 17 55 e EO a E A de EE E R E E A 17 56 STEP ON EE E E E E E E E 17 56 STRENGTA E A TEET EE AEE 17 57 SUPP MIN MA A 50 ona diia 17 58 AB tc OR EEE a ie 17 59 VA E AE I E EE a E act A AS E 17 60 VATRA A a EN PERGEN Tata AEE EE A AE 17 61 AvA A AN ra VAL B EEEE teas ois E dada E E 17 62 VOR VOR MN Cu a AE Sada aden aaa aiae 17 63 WHILE DO EEEE EE E A A E AE 17 64 VID H i NA Se ates SEE E lanes E EA N TEE EE 17 65 WIDT TIME e EE A EEEE E A E E E 17 66 Index Contents XX CHAPTER 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker Introduction Welcome to CircuitMaker the most powerful easy to use schematic capture and simulation tool in its class Thank you for joining thousands of users who have discovered that CircuitMaker provides the features of high end design software at a fraction of the cost Using CircuitMaker s advanced schematic capabilities you can design electronic circuits and output netlists for TraxMaker and other PCB design tools and autorouters You can also perform fast accurate simulations of digital analog and mixed analog digital circuits using CircuitMaker s Berkeley SPICE3f5 XSpice based simulator Required User Background With just a minimum of electronics theory you can success fully use CircuitMaker to design and simulate circuits For
211. file MODEL_PATH MYDEVICES SCB func MyDevice data MODEL PATH MYDEVICE DAT mntymx MYDEVICE DAT file 11 1 LE 5 MyDevice SimCode nlines READ_DATA int_array real_array This example opens a filed called MYDEVICE DAT in the Models directory It reads 2 columns of data from the file where the first column contains integer values and the second column contains real values If the arrays are declared as int_array 3 and real_array 5 then only the first 3 data lines will be read and nlines will be set to 3 REALS Declares real variables and arrays General Form REALS lt var gt lt var gt Parameters lt var gt name of the variable Use The REALS data type is used to define real variables and arrays Notes Real variables and arrays must begin with a letter and be defined before they are used Real arrays are defined by following the array name with a left bracket an integer number which defines the size of the array and a right bracket Real arrays can be set and or used in expres sions 17 364 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only The following are reserved SimCode real variables which do not need to be declared Variable Use Digital Model Parameter vil_param low input state value VIL value vih_param high input state value VIH value vol_param low output state value VOL value voh_param high output state value VOH value v3s_param tri state output
212. following a multiplier are ignored For example 10 10V 10Volts and 10Hz all represent the same number and M MA Msec and MMhos all represent the same multiplier Note that 1000 1000 0 1000Hz 1e3 1 0e3 1KHz and 1K all represent the same number Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Model M Inserts the Label Value into the SPICE data string If the first character of the Spice Prefix Character s does not match the first character in the label then it inserts the first character of the prefix at the beginning of the string The M is also required in order to guarantee that the MODEL data for this device will be included in the SPICE netlist file for simulation The Label including prefix may not exceed 8 characters Subcircuit S Inserts the Label Value into the SPICE data string If the first character in the label is not an X then it inserts an X at the beginning of the string The S is also required to ensure that the SUBCKT data for this device will be included in the SPICE netlist file for simulation The Label including the X may not exceed 8 characters Designation D Inserts the Designation label into the SPICE data string If the first character of the Spice Prefix Character s does not match the first character in the designation then it inserts the first character of the prefix at the beginning of the string Description l Inserts the Description field into the SPICE data string Package
213. for simulation Go through a step by step example to attach circuitry to a symbol thus making a functional macro device Working with SPICE Models Learn about the three basic types of components in SPICE selecting a SPICE model for simulation modifying SPICE models and Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 275 how to attach a new SPICE model to a device symbol Go through a step by step example to add a new SPICE model Creating New SPICE Models Using Parameter Passing Learn how to create a generic SPICE model which can be used to simulate any number of like components by passing parameters specific to each device into the generic model Editing Digital Model Parameters Learn about Digital Simcode devices their various parameters and how to modify them Creating Device Symbols You can create or modify device symbols in one or more of the following ways Drawing a symbol with the mouse Entering a description in the Element List Adding existing shapes Importing a Meta file Adding DIP LCC and QFP Packages To create a symbol for a new macro Macro Button 1 tA Clear the drawing area by clicking the New button on the Toolbar Click the Macro button on the Toolbar This is the same as choosing Macros gt New Macro Enter a unique name for the macro of 13 characters or less The Macro Name is used to identify the macro device in the library Specify how many of these parts would be found in a s
214. g devices in CircuitMaker If you have created devices of this type the symbol will not be available in CircuitMaker 6 or PRO the symbol will be replaced by a rectangle These symbols may be redrawn with the Symbol Editor Updating Model Libraries If you have added or modified any of the MOD SUB or LIB files from a previous version you must make these same additions or modifications to the files in the new Models directory Since many of these MOD SUB and LIB files in CircuitMaker 6 PRO contain new information added by MicroCode Engineering it is recommended that any changes you made previously be done manually don t just copy your old file over the top of the new one to avoid any possible loss of data If you have created any user defined symbols to which SPICE models have been linked you must remember that each of these user defined symbols has a corresponding MOD or SUB file Be sure to copy these files into the new Models directory If you have used CircuitMaker s automatic linking feature accessed throught the Model Data button in Macro Utilities dialog box to link a symbol to a user added SPICE model in a LIB file you must do one of two things 1 Reenter the information using the Macro Utilities dialog box just like before OR 2 Copy the linking information that was automatically placed in the MOD or SUB files into the new files This information would usually be located at the end of the MOD or SUB fi
215. g or upgrading CircuitMaker be sure to install in a different directory to avoid writing over some of your existing work If you are installing under Windows 3 1x you will be prompted to install the Win32s operating system extensions 6 Double click the CircuitMaker icon to launch the program 7 Ifyou are upgrading from an earlier version of CircuitMaker see the next section Updating from a Previous Version Installing the Hardware HW Keys Most copies of CircuitMaker sold internationally outside the US and Canada come with a Hardware HW key for copy protection If your copy includes a HW key this key must be attached to the parallel port of your computer in Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 22 order to run the software If you have any questions please call MicroCode Engineering Technical Support Updating from a Previous Version While upgrading from a previous version of CircuitMaker is a relatively painless process you should take care when converting custom macro libraries and simulating existing circuits When you load a pre 4 0 circuit file identified by the CIR extension it will automatically be converted to the newer ASCII file format which uses the CKT extension If you have not added components to the library simply follow the instructions above in Installing CircuitMaker The new version will be installed in a new directory and you can delete the previous directory If you have added new device
216. g solely to MicroCode Engineering Inc For units of the Department of Defense DOD this software is sold only with Restricted Rights as that term is defined in the DOD Supplement to the Federal Acquisition Regulations 52 227 7013 c 1 ii and Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013 Manufacturer MicroCode Engineering Inc 927 West Center Street Orem Utah 84057 If this software was acquired under a GSA Schedule the U S Government has agreed to refrain from changing or removing any insignia or lettering from the Software or the accompanying written materials that are provided or from producing copies of the manuals or disks except one copy for backup purposes and e Title to and ownership of this Software and documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with MicroCode Engineering Inc f Use of this Software and documentation shall be limited to the facility for which it is acquired and g If use of the Software is discontinued by the installation specified in the purchase delivery order and the U S Government desires to use it at another location it may do so by giving prior written notice to MicroCode Engineering Inc specifying the type of computer and new location site U S Governmental personnel using this Software other than under a DOD contract or GSA Schedul
217. ge the display settings of all selected devices Circuit Display Data This feature as seen in Figure 12 3 allows you to tempo rarily override the display settings of every device in the entire circuit The buttons at the top of each column will quickly change the settings for the entire column or you can change individual items by clicking on the radio buttons The Default setting tells CircuitMaker to use the Visible settings of each individual device Refer to Editing Devices in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Chapter 12 Options Menu Cecil Dirples Dada Figure 12 3 Use the Circuit Display Data dialog box to temporarily override the display settings of every device in the circuit Grid Use the Grid option to turn the alignment grid of the circuit window on or off see Figures 12 4 and 12 5 The grid is useful as an aid in precisely aligning objects Use Snap To Grid to place new devices devices not already in a circuit according to the specified grid It also lets you move old devices devices already in the circuit according to the selected grid relative to their original position Note When you place a device exactly on the grid it always remains on the grid regardless of scroll position However Snap To Grid does not guarantee alignment of component pins Figure 12 4 Use the Grid Setup dialog box to turn the alignment grid on or off Chapter 12 Options Menu 12 235 Grid Border Title Block
218. ge the font for free floating text fields or new text To change the font 1 Select the text by highlighting it 2 Choose Edit gt Font 3 Make the desired changes and choose OK Chapter 10 Edit Menu 10 221 10 222 Chapter 10 Edit Menu CHAPTER Il Macros Menu Using commands in the Macros menu you can expand CircuitMaker to meet your exact needs This chapter describes the options used to create edit and manipulate macros Refer to Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for a step by step tutorial about creating macro devices New Macro Select New Macro to create a new schematic symbol to add to the library If there is a circuit displayed CircuitMaker asks if you want that circuit included inside the macro for simulation Macros are saved in a disk file called USER LIB and once created are available for use in any circuit or in another macro device Edit Macro To edit a macro follow these steps 1 Expand the macro by highlighting it and choosing Macros gt Expand Macro Note When a macro is expanded the workspace will be cleared If necessary save your work beforehand 2 Click the expanded macro s symbol to select it 3 Choose Macros gt Edit Macro to edit its name device data or symbol You can also double click the expanded macro s symbol with the Arrow Tool If an existing macro is expanded and saved with a new name it is saved as a new macro and does not overwrite the existing macro The dialog
219. gnment grid of the circuit window on or off see Figures 4 1a and b The grid is useful as an aid in precisely aligning objects Use Snap To Grid to place new devices devices not already in a circuit accord ing to the specified grid It also lets you move old devices devices already in the circuit according to the selected grid relative to their original position Note When you place a device exactly on the grid it always remains on the grid regardless of scroll position However Snap To Grid does not guarantee alignment of component pins Choose Options gt Grid to access the Grid Setup dialog box Figure 4 1a Use the Grid Setup dialog box to turn the alignment grid on or off 4 70 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Grid i Cirat bl PEA Border Title Block Pai gt mat nee j WI wa uz eE Ev i g0v q0v a Weel tay i CREO RII Reno a q E E HE SEK 114004 El Tam TRADS 159004 15H an q e ot E he q a Pi Di E D ERZOA 104004 enhance the appearance of your schematic Title Block Use the Title Block option see Figure 4 1b for an example to add a title box to the lower right corner of the page The title block contains the following fields Name Title Revision ID Date and Page The Name and Title fields expand in height to handle multiple rows of text If you leave the Name or Title fields blank CircuitMaker excludes them from the title block The
220. gs of the selected multifunction signal generator For a complete description of the signal generator refer to Multifunction Signal Generator in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Edit Scope Probe Name This feature see Figure 10 7 lets you change the name of an existing SCOPE or Analysis Probe 1 Select the scope or probe by clicking it once then choose Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Scope Probe Name OR Double click the scope or probe with the Arrow Tool 2 Type anew name 3 Click Netlist to display the Edit Device Data dialog box Edit Scope Probe Name x Enter Name TP1 Netlist i i Cancel Figure 10 7 This dialog box lets you change the name of an existing SCOPE or Analysis Probe Group Items Use this option to specify the devices that are contained within the same package For example a 7400 Quad 2 Input NAND gate actually has 4 gates in the same package The pin numbers are different for each gate The individual gates are grouped together automatically as they are placed in the circuit You could regroup the gates using this feature Chapter 10 Edit Menu To group items 1 Select the items that you want to group in the same package 2 Choose Edit gt Group Item Font Choose Font Figure 10 8 to change the font attributes of any selected free floating text field or the default font for new text Bev WILE Epava ee nET El Figure 10 8 Use the Font dialog box to chan
221. hange P1 to I1 and then click Replace to replace the selected pin with the new pin Repeat for each remain ing pin naming them 12 I3 and I4 Compare your device with the one pictured in Figure 16 5 If there is a difference click Cancel and start over Click OK in the Symbol Editor dialog box Figure 16 5 This is what the new symbol should look like after completing the steps so far After you click OK the new symbol you created displays and follows the mouse around the work area Click the mouse to place the symbol in the workspace Double click the macro package Click Netlist Any data you enter in the Device Data dialog box at this time will be there every time you select this macro from the library menus Now is a good time to add the default Package Auto Designation Prefix Spice Prefix Character s and Spice Data if required Note For compatibility with TraxMaker the Package field must match the name of the corresponding component in TraxMaker If you are satisfied with your macro choose Macros gt Macro Utilities to display the Macro Utilities dialog box as pictured in Figure 16 6 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 22 To place the device in an existing Major or Minor Device Class click the appropriate items in the lists 23 To create a new Major or Minor Device Class type the Major or Minor Device Class name in the appropriate text edit fields 24 Finally click Save Macro Clicking Save Macro sa
222. hapter 12 Options Menu Show Node Numbers When checked the Show Node Numbers option will be activated by default The Show Node Numbers option will display the node number of every node in your circuit This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Show Node Numbers in Chapter 12 Options Menu Show Prop Delays When checked the Show Prop Delays option will be activated by default The Show Prop Delays option will display the propagation delays for all devices in the circuit This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Show Prop Delays in Chapter 12 Options Menu Auto Refresh When checked the Auto Refresh option will be activated by default The Auto Refresh option will automatically refresh the screen as you are editing the circuit This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Auto Refresh in Chapter 12 Options Menu Show Designation When checked the Show Designation option will be activated by default The Show Designation option will display the device designations for all devices in the circuit This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Device Designation in Chapter 12 Options Menu Grid The Grid options in the Preferences dialog box allow you to set default grid settings that will be used every time you open CircuitMaker These options include grid size along with view print and snap options This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Grid in Chapt
223. he keyboard The Devices menu lists all predefined HotKey assignments and you can reassign HotKeys to different devices as needed Assigning New HotKeys You can assign sixty of your most commonly used devices to HotKeys This lets you quickly select these devices by pressing the HotKey on the keyboard or by selecting the item from the HotKey sub menus on the Devices menus To assign a HotKey to a specific device 1 Inthe Device Selection dialog box Figure 4 2 display the device for which you want to assign a HotKey 2 Click Change to display the dialog box in Figure 4 3 HotKeys are listed alphabetically along with the devices that are currently assigned to them 3 Scroll through the list to find the HotKey that you want to assign to your selected device and then click the Assign button Figure 4 3 Use this dialog box to assign or reassign HotKeys to devices Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 75 Note The Device Search feature is not case sensitive Unassigning a HotKey To remove a HotKey assignment from the list 1 Follow Steps 1 3 from the previous section 2 Assign a new device in its place OR Assign none at the top of the list as the HotKey Searching for Devices Click the Device Search button on the Toolbar to display the Device Search dialog box Figure 4 4 which lets you find all devices that match the part number or description that you enter A match is found any time the search text
224. he mouse in the schematic background and choosing Zoom from the pop up menu Another zooming method is to press the Page Up key on the keyboard to zoom in or the Page Down key to zoom out at any time without using the Zoom Tool In this case the zoom is centered on the position of the mouse cursor See also Display Scale Normal Size Position and Fit Circuit to Window in Chapter 13 View amp Window Menus Rotate 90 Button Use the Rotate 90 Button to rotate the selected device in 90 increments You can also rotate a device as you select it from the library by pressing the r key on the keyboard or by clicking the Right mouse button before placing the device in the circuit You can also select the Rotate 90 Button by choosing Edit gt Rotate 90 or by pressing Alt R Note When you rotate a device pin names and numbers and label values remain readable that is they won t be upside down Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 69 Mirror Button K Use the Mirror Button to flip the device horizontally You can also mirror a device as you select it from the library by pressing the m key on the keyboard before placing the device in the circuit You can also select the Mirror Button by choosing Edit gt Mirror or by pressing Alt M Grid Title Block and Borders CircuitMaker gives you many advanced schematic features to enhance your schematic and make precise placement easier Grid Use the Grid option to turn the ali
225. he second wire Notice that they become the same wire To cut a single wire into two or more separate wires 1 Select the Delete Tool from the Toolbar 2 Place it over the point s where you want to cut the wire 3 Hold down the Shift key 4 Click the left mouse button to cut the wire The wire is divided into multiple wires Moving Devices with Connected Wires You can move a device that has wires connected to it without disturbing the connection When you select and drag a device with the Arrow Tool the wires undergo a rubberband effect meaning that they stretch extend but remain connected to the device Working with Bus Wires Bus wires are a special type of wire that contain multiple individual wires Each bus wire is identified by a number and each individual wire within a bus also has a number Bus wires can be easily identified in a circuit because they are drawn thicker than regular wires To draw a bus wire 1 Hold down the Shift key 2 Draw aregular wire using the manual routing method see Manual Routing earlier in this chapter Note You must hold down the Shift key before you start a wire but you can release the key before the wire is finished Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 83 4 84 After you draw the bus wire a dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 prompts you for a bus number Edit Bus Wire Number x Enter a number from 1 to 32767 Bus Wire Number 3 Cancel Figure 4 6 Each
226. her Setting these voltages will override any other power and ground voltages specified for the selected devices VOL amp VOH These two parameters will override the family defaults VIL amp VIH These two parameters will override the family defaults Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 315 WARN Flag When set to one 1 warning mes sages will be generated when there are timing or supply voltage viola tions on the device 16 316 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices CircuitMaker PRO only CHAPTER 17 Digital SimCode Digital SimCode provides the means for the electronics professional to create and or modify digital components which operate in Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Digital SimCode cannot be used to create components for Digital Logic Simulation The functionality of devices for Digital Logic Simulation is built in to CircuitMaker and you cannot add to it except by creating macro circuits Due to the complexity of digital devices it is generally not practical to simulate them using standard non event driven Spice instructions For this reason MicroCode Engineering has created a special descriptive language that allows digital devices to work in Analog Mixed Signal Simulation using and extended version of the event driven XSpice The digital devices included in the CircuitMaker library are modeled using the Digital SimCode language The Digital SimCode language does not provide the means to create digital devi
227. hich describe the networks or nets of component connections in an electronic circuit Widely used in electronics CAD packages netlists let you transfer design details between applications such as CircuitMaker and TraxMaker Netlists generally contain two types of information e Descriptions of the individual components e A list of all pin to pin connections PCB Netlists come in various formats but generally carry similar data They can often be translated into another format using a text editor The file extension NET is used for MicroCode Engineering netlist files As straightforward ASCII text files netlists are easily viewed created and modified using a simple text editor or word processor such as NotePad PCB Netlist Requirements To create a PCB netlist your circuit must meet the following requirements e Each device in the circuit must have a unique Designa tion that is D1 C3 etc e Each device must have a value or label that is 10k 2N2222A etc e Each device must have a Package type which should match one of the available Patterns in your PCB Layout program that is DIP14 AXIALO 4 etc Chapter 7 Exporting Files Pin numbers must be assigned for each device in the circuit Designators and Package Descriptions types are limited to 12 alphanumeric characters Net names can be 20 characters Pin numbers in netlists are limited to 4 alphanumeric characters No blank spaces may be
228. hift key while selecting variables Export CircuitMaker allows you to export a variety of files and formats including circuit and waveforms pcb and Spice netlists See Chapter 7 Exporting Files for a complete description of the exporting options Bill of Materials Formerly known as a Parts List a Bill of Materials is a file that contains information about how many and which kinds of parts are used in your circuit You can export a Bill of Materials to a text file See Exporting a Bill of Materials in Chapter 7 Exporting Files for more information Print Setup The File gt Print Setup option allows you to scale the output to the printer 10 to 1000 and choose between black and white or color You can also select the desired printer and page orientation by clicking the Printer button Chapter 9 File Menu 9 203 9 204 Chapter 9 File Menu Figure 9 1 The Print Setup dialog box lets you scale the output and set other printing options Fit to Page Use the Fit to Page option on the Print Setup dialog box to scale the schematic automatically so that the entire sche matic fits on a single printed page Print Circuit Choose File gt Print Circuit to print the current circuit or to save it to a print file A Printer dialog box appears allowing you to select the desired output If the circuit is too large to fitonto a single page it will automatically be divided into page size blocks as it is printed see Show Page
229. his dialog box to set the parameters of the piecewise linear waveform Piecewise linear data must come from one of two sources e You can describe the waveform with a set of up to 8 points that you enter directly into this dialog box The time specified for each successive point must be more positive than its predecessor If it is not the cycle will end excluding that and all successive points e You can define the waveform in an ASCII text file containing an indefinite number of points Values must be entered in pairs and each pair must include a time position followed by an amplitude The first character of each data line must be a plus sign and each line may contain up to a maximum of 255 characters Values must be separated by one or more spaces or tabs Values may be entered in either scientific or engineering notation Comments may be added to the file by making the first character of the line an asterisk For example Random Noise Data 0 00000e 3 0 6667 0 0078le 3 0 6372 0 01563e 3 0 1177 0 02344e 3 0 6058 0 03125e 3 0 2386 0 03906e 3 1 1258 0 04688e 3 1 6164 0 05469e 3 0 3136 0 06250e 3 1 0934 0 07031e 3 0 1087 0 07813e 3 0 1990 0 08594e 3 1 1168 0 09375e 3 1 4890 0 10156e 3 0 2169 0 10938e 3 1 4915 0 11719e 3 1 4914 0 12500e 3 0 1486 Intermediate points are determined by linear interpolation If Max Amp is specified in the dialog box the data in the file will be scaled vertically so that the
230. his order to match the syntax for the optoisolator subcircuits Expand the new macro symbol 1f it is not already expanded by clicking on it once with the left mouse button then click on the Macro button in the Toolbar Double click the device symbol and click Netlist Enter the following information in the Edit Device Data dialog box of the expanded macro to set the defaults for this macro device Auto Designation Prefix OP Spice Prefix Character s X Spice Data field SD 1 2 3 4 S Click OK then choose Macros gt Save Macro Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 305 6 Follow the instructions in Adding New Subcircuits to an Existing Symbol earlier in this chapter Model and Subcircuit Linking Files Model and Subcircuit data is stored in ASCII text files typically with the LIB extension You can edit these files directly with any ASCU text editor Each analog device symbol in CircuitMaker has a linking file associated with it In order to use SPICE models in CircuitMaker you must link the models to a corresponding device symbol by placing a reference to the model in the linking file To create a new link or to modify an existing link 1 Select Macros gt Macro Utilities 2 Select the symbol that you want to use for the specific model or subcircuit you are adding 3 Click Model Data to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 16 15 Figure 16 15 Use this dialog box to add modify and remove linking
231. i Siina eeka anauen 2 2 About CircuitMaker WiNdOWS ccccccccseseeceecneeeseceeeeeceeeseeaecaesaesaeseecateeeeeesaeeates 2 2 Anatomy of a Schematic Drawing cccccsccccesecseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeesecseeseeeeseeeeeeeaeenees 2 3 CircuitMaker Conventions svivicariainnicni ananena 2 3 CircuitMaker Files rignsirssinredidessahcatenuiiaSestercnudisdaettu cde flinch used iioias 2 3 Accessing Tools and Features ccccccceeeeeeeeencceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 TS OVSMIEN sueter iia 2 4 Using the Told nadaa 2 4 Using the MISS iia ai il 2 6 HotKey Soriana ine a a aa a E e aE EEE EEE 2 7 Shortcut Wi ds 2 7 Contents vii CircuitMaker Preferences ccccccccececceccecceeeeceecececueceeccseccueeateeseeeeeees 2 8 Changing Preferences uranio older dede 2 8 Restoring Factory Defaults cccccsccceseeseeseesecseeseeeecsecseeeeeecseeseecaeceesatsaeeaeeas 2 8 Basic CKT File Management scccicscntceninesiexenttacecncdveknontvedtmaninesenesceeouncien 2 9 Starting Saving amp Closing a CKT File cscsccecsssscsssssesseseesersseesessaesaesensersas 2 9 Opening and Reopening a CKT File cccececcceseeecsseseeeececeeeeeeaeeaeseesateeseeeeaeeees 2 10 Reverting to Previously Saved File ooooconnnnicncncnccocnocnoonocnconconnonnno noo nnonnnnnnno 2 10 Chapter 3 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Drawing a Schematic oooocccccccoccccccnconanancncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnos 3 1 Using the Device Selection Dialog BOX
232. iables cannot be mixed in the same DELAY statement References to outputs must be either all pin names or all variable names Examples DELAY Q1 02 Q3 04 10n DELAY Q ON CASE TRAN_LH tplh_val CASE TRAN_HL tphl_val END data E0_1 amp amp CHANGED DO CHANGED D1 5 DELAY Q1 Q0 CASE data amp amp TRAN_LH tplh_D_O CASE data amp amp TRAN_HL tphl_D_O CASE TRAN_LH tplh_E_Q CASE TRAN_HL tphl_E_Q END In this example if data is nonzero and Q1 is changing from High to Low the tphl_D_Q delay will be posted for Q1 Then if QO is changing from Low to High the tplh_D_Q delay will be posted for QO Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 333 CircuitMaker PRO only DRIVE Declares drive characteristics of output pins General Form DRIVE lt output gt lt output gt vO0 lt value gt vl lt value gt ttlh lt value gt tthl lt value gt Parameters lt output gt Name of or variable index to the output pin lt value gt Real value or variable vO VOL for the output pin vl VOH for the output pin ttlh Low to high transition time for the output pin tthl High to low transition time for the output pin Use The DRIVE command is used to declare the output pin s DRIVE characteristics When the output is set to a LOW state the output pin is connected to voltage value v0 through resistance rol_param When the output is set to a HIGH state the output pin is connected
233. ice Auto Designation Prefix D Spice Prefix Character s D Spice Data field 2 ole D ae 1 ol A M Save the macro see Save Macro in Chapter 11 Macros Menu for more information 16 300 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 7 Follow the instructions in Adding New Subcircuits to an Existing Symbol later in this chapter Editing SPICE Subcircuits SPICE subcircuits fall into three basic categories Component models e Macromodels e Equivalent circuits A component model is basically a complete schematic of the chip simulated using discrete components This type of subcircuit is generally more accurate than a macromodel but requires more time to simulate The macromodel is more of a block diagram of the chip where inputs and outputs may be simulated using discrete components but the internal workings consist of simpler items such as gain blocks etc This type of subcircuit simulates rather quickly and in most cases is accurate enough that a component model is not needed Equivalent circuits may be needed to simulate discrete devices that have no SPICE model For example an SCR can be roughly equated to a pair of NPN and PNP transistors coupled together When you double click a device that has subcircuits in the library the dialog box pictured in Figure 16 13 appears L porer r 5 IT te Lome ict Helge Peete tae LIT AN aL A n mea 15746 Figure 16 13 This device is made up of many subcircuits any o
234. ik ie mu pod m 5 1 A A Figure 16 12 Use the Diode Model Parameters dialog box to change the settings of a particular model The model parameters displayed are SPICE model param eters not data book parameters Unless you are familiar with SPICE modeling it is recommended that you do not modify the existing SPICE models The values listed for each parameter represent values defined for that specific device type Default SPICE model parameter values are indicated by an asterisk after the value To change the value of a SPICE parameter 1 Click the name of the SPICE parameter This selects the parameter and copies the parameter s value into the Value edit box 2 Change the data in the Value box and click the Enter button If you want to set a specific parameter to equal that of the DEFAULT model type an asterisk in the Value edit field and press Enter 3 Click OK to save the model OR To save it under a new name type the new name into the Name field and then click OK Note Models created or modified in this manner are stored directly in the MOD linking file in place of the model reference Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 297 Note Normally you must copy the lib file that con tains the MODEL or SUBCKT data to the CircuitMaker Models directory For this 2N5209 example the MCEBJT LIB file is already in the Models directory The original LIB file remains unchanged When viewed in th
235. imulation gt Display Waveforms or press F12 Waveforms are described in detail later in this chapter Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 105 Propagation Delays The delay of a device determines how many simulation ticks it takes for a signal to propagate from the input to the output of the device The default delay for all devices is 1 but you can change this to any value from 1 to 14 You determine the real time value of each tick The concept is that if one device has a delay of one and another a delay of three then in the real world the second device would have a propagation delay three times larger than the first device To change the delay of one or more devices 1 Select the device s 2 Select the Edit gt Set Prop Delays to display the dialog box shown in Figure 5 2 3 Enter a new value for the delay and choose OK Edit Delay Figure 5 2 Use this dialog box to change the propaga tion delay of one or more devices Choose Options gt Show Prop Delays to display the propa gation delay of all devices in the circuit The delay values are shown within a rounded rectangle located near the center of each device Some devices Pulsers Logic Dis plays macro devices etc do not have a delay so no value will be shown In the case of macro devices the delay is determined by the individual delay setting of each device within the macro 5 106 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Digital Waveforms By attaching SCO
236. imulation mode only Analog Digital device Analog or Digital mode Schematic Symbol only No functionality So any Digital Only and Analog Digital devices will function properly in the Digital mode To find out the intended simulation mode for a device read the words above the symbol pictured in the Device Selection dialog box Or refer to the Device Library book for a description of each device and the simulation mode for which it is intended If you attempt to simulate a device using a simulation mode for which the device is not intended CircuitMaker displays a warning message and that device is ignored producing an open circuit where that device is located Using the Digital Logic Simulator Digital simulation is completely interactive meaning that the circuit responds immediately to changes from input stimulus and the operation of the circuit is shown in real time as it happens on the screen You can observe the operation of the circuit in the following ways e Enable CircuitMaker s exclusive Trace feature to show the state of every node in the circuit simultaneously as the simulation runs In this mode wires at a logic one are shown as red wires at a logic zero as blue and wires at an unknown or tristate as green these colors may be changed by choosing View gt Colors Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation TPL Digital Simulation icon olig ehe Connect any number of SCOPE probes to any nodes in the circuit so tha
237. imulation time Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 121 Test Point Types There three types of Test Points used in CircuitMaker Test Point Type How Used Default Test Points CircuitMaker automatically places Default Test Points in the circuit according to the Analog Options settings These are not displayed on the circuit Exclusive Test Points These are test points you place in the circuit to measure voltage current or power When placed exclusive test points disable the default test points and data is only collected for each exclusive test point Run Time Test Points These are test points you place in the circuit to graph data at a specific point Default Test Points CircuitMaker automatically places Default Test Points in the circuit allowing you to click with the Probe Tool on almost any wire pin or device to measure voltage current or power respectively The Default Test Points are set based on the Analog Options settings See Setting Up Analog Analyses later in this chapter for more information When you place Exclusive Test Points the Default Test Points are automatically disabled and data is only collected for the points that you define Note that Default Test Points are not displayed on the circuit Exclusive Test Points These are test points you place manually in the circuit to measure voltage current or power When placed exclusive test points disable the default test points and data is only
238. inearized small signal models for all of the nonlinear devices in the circuit It does not take into account the existence of any AC source Operating Point Analysis is generally performed automati cally before each of the other analyses even if it has been disabled in the Analog Analyses dialog box However you must enable it if you want to use the Probe Tool as a multimeter to view the DC DC AVG or AC RMS values of current voltage or power Viewing the DC AVG or AC RMS values also requires that you enable Transient Analysis See Probe Tool earlier in this chapter Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation To set up and run DC Operating Point Analysis 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click the Multimeter button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 13 Multimeter Setup Figure 6 13 Use this dialog box to set up DC Operat ing Point Analysis Select DC Operating Point Select Enabled and choose OK Run the simulation A nan Ra u Click the Probe Tool on the point of the circuit where you want to analyze the DC operating point see Figure 6 12 Transient Analysis A Transient Analysis generates output like that of an oscilloscope computing the transient output variables voltage or current as a function of time over the user specified time interval A Transient Analysis first performs an Operating Point Analysis to determine the DC bias of the circuit always beginning at time zero In
239. information Initially only the center list box will have anything in it This is a list of the devices in the linking file associated with 16 306 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices the selected symbol Click one of the models to select it and the the description package and pinout information appears To modify this information 1 Select the name of the model or subcircuit you want to delete 2 Type in the desired changes 3 Click Modify To remove a reference from the linking file 1 Select the name of the model or subcircuit you want to delete 2 Click Delete To add new references to the linking file 1 Click Open and open the library file in which the actual model or subcircuit resides All of the model and subcircuit names found in this library will be displayed in the list box on the left If desired the list can be limited to only those devices which are compatible with the selected device symbol 2 Enter appropriate description package and pin informa tion for the model Tf there are multiple parts per package be sure to enter pin numbers for each of PART A PART B etc If the model is similar to another part that is already in the linking file it may be simpler to first select the similar part to fill in the blanks make any necessary correc tions then select the new model by changing the Show Model Type 3 Click Add to include the new reference The names of the linking files correspond to the devi
240. ingle IC package 16 276 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices Note The same symbol is used for each device in the package 5 Click OK to display the Symbol Editor Figure 16 1 Figure 16 1 Use the Symbol Editor to create or modify schematic symbols Think of the Symbol Editor as a drawing program The following sections describe the use of the Symbol Editor options Using Symbol Editor Display Controls Once you have placed a device symbol in the View window use the Symbol Editor options to control the view of the symbol You can click and drag device designations at any time to position them where you want Control What it Does Redraw Refreshes the picture Grid Displays or hides the currently defined grid in the View window We recommend a 9 point spacing for pin placement Note The Symbol Editor does not use the Snap To Grid feature See Chapter 12 Options Menu about grid setup and Chapter 13 View and Window Menus for information about changing the grid color Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 277 Symbol Name Displays or hides the device s symbol name Pin Names Displays or hides the device s pin names Pin Designations Displays or hides the device s pin designations View Zoom in or out from 25 800 to better view the device while you are working on it Trace Step through the Element List high lighting each element one at a time beginning with the currently selected element Sele
241. ion gt Digital Setup feature see Figure 5 1 to control the size of a step When you click this tool the simulation runs for one step and then stops This command is handy for debugging a circuit especially when used in conjunction with the Trace button Figure 5 1 Use the Digital Options dialog box to specify the size of a step and other digital simulation options Run Stop Button 2 Click the Run button to start the simulation The icon will change to a Stop Sign Click the Stop Sign icon to stop the simulation You can also choose Simulation gt Run and Stop or press F10 When the simulation is running you can t perform edit operations such as move and delete if you try CircuitMaker will signal a warning beep You can flip switches with the Arrow or Probe Tool and view or toggle the state of a wire with the Probe Tool Probe Tool Use the Probe Tool to monitor the state of any node in the circuit or to inject a state into a node You can also activate the Probe Tool by pressing Alt P or right clicking the mouse and choosing Probe from the pop up menu To see the state of a node either while the simulation is running or after it has stopped touch the Probe Tool s tip on a wire or device pin The tool displays one of four messages H L P or no letter at all The meanings of these letters are 5 104 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation je YY High State Low State Pulse between High and Low States
242. ion options for new devices you place in the schematic Compare the Device Designations feature with the Set Designations feature which renumbers the designations of already placed devices To change device designation options 1 Choose Options gt Device Designations 2 Select Show Designation For New Devices to show the designation for all new devices that you place 3 Type anumber in the Starting Designation Number text box The devices that you place hereafter use the number you specified as the starting number or the next available number after the specified starting number For example if the starting number is 10 and the schematic contains resistors R10 R11 and R12 then the next resistor placed would be assigned the designation R13 Arrow Wire This option when checked allows you to initiate a wire by clicking once on a device pin with the Arrow Tool You can only use the Arrow Tool to initiate a wire on a device pin or to extend an existing wire You cannot initiate a wire from the middle of another wire using the Arrow Tool as you can with the Wire Tool This option can be used for both auto and manual routing Cursor Tools This submenu provides an alternate method of selecting the Atrow Wire Text Delete Zoom Probe and Help Tools Chapter 12 Options Menu Show Pin Dots This option allows you to control how connections between wires and devices are drawn If Show Pin Dots is checked connections bet
243. ion delay Sets scale factor used to determine maximum propagation delay when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 1 5 150 of typical propagation delay Sets scale factor used to determine minimum transition time when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 0 5 50 of typical transition time Sets scale factor used to determine maximum transition time when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 1 5 150 of typical transition time Sets scale factor used to determine minimum input loading maximum input resistance when actual value is not specified in SimCode model LOADMXS DRIVEMNS DRIVEMXS CURRENTMNS CURRENTMXS TPMNTYMX TIMNTYMX Default 1 5 150 of typical input resistance Sets scale factor used to determine maximum input loading minimum input resistance when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 0 5 50 of typical input resistance Sets scale factor used to determine minimum output drive capacity maximum output resistance when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 1 5 150 of typical output resistance Sets scale factor used to determine maximum output drive capacity minimum output resistance when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 0 5 50 of typical output resistance Sets scale factor used to determine minimum supply current maximum internal resistance when ac
244. ion such as iteration limits temperature etc To change the value of a SPICE option variable 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup gt Analog Options to display the Analog Options Spice Variables dialog box pictured in Figure 15 1 2 Selecta variable and type the new value into the Option Value edit field 3 If you want to set a specific option to its default value type an asterisk in the Value edit field Iplenn E Figure 15 1 This dialog box lists the SPICE option variables which you can change An asterisk in the dialog box denotes default values for each option Following is a list of the options and their effect on the simulation See Setting Up Analog SPICE Variables in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation for informa tion about the other option in the Analog Options Spice Variables dialog box Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 249 15 250 Option ABSTOL CHGTOL DEFAD DEFAS DEFL DEFW GMIN Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics What it Does Sets the absolute current error tolerance of the program Set ABSTOL RELTOL lowest current magnitude in the circuit Default 1 picoamp Provides a lower limit on capacitor charge or inductor flux used in the LTE timestep control algorithm Default 1 0e 14 coulombs Sets the MOS drain diffusion area Default 0 0 meters Sets the MOS source diffusion area Default 0 0 meters Sets the MOS channel length Default 100 0
245. iption and shape are also selected and highlighted which lets you easily move or delete elements that you have placed After you have placed an element the selected Element Type does not change until you select a new Element Type or click on a text line in the Element List Selecting Shapes To select single shapes 1 Choose the Select Move option in the Element Type group box Click the shape in the view window OR Click the description in the Element List To select multiple shapes 1 Select the Select Move option in the Element Type group box Drag a selection rectangle around the desired element shape in the view window OR Click and drag the cursor in the Element List OR Hold down the Shift key while clicking individual element shapes in the view window or element descrip tions in the Element List Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 279 To delete elements 1 Select the elements you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button To move elements 1 Select the Select Move option in the Element Type group box 2 Drag the element shape with the mouse while holding down the Left mouse button OR If you have selected multiple elements drag one of the elements with the mouse while holding down the Left mouse button To resize elements 1 Select the Resize option in the Element Type group box 2 Drag the end of a line the corner of a rectangle the side of a rounded rectangle or the side of
246. ir original factory default settings Device Plot Font This option lets you specify the default font used in CircuitMaker This font is used on all device labels wire labels pin names key caps ASCII displays and plot windows Default Font Button This button sets CircuitMaker s default font to its factory default which is Courier New This is a TrueType scalable rotatable monospaced font that comes with the Windows operating system Chapter 9 File Menu 9 205 9 206 Chapter 9 File Menu Auto Repeat When checked the Auto Repeat option will be activated by default Auto Repeat lets you repeatedly place a device until you either double click or press any key This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Auto Repeat in Chapter 12 Options Menu Arrow Wire Tool When checked the Arrow Wire Tool options is activated by default The Arrow Wire Tool allows you to initiate a wire by clicking on a device pin with the Arrow Tool This options is also accessible from the Options Menu See Arrow Wire in Chapter 12 Options Menu Single Click Connect Use this option to manually route wires When Single Click 1s enabled you can terminate a wire by a single mouse click on any valid connection point You can still terminate a wire at any location with a double click even if the end of the wire is not at a valid connection point When the Single Click option is disabled you must double click to end the wire This
247. ircuit by changing the Display Scale and scroll bar positions so that the entire circuit can be displayed within the circuit window Refresh Screen Choose Refresh Screen to redraw the entire circuit Redraw ing may be desirable following a command or operation which causes parts of the screen to become messy Also see Auto Refresh in Chapter 12 Options Menu The Window Menu Cascade Windows This command will arrange all open windows in a cascaded stacked order Tile Windows This command will arrange all open windows in a tiled adjacent order Window Each window that is open or can be opened with the available simulation data is listed in this menu Selecting a window from this menu will open it and bring it to the front Chapter 13 View and Window Menus 13 241 13 242 Chapter 13 View and Window Menus CHAPTER 14 Simulation Menu The Simulation menu contains options that let you choose a simulation type and different kinds of analyses Digital Analog Mode This works just like the Digital Analog button on the Toolbar which is described in the simulation chapters 5 amp 6 The name that is displayed in the menu is the simulation mode that is currently selected Analyses Setup Use the Analyses Setup dialog box to setup the SPICE analyses you want to perform as well as simulation options such as temperature tolerances etc For more information see Analyses Setup and Analog Options in Chapter 6 Anal
248. ircuit to load into the work area The file extension used by default is CKT Circuit files created with older versions of CircuitMaker have the CIR extension To open these files select the CIR file type As these files are opened they will be converted to the new ASCII format and should be saved with the CKT extension Reopen Use the Reopen command to quickly reopen any of the last 8 circuits that you have used If changes have been made to the current circuit you will be asked if you want to save the circuit before closing Merge The Merge option lets you to add a circuit saved on disk to the circuit in the work area This command is useful because it lets you save commonly used circuits or portions of circuits to disk then reuse them as often as you need without having to rebuild them from scratch each time Chapter 9 File Menu 9 201 9 202 Chapter 9 File Menu Select Merge and choose the circuit to be added to the work area The circuit will be placed starting at the top left corner of the screen so be sure to position the work area and existing circuit accordingly Close Use Close to close the open windows If changes have been made to the current circuit you will be asked if you want to save the circuit before closing Save Choose Save to save the current circuit in the work area to disk using the name shown in the Title Bar When you save a circuit whose title is UNTITLED CKT a file selector dialog box app
249. ircuitMaker comes with two manuals a User Manual anda Device Library Guide This User Manual has been designed to guide you through CircuitMaker s many features and simplify the retrieval of specific information once you have a working knowledge of the product The separate Device Library Guide outlines the symbols and device models that are included with CircuitMaker The manual assumes that you are familiar with the Windows desktop 3 1x 95 and NT and its use of icons menus windows and the mouse It also assumes a basic under standing about how Windows manages applications programs and utilities and documents data files to perform routine tasks such as starting applications opening documents and saving your work Manual Conventions The following conventions are used to identify information needed to perform CircuitMaker tasks Note that this manual contains information for both CircuitMaker Version 6 and CircuitMaker PRO Those features described in this manual which are only available in CircuitMaker PRO are highlighted by the banner at the left Step by step instructions for performing an operation are generally numbered as in the following examples 1 Choose File gt Save This means choose the File menu then choose Save 2 Select the Arrow Tool on the Toolbar Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 29 Menu names menu commands and Toolbar options usually appear in bold type as are text strings to be typed
250. ircuitMaker with a wide variety of other schematic capture simulation and printed circuit board layout pro grams CircuitMaker works seamlessly with TraxMaker meaning that you can export to the TraxMaker PCB netlist format and also configure and launch TraxMaker directly from CircuitMaker This chapter defines the different types of output files and provides step by step procedures for them Bill of Materials Formerly known as a Parts List a Bill of Materials is a file that contains information about how many and which kinds of parts are used in your circuit You can export a Bill of Materials to a text file Chapter 7 Exporting Files 7 175 7 176 To access the Bill of Materials feature 1 Choose File gt Bill of Materials to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 7 1 2 See the following sections for more information You can save a Bill of Materials in one of two formats Single Item per line or Multiple items per line Bll of ates r y Poch age i ahn ORO ER PAO BOM DAT fa Fie Sw tores Figure 7 1 You can save display or print a Bill of Materi als in one of two formats Single Item Per Line This format puts each component on a separate line in the Bill of Materials Items are listed in order according to the device designation The columns are tab delimited This format can easily be loaded into a spreadsheet and then sorted and arranged to your liking The following is an example of
251. is for digital component symbols that do not have external power and ground pins Q is the Spice prefix character for the specific device type XXXXXXXX is the model name and Filenam lib is the name of the library file in which the model or subcircuit actually resides There should be an appropriate description of the device on the line immediately before each PARAM line This line will be displayed as the description in the Model or Subcircuit Selections dialog box The first character of this description line must be an asterisk When you double Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 309 click a device to select a model subcircuits that are found in the MOD file will also be displayed but the first character in the description will appear as an x instead of a p You should also include appropriate package and pin information at the end of the description line This information is required when creating a PCB netlist for TraxMaker The package name represents the component name that is to be used in TraxMaker The pin information indicates the pinout of the device in the package For example 500mW 40V 800mA pkg TO 18 3 2 1 PARAM Q2N2222A File Mcebjts lib Note that the pin order is specified as 3 2 1 SPICE defines the pin order of a BJT as collector base emitter see Bipolar Junction Transistors BJTs in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation In a TO 18 package containing a 2N2222A transistor the emitter is
252. it are lost Chapter 10 Edit Menu 10 211 10 212 Delete Items This feature removes all selected items from the workspace Duplicate Choose Duplicate to make a copy of all selected items When this command is selected the duplicated items follow the mouse around the screen The cursor is replaced by the paste cursor indicating the top left corner of the paste area When the items are positioned at the desired location click the mouse to finalize the duplication To cancel the duplica tion press any key or double click the mouse Copy Circuit to Clipboard Choose Copy to Clipboard gt Circuit to copy the entire circuit to the system clipboard in one of three formats e Windows Metafile Device Independent Bitmap Device Dependent Bitmap Choose File gt Export gt Options to select the desired format This feature enables you to later paste the contents of the clipboard into a graphics program for further manipulation printout etc When this command has been executed an alert box appears informing you that the circuit has been copied to the clipboard Note You cannot paste items into the CircuitMaker workspace that were copied using this command It is designed only to copy the circuit to the system clipboard Copy Waveforms to Clipboard Use Edit gt Copy to Clipboard gt Copy Waveforms to copy the contents of the Waveforms window to the system clipboard in one of three formats e Windows Metafile Device I
253. l Generator The sine wave appears on the scope 6 Hold down the Shift key and click the wire connected between the two resistors A second waveform appears on the scope 7 Stop the simulation Tutorial 4 More Circuit Simulation The next example demonstrates how to use all of the analyses and how to take simple measurements using the cursors in the analysis windows Let s create a basic 10X amplifier circuit using a A741 Op Amp in this configuration voltage gain RF RI 1 Choose File gt New 2 Make sure that Analog simulation mode is selected 3 Draw the circuit as shown in Figure 3 9 using the following devices 1 Signal Gen Analog Instruments g for Vin on the schematic e 2 V devices Analog Power 1 for Vcc and Vee e 2 Grounds Analog Power 0 zero e 3 Resistors Passive Components Resistors r for RI RF and RL e 10p Amp Linear ICs OPAMPs for U1 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 55 3 56 Chapter 3 Tutorials 10 1 12 13 14 Vin 100m 100n RI 10k 10kHz Figure 3 9 A 10X Amplifier Circuit Select the Rotate 90 button on the Toolbar which lets you rotate devices in 90 increments Using the Rotate 90 button rotate RL and the 12V supply Use the Wire Tool to wire the circuit together Use the Arrow Tool to drag the devices wires and labels to make the circuit look clean Select the Arrow Tool and double click the Op Amp Select UA741 from the list of available s
254. l generator for example would be excluded from the PCB netlist Exclude From Bill of Materials Use this check box to exclude a device from the Bill of Materials See Exporting a Bill of Materials in Chapter 7 Exporting Files for more information on generating a Bill of Materials Pins Click the Pins button on the Edit Device Data dialog box to display the dialog box shown in Figure 4 9 This dialog box lets you edit the pin designations of the package for the selected device and determine whether the pin designations will be shown on the schematic Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 97 4 98 You can specify pin numbers using up to five alphanumeric characters Not only can you use standard pin numbers such as 1 2 3 but you can also use pin numbers such as Al B1 Cl A2 B2 C2 Some device packages actually contain more than one of the same device For example a 7400 Quad 2 Input NAND gate actually has 4 gates in the same package The pin numbers are different for each gate CircuitMaker groups together the individual gates to indicate which gates go in which package As you place each gate in the circuit the next available gate is used from the previous package If no gates are available in the previous package a new package is used You can regroup the gates as needed using the Edit gt Group Items option Each gate in the package is assigned a letter A B C etc and the pin numbers for that gate correspond t
255. l has already been drawn Second if you want to use the component in Digital Logic Simulation mode the existing symbol will work New symbols that you create will not work in Digital mode unless they contain internal macro circuitry This internal macro circuitry would disable the Digital SimCode model in Analog mode 2 Create a MOD file to be used with the symbol The MOD file name must match the name of the symbol see Model and Subcircuit Linking Files in Chapter 16 Creating New Devices If you are using an existing symbol you must use the existing MOD file as well Just add the new model information see below into the existing MOD file Each Digital SimCode model declaration in a MOD file has two lines Line 1 is a comment line which contains information used by CircuitMaker Line 2 contains the model information that is used by WXSpice during simulation This example is followed by a brief descrip tion of each item Counter type digital pkg DIP14 DVCC 5 DGND 10 6 7 2 3 14 1 11 8 9 12 MODEL A74LS90 xsimcode file MODEL_PATH LS SCB func 1s90 mntymx 17 318 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode Line 1 Counter type digital pkg DIP14 CircuitMaker PRO only What it Does Describes the device Sets the device s Parameters field Sets the device s Package field DVCC 5 DGND 10 Sets device s Bus Data field required 6 7 2 3 14 Line 2 MODEL ATALS9O xsimcode file func data
256. le V3D 3 4 DC OV measures controlling current SD 1 2 VSD V voltage source N and N are the positive and negative nodes respectively VNAM is the name of a voltage source through which the controlling current flows The direction of positive controlling current flow is from the positive node through the source to the negative node of VNAM VALUE is the transresistance in ohms Note You cannot place voltage sources directly in parallel for SPICE simulation See Also E gt V Source Example circuit 741 CKT Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Nonlinear Dependent Sources General Form BXXXXXXX N N lt I EXPR gt lt V EXPR gt Netlist Examples BSO1 0 1 I COS V 1 SIN V 2 BVS1 0 1 V LN COS LOG V 1 2 2 3 4 V 2 V 1 Spice Data Example SD 1 2 V L N is the positive node N is the negative node The values of the V and I parameters determine the voltages and currents across and through the device respectively If I is given then the device is a current source If V is given the device is a voltage source One and only one of these parameters must be specified for each source The expressions given for V and I may be any function of voltages and currents through voltages sources in the system e g V 2 indicates the DC voltage at node 2 referenced to ground V 3 4 indicates the voltage difference between nodes 3 and 4 and I VS2 indicates the DC current through the voltage supply VS2 The
257. le that corresponds to the symbol Updating Pre 5 0 Digital Circuits for Analog Simulation Digital circuits created in pre 5 0 versions of CircuitMaker will still run in Digital Logic Simulation mode However if you want to run them in Analog Simulation mode you should be aware of the following Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 25 e Analog is not a free running simulation mode Analog simulations require proper use of Vcc and Ground connections to digital devices e Analog simulations require designations of all devices e The digital devices saved in old circuits do not contain SPICE data for simulation These must be replaced by new digital SimCode devices To do this delete the existing devices and replace them with new devices from the current library e The Pulser is a digital only device It must be replaced by a Data Sequencer or a Signal Generator e Devices which are animated in Digital Logic Simulation mode are not animated in Analog Simulation mode Multi User Project Installations You can configure CircuitMaker to support Projects for multiple users each user having access to separate libraries and preferences Project installations are possible whether on a network or on a stand alone system Each user must be assigned a separate directory from which the CircuitMaker preferences libraries and circuit files can be accessed This same method may be used by a single user who needs to access multipl
258. led and Enable Secondary options in the DC Analysis Setup dialog box When you are finished entering the following settings into the appropriate fields choose OK Primary Secondary Source Name Vin Vec Start 15V 10V Stop 7V 14V Step 001V 1V This setup lets you sweep the voltage of Vin over the specified range at each of 5 different Vcc levels 9 Click the AC button 10 Select the Enabled option in the AC Analysis Setup dialog box and enter the following settings into the appropriate fields Start Frequency 1Hz Stop Frequency 1MegHz Test Points 10 Sweep Decade This setup lets you plot the frequency response of the circuit Click OK to save the settings Click Exit to return to the circuit 11 Select File gt Save As and save the circuit as MYAMP CKT analyses setups are saved with the circuit Running the Simulation When you run the simulation an interactive XSpice window appears showing the progress of the simulation By placing Run Time Test Points in your circuit beforehand you can monitor the results as XSpice collects the data for more information about Test Points see Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation If you don t place any Run Time Test Points you will see only a bar graph showing the progress of the simulation The amount of time it takes to finish is based on the analy ses you have enabled the amount of data you re collecting the complexity of the circuit and the speed of your com
259. led corresponding Test Points see the information about Test Points later in this tutorial Note SPICE sees the current flowing into the positive terminal of a power supply Multimeter or Signal Generator as positive current Double click the Multimeter window change the setting to AC RMS then click OK Now when you click the wires in the circuit the AC voltage or current appears 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Click in the Transient Analysis window to select it and then click the wire connected to the output of the Signal Generator with the tip of the Probe Tool A green waveform appears in the Transient Analysis window similar to what would be seen on an oscillo scope Hold down the Shift key and click on the wire con nected to the output of the Op Amp A second yellow waveform appears in the Transient Analysis window A quick comparison of the two waveforms confirms that the amplitude at the output of the amplifier is much greater than the amplitude at the input Click the e cursor at the far right of the Transient Analysis window and drag it to the top peak of the output waveform the yellow one Click the d cursor and drag it to the top peak of the input waveform the green one The actual peak voltages appear at the top of the graph as Yc and Yd As you can see from the Yc and Yd values the peak voltage at the output of the amplifier is 10 times the peak voltage at the input of the amplifier Th
260. led the UIC parameter in the Transient Analysis the node voltages specified on the IC control line are used to compute the capacitor diode BJT JFET and MOSFET initial conditions This is equivalent to specifying the IC parameter on each device line but is much more convenient You can still specify the IC parameter which takes precedence over the IC values Since no DC bias initial transient solution is computed before the Transient Analysis you should take care to specify all DC source voltages on the IC control line if you are going to use them to compute device initial conditions e Ifyou have not enabled the UIC parameter in the Transient Analysis the DC bias initial transient solution is computed before the Transient Analysis In this case the node voltages you have specified on the IC control line are forced to the desired values during the bias solution The Transient Analysis removes the constraint on these node voltages This is the preferred method since it allows SPICE to compute a consistent DC solution See Also IC example circuit 555 CKT Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 273 Suggested Reading Tuinenga P W SPICE A guide to Circuit Simulation amp Analysis Using PSpice Prentice Hall Inc Englewood Cliffs N J 1988 ISBN 0 13 834607 0 Library TK454 T85 1988 621 319 2 dc 19 Written as a supplement for electronic circuit design courses this book focuses on the design and analy
261. lick OK The waveform now shows the response of the circuit over the specified frequency Use the cursors to get measurements from the waveforms 21 Click the Stop button on the Toolbar to stop the simulation and return to editing mode Mixed Mode Simulation Example The following BCD counter circuit demonstrates how digital SimCode devices can be used in analog simulation mode 1 Choose File gt New 2 Make sure that Analog simulation mode is selected 3 Draw the circuit shown in Figure 3 11 using the follow ing devices e Data Sequencer Analog Instruments e 74LS168A Counter Digital by Number 741xx e V Analog Power 1 e Ground Analog Power 0 zero 3 62 Chapter 3 Tutorials e Logic Switch Switches Digital s e Logic Display Displays Digital 9 e Hex Display Displays Digital h Double click the V and enter DV CC including the semicolon in the Bus Data field to connect this device to the Vcc pin of the 74LS168A Double click the Data Sequencer Click the Pattern button Up Down Figure 3 11 BCD Counter Circuit 7 8 9 10 11 12 Select Count Up and click OK Enter 20 in the Stop Address field and then click OK Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup and make sure the Always Set Defaults check box at the bottom of the dialog box is checked and then choose OK Select the Probe Tool on the Toolbar Using the Left mouse button click on the wire con nected to the
262. lt 0 0V Sets the high output level of a boolean expression Default 4 5V Sets the input threshold level of a boolean expression Default 1 5V Uses the older version of the MOS3 model with the kappa discontinuity Default NO don t use the older version Retains the operating point informa tion when an AC Analysis is run Note This is particularly useful if the circuit is large and you do not want to run a redundant Operating Point Analysis Default NO run OP each time Applicable to the LTRA model When specified the simulator tries to condense LTRA transmission line s past history of input voltages and currents Default NO don t com pact Skip directly to GMIN stepping algorithm Default NO don t skip GMINSTEP SRCSTEP ACCT LIST OPTS BYPASS MINBREAK MAXOPALTER MAXEVTITER NOOPALTER RAMPTIME Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Sets the number of steps in the GMIN stepping algorithm When set to 0 GMIN stepping is disabled making source stepping the simulator s default DC operating point conver gence algorithm Default 10 steps Sets the number of steps in the source stepping algorithm for DC operating point convergence Default 10 steps Causes accounting and run time statistics to be displayed Default NO no display Displays a comprehensive list of all elements in the circuit with connectiv ity and values Default NO no list Displays
263. lue at each cursor s position is displayed at the top of the graph window as well as the difference in value for each pair of cursors In manual scale mode cursor values correspond to the selected waveform only In auto scale mode cursor values correspond to all waveforms assuming there are no offsets Setup Button The Setup button displays the Settings dialog box pictured in Figure 6 5 which lets you control the X horizontal and Y vertical axes of the graph allows you to store and recall waveforms and lets you control many visual aspects of the analysis windows Note that you can also access many of the analysis window settings through the right click pop up menu that appears when you right click anywhere inside an analysis window Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 129 Figure 6 5 Use the Settings dialog box to control the X and Y axes of the graph to store and recall waveforms and to alter the visual aspects of the analysis window Storing Waveform for Future Reference To store the currently displayed waveform for future reference 1 Select the waveform in the Store list box then click the Store button 2 Specify the name of the file in which to save the waveform Each waveform is stored in a separate file Working with a Stored Waveform To recall a stored waveform and place it on the graph 1 Click the Recall Stored Waveform button 2 Select the appropriate waveform file from the File Selection
264. ly one new device at a time When you run the simulation the source code model is automatically compiled and the compiled code is placed in an ASCII text file called SIMLIST TXT in the same directory as WXSPICE EXE This file also contains a listing of the execution order of the source code model Refine the SimCode source model as needed and continue testing until you ve completely debugged the model 5 Copy the compiled model file to your SimCode library Create a separate library file in which to place your compiled SimCode models It does not matter what you name this file but in order to be used you must set the file parameter in the MOD file to be the same as the file name of the compiled SimCode model library SimCode models are stored in two types of files The source models are stored in files with the TXT exten sion for example LS txt and S txt and the compiled models are stored in files with the SCB extension for example Std scb and Cmos scb The 74LS74 Example The following sections contain information about the 74LS74 Digital SimCode model example SimCode Function Identification See in the example on page 17 6 1s74 source identifies the beginning of the SimCode source function for the TALS74 Data declarations See the example This section consists of pin and variable declarations 17 320 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only The INPUTS statement declares the names of the
265. m a dialog box 1 10 from the Help menu 1 10 A4 V gt I Source 15 19 V gt Switch 15 17 V gt V Source 15 19 vO 17 7 17 18 17 32 vl 17 7 17 18 17 32 v3s_param 17 49 VALUE 17 12 17 60 Value 4 23 Value 4 28 Variables for SPICE 15 5 Vec 17 58 Vcc and Ground 6 6 Version updating from previous 1 3 View menu Cascade Windows 13 3 Fit Circuit To Window 13 3 Normal Size Position 13 3 Select Colors 13 1 Tile Windows 13 3 Windows 13 3 Viewing symbols 16 4 vih_param 17 49 vil_param 17 49 VIL_VIH_PERCENT 17 10 17 61 VIL_VIH_VALUE 17 6 17 10 17 62 Virtual instruments Bode plotter 6 11 Curve tracer 6 11 data sequencer 5 11 Digital oscilloscope 6 11 logic analyzer 5 7 multimeter 6 11 Visible check box using 4 23 VNTOL 15 4 15 8 voh_param 17 7 17 49 vol_param 17 7 17 49 VOL_VOH_MIN 17 6 17 10 17 63 Voltage sources 15 17 Voltage controlled current sources 15 19 switches 15 17 voltage sources 15 19 Voltmeter 6 50 vth_param 17 38 VTHMNS 17 38 VTHMXS 17 38 W WARN flag 17 28 warn_param 17 28 Warning messages 6 46 15 12 17 28 Watching online tutorial 1 11 Wave Button of Signal Generator using tutorial 3 15 Waveforms 5 3 5 7 Index 401 changing color of 13 1 changing order digital 5 7 copying to clipboard 10 2 displaying 6 12 editing 6 13 exporting as graphics 7 8 offsetting 6 15 plotting subcircuit internal variables 6 13 recalling stored 6 16 scaling 6 13 storing for future reference
266. member when measuring voltage connect the meter in parallel with the circuit when measuring current connect it in series When measuring resistance be sure to remove any power sources from the circuit and beware of dangling devices that may cause XSpice errors Also since the multimeter forces a current through the circuit to measure ohms make sure you have only one multimeter set to ohms in the circuit at a time XSpice sees the current flowing into the positive terminal of a power supply Multimeter or Signal Generator as positive current When you place a Multimeter Analog Instruments in your circuit the dialog box shown in Figure 6 37 appears showing the settings of the multimeter Note To measure DC AVG or AC RMS values Transient Analysis must be enabled and must simulate enough cycles of transient data to make the measurements meaningful Likewise Operating Point Analysis multimeter must be enabled in order to obtain resistance and DC values Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 163 E tora Figure 6 37 This dialog box appears when you place a multimeter in your circuit The resistance of a voltmeter is high and the resistance of an ammeter is low so it will have little effect on the circuit it is measuring When measuring voltage on a high resistance circuit it may be desirable to increase the resistance of the voltmeter When measuring current through a low resistance circuit it may be desirable to dec
267. mmeter 6 50 ONE 17 7 17 31 17 53 17 55 Online Help using 1 10 Online tutorial watching 1 11 OPEN 8 2 8 10 Open Command 9 1 Opening a CKT file 2 10 Operating Point Multimeter Analysis running 6 22 setting up 6 22 troubleshooting failures 15 2 OPERATORS 17 40 Option variables of SPICE 15 5 Options menu Arrow Wire 12 2 Auto Refresh 12 1 Auto Repeat 12 1 Circuit Display Data 12 4 Cursor Tools 12 2 Device Designations 12 1 Device Display Data 12 4 Grid 12 5 Quick Connect 12 1 Show Bus Labels 12 3 Show Node Numbers 12 3 Show Page Breaks 12 3 Show Pin Dots 12 3 Show Prop Delays 12 4 Title Block 12 6 OPTS 15 9 OrCad PCB II format 7 11 Oscilloscope 6 23 Output 10 9 Output Drive Capacity 15 11 15 12 Output noise measuring 6 32 OUTPUTS 17 5 17 6 17 8 17 10 17 41 Index 394 P Package 4 24 4 29 Package P 4 29 PADS PCB format 7 11 Page breaks moving 12 3 showing 12 3 Page Down using to zoom out 4 3 Page Up using to zoom in 4 3 PARAM_SET 17 12 17 42 Parameter passing creating new SPICE models 16 38 Parameter Sweep Analysis running 6 26 setting up 6 26 Parameters 4 26 17 9 editing device 4 26 Partial derivatives 15 10 Parts Button 3 2 4 7 accessing device library 4 7 using 4 7 Parts list see Bill of Materials 7 1 Password 8 4 8 10 Paste 10 1 disabling for instruction 8 7 Pattern Editor 5 12 PCB netlists 4 27 6 7 Cadnetix format 7 11 Calay 90 format 7 11 Calay format 7 11 exporting 7 10 expo
268. modify the number associated with an existing wire that is connected to a bus wire see Figure 10 4 It also lets you select the angle on the connecting wire 1 Select the wire connected to a bus by clicking it once then choose Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Bus Connection OR Double click the wire with the Arrow Tool 2 Enter a new number or angle then choose OK Chapter 10 Edit Menu Edit Bus Connection Figure 10 4 Use this dialog box to edit a wire connected to a bus Edit Bus Wire Number This feature lets you change the number associated with an existing bus wire 1 Select the bus wire to be edited by clicking it once and then choose Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Bus Wire Number OR Double click the bus wire with the Arrow Tool 2 Enter a new number then choose OK Edit Device Data Choose Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Device Data to change device labels values SPICE data etc Refer to Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics for more information Edit Digital Params Choose Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Digital Params to change digital SimCode device parameters Refer to Digital SimCode Devices in Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for details Edit Run Time Test Point Choose the Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Run Time Test Point command to change the setting for the selected Run Time Test Point Refer to Run Time Test Points in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation for details Edit Select S
269. n Edge And The simulation stops when the proper edge occurs on all of the specified waveforms Edge Or The simulation stops if a transition to any of the specified conditions occurs Setting Breakpoints in a Circuit Use the breakpoint check boxes in the digital Waveforms window see Figure 5 3 to set breakpoints in a circuit To set a breakpoint 1 Click once in the small breakpoint check box to the left of a SCOPE s label in the Waveforms window to fill the bottom portion of the square indicating a break on zero condition 2 Click a second time to fill the top portion of the square indicating a break on one condition 3 Click a third time to return the square to its empty state indicating no break condition Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 109 Digital Instruments This section introduces two digital instruments the Pulser and the Data Sequencer Pulser The Pulser Instruments Digital p is a digital pulse cP101 generator which provides a continuous stream of highs and a lows In the pulse format time high time low and trigger mode are individually programmable for each Pulser in the circuit To edit the Pulser settings 1 Double click the Pulser with the Arrow Tool to display the dialog box shown in Figure 5 5 2 Change the number of simulation ticks for which the pulse will stay high and low the format of the pulse normal or inverted and whether the pulser is in free run or external trigge
270. n CircuitMaker 16 22 editing with text editor 16 21 Monte Carlo Analysis distribution 6 37 gaussian distribution 6 37 overriding with specific tolerances 6 40 running 6 36 seed 6 37 setting up 6 36 simulation runs 6 36 specifying default tolerances 6 40 uniform distribution 6 37 worst case distribution 6 37 MOSFETs 15 26 Mouse usage 2 6 Move 10 1 Moveable page breaks 12 3 Moving devices with connected wires 4 17 elements and shapes 16 6 Multi user project installations 1 6 Multifunction Signal Generator 6 50 Multimeter 10 9 using 6 49 Multiple projects setting up 1 6 Multiple shapes selecting in Symbol Editor 16 5 Multipliers 4 28 15 2 N Name 4 28 Named Subcircuit X 4 29 Netlists definition 7 10 definition of nets 7 10 exporting PCB 7 10 exporting SPICE 7 9 importing and simulating 9 2 loading and running TraxMaker 7 14 requirements 7 10 Nets definition 7 10 definition of netlist 7 10 New Command 9 1 New Macro 11 1 NLI Source 15 21 NLV Source 15 21 NO_CHANGE 17 11 17 39 Node number 4 30 Node numbers 4 30 8 8 showing 12 3 NODESET 15 3 15 28 Noise Analysis running 6 32 setting up 6 32 Non linear Sources 15 21 NOOPALTER 15 9 NOOPITER 15 8 Normal Size Position 13 3 Nudging devices 4 13 NULL 17 6 NUMBER 17 3 17 12 17 39 Number of bus wire specifying 4 18 Numbers of nodes showing 12 3 Numerical Integration 6 48 Index 393 O Objects changing color of 13 1 Offsetting waveforms 6 15 Oh
271. n EXT_TABLE command has been used Other device models use a variety of IF THEN STATE_BIT NUMBER and other statements to define the logical function of the device Tests for Device Setup Violations See in the example These tests warn of device setup violations which in the real world may cause a device not to function properly In the simulation the device will generally still function but warnings if enabled will be displayed Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 321 CircuitMaker PRO only Output Delays Post Events See O in the example The DELAY statements occur at the end of the SimCode function These statements actually post the events to XSpice to let it know that something has changed and when these events are scheduled to occur relative to the rest of the simulation Timing propagation delay is assigned to each output based on the databook specifications input stimulus and the functionality of the device Of 1574 source 1 2 741874 D flip flop Digital Simcode Model typical prop delay values from TI 1981 2nd edition data book INPUTS VCC GND PRE DATA CLK CLR OUTPUTS VCC_LD PRE_LD DATA_LD CLK_LD CLR_LD ON Q INTEGERS tblIndex REALS tplh_val tphl_val ts_val th_val trec_val tt_val temp_tp clk_twl clk_twh pre_clr_twl ril_val rih_val ricc_val PWR_GND_PINS VCC GND set pwr_param and gnd_param values SUPPLY_MIN_MAX 4 75 5 25 5 test for min supply 4 75 and max supply 5 25
272. n Pin Data list oAi CLR input 4th pin in Pin Data list 14o VCC_LD still pin 14 but acts as load on VCC supply lo PRE_LD load applied by PRE input 20 DATA_LD load applied by DATA input 30 CLK_LD load applied by CLK input 40 CLR_LD load applied by CLR input 50 QN output 5th pin in Pin Data list 60 Q output 6th pin in Pin Data list M A74LS74 the name of the selected SimCode model Other information for the Edit Device Data dialog box includes Option Information Analog checkbox Enabled Label Value TALS74 Auto Designation Prefix U Spice Prefix Character A Bus Data DVCC 14 DGND 7 Parameters type digital Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 325 CircuitMaker PRO only SimCode Language Definition The following items make up the Digital SimCode language The following pages described each of these items in detail INPUTS Input pins pins that monitor the circuit OUTPUTS Output pins pins that drive or load the circuit INTEGERS Integer variables and arrays REALS Real variables and arrays PWR_GND_PINS Power and ground pins and record supply voltage IO_PAIRS Input output pin associations for input loading Device Setup Functions Use these functions to set certain characteristics of the device pins VIL_VIH_VALUE Sets absolute VIL and VIH values VIL_VIH_PERCENT Sets VIL and VIH values to a percent age of supply voltage VOL_VOH_MIN Sets VOH and VOL relative to power and grou
273. n attaches to package x2 y2 n a x3 y3 n a x4 y4 n a Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 287 Examples of single part per package Pinleft P1 26 27 1 Pinright P9 26 36 9 Examples of two parts per package Pinleft P1 26 27 1 2 Pinright P9 26 36 9 10 Example of inverted pin Pinleft P7 26 27 7 Note A pin is a connection point for wires Pins can have bubbles to indicate negative logic Pins with bubbles are indicated with the tilde Tutorial Creating a Device Symbol The following step by step example shows how to use the Symbol Editor to create macro circuits 1 Make a backup copy of the USER LIB file prior to creating or deleting a macro In case the library is damaged or altered in any undesir able way you will always have a copy of the library as a backup 2 Choose Macros gt New Macro or click the Macro button on the Toolbar to display the Define New Macro dialog box shown in Figure 16 4 It s possible that a message will appear asking if you want to include the present circuit inside the new symbol For this example you can click No Debre Hew Mera Hares HON Patz Pas Package no Figure 16 4 The name you enter here is used later to select the device from the library 3 Enter a unique name up to 13 characters in length in the Macro Name text edit field For this example type AND NOR 16 288 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 10 11 12 13 14 15 Spe
274. n replaces the A B labels used on the analog analysis graphs with the variable names such as V 8 etc This allows you to identify the various points in the circuit more consistently with those being graphed in analysis windows 14 244 Chapter 14 Simulation Menu CHAPTER 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics SPICE Simulation Program with Integrated Circuit Emphasis This chapter discusses strategies for troubleshooting SPICE convergence SPICE option variables and SPICE s elemen tary devices Use this information as a companion and reference as you complete the tasks in Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Troubleshooting SPICE Convergence Berkeley SPICE3 uses simultaneous linear equations expressed in matrix form to determine the operating point DC voltages and currents of a circuit at each step of the simulation The circuit is reduced to an array of conduc tances which are placed in the matrix to form the equations G V D When a circuit includes nonlinear elements SPICE uses multiple iterations of the linear equations to account for the nonlinearities SPICE makes an initial guess at the node voltages then calculates the branch currents based on the conductances in the circuit SPICE then uses the branch currents to recalculate the node voltages and the cycle is repeated This cycle continues until all of the node voltages and branch currents fall within specified tolerances converge However if the volt
275. n return to the standard Arrow Tool at any time by selecting the tool from the Toolbar or right clicking on the schematic background and selecting Arrow Right Click Pop Up Menus You can right click click with the right mouse button in different areas of the CircuitMaker workspace to open various pop up menus see Figure 2 3 The items listed in the pop up menu vary depending on where you right click The following locations and circumstances will each access a different pop up menu e Schematic background e Device e Wire e Textobject created with the Text Tool e Group of selected items pop up menu depends on types of items that you select e Waveform label e Anywhere else in Waveform window 2 38 Chapter 2 Getting Started Figure 2 4 Use HotKeys to quickly select devices You can customize HotKeys to fit your needs HotKeys For quick and easy device placement CircuitMaker offers up to sixty user definable HotKeys that let you place com monly used devices with a single keystroke For example press the r key lowercase r to get a IK resistor Or press b for a 10V battery These assignments can be changed and customized so that the parts you use most are right at your fingertips See Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics to learn how to customize HotKeys For a list of all default HotKeys choose Devices gt HotKeys1 or HotKeys2 Figure 2 4 shows the default HotKeys1 list Shortcut Keys Comma
276. n the simulation 5 Click the subcircuit device with the tip of the Probe Tool and select the variable from the list Scaling Waveforms You can view waveforms in the analysis windows in either Auto scale or Manual scale mode e Select the Man Manual button to set the window to manual scale mode Select the Auto button to set the window to auto scale mode The manual scale controls allow you to specify the units per division for both the X and Y scales using the arrow keys in corner of the analysis window Auto scale mode will automatically scale the analysis window so that the selected waveform s are completely viewable within the window Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 127 To scale a waveform in Manual Scale mode 1 Select a waveform by clicking its label in the list on the left hand side of the graph window For example click A or V 8 if you have enabled the Simulation gt Display Variable Names option If no waveform is selected all waveforms will be scaled simultaneously 2 Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to change the Y scale for the selected waveform s 3 Use the Left and Right arrow buttons to change the X scale for the selected waveform s Note You can adjust only linear scales manual scaling has no affect on log scales In Auto Scale mode CircuitMaker displays all waveforms at the same scale The graph is automatically scaled so that the waveforms fill almost the entire graph Y
277. nalysis window s depending on which analyses you enabled Sweep Trace Labels For the Monte Carlo Temperature Sweep and Parameter Sweep analyses CircuitMaker gives a unique label to each trace or waveform generated When you enable Simulation gt Display Variable Names CircuitMaker displays the trace names from each sweep run in the analysis window with a special character appended to the trace name For example the appended characters are m for Monte Carlo t for Temperature Sweep and p for Parameter Sweep There is also a trace for the simulation run which was done with the nominal circuit values This trace will not have a character appended to its trace label The following are some example trace labels with explanations V 6 lp Voltage at node 6 for Parameter Sweep run 1 V 6 2p Voltage at node 6 for Parameter Sweep run 2 V 6 3p Voltage at node 6 for Parameter Sweep run 3 V6 Voltage at node 6 for nominal run V 6 lm Voltage at node 6 for Monte Carlo run 1 v 6 1t Voltage at node 6 for Temperature Sweep run 1 You can double click on a trace label to display details about the device values used in that simulation run 6 142 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Fourier Analysis Fourier Analysis setup is included with the Transient Analysis setup You must enable the Transient Analysis in order to do the Fourier Analysis When the simulation is completed the Fourier Analysis is displayed in a separate window The Fourier
278. nd Device Test Functions Use these functions to test for any device setup violations which may occur in the circuit These violations may not affect the simulation of the device s functionality 1 e the device may continue to function in simulation even with setup violations In order to know if any of these setup violations have occurred you must enable warnings SUPPLY_MIN_MAX Tests supply pins for min max supply voltage violations RECOVER Tests inputs for recovery time violations SETUP_HOLD Tests inputs for setup and hold time violations 17 326 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only WIDTH Tests inputs for minimum pulse width violations FREQUENCY FMAX Tests inputs for minimum amp maximum frequency violation Output Pin Functions Use these functions to program the output pins of a device STATE Sets outputs to the declared logic state STATE_BIT Sets outputs to binary weighted logic states LEVEL Sets the level of the output state STRENGTH Sets the strength of the output state TABLE Sets output logic states based on truth table EXT_TABLE Sets output logic states based on extended truth table LOAD Declares loading characteristics of input pins DRIVE Declares drive characteristics of output pins DELAY Sets propagation delay to specified outputs NO_CHANGE Leaves output state of I O pins unchanged EVENT Causes a digital event to be posted Expression Operations Use thes
279. nd key or shortcut keys let you select menu commands directly The following table lists the available short cut keys in CircuitMaker Keystroke What it Does Ctrl N Starts anew CKT file Ctl O Lets you choose a file to open Ctrl S Saves the current file Ctrl P Prints plots the current file Shift Space Opens the Script Functions dialog box Ctrl Z Undo reverse an action Ctrl X Cuts the currently selected item or group of items to the Clipboard Ctrl C Copies the currently selected item or group of items to the Clipboard Ctrl V Pastes the currently selected item or group of items from the Clipboard Shift Insert Moves the currently selected group of items Ctrl D Duplicates the currently selected item or group of items Ctrl F or End Refreshes the screen Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 39 2 40 Esc Aborts the current operation Page Up Enlarges the display zooms in Page Down Reduces the display zooms out Delete Deletes the current selection Home Centers the screen around the cursor Tab Skips to next input item in dialog boxes Arrow Keys Nudges a selected device by pressing the Left Right Up or Down Arrow keys CircuitMaker Preferences CircuitMaker stores many settings such as program and circuit defaults You specify preference settings using the Preferences dialog box choose File gt Preferences as shown in Figure 2 5 You can use different Preference settings or reload the fac
280. ndependent Bitmap Device Dependent Bitmap Choose File gt Export gt Options to select the desired format When copying waveforms to the clipboard an alert box appears to inform you that the waveforms have been copied Chapter 10 Edit Menu Note To find input output connectors put the connec tor name in the Label or Value field of the Find and Select dialog box Before you can use this feature at least one Analysis window must be open You can copy only the information currently visible in the Waveforms window to the clipboard To ensure that meaningful waveform information is copied run the simulation prior to using this feature Select All This option selects all items in the work area This is useful when you want to cut copy or move the entire circuit Find and Select Use the Find and Select feature Figure 10 1 to locate a specific device placed on the workspace by Node Number Designation Label or Value or Symbol Name If CircuitMaker finds a device that matches your description it 1s highlighted Find and Select x Node Number f 4 Designation E Label or Value fo Symbol Name A E Cancel Figure 10 1 Use the Find and Select dialog box to search for devices you have placed in the workspace For example if a SPICE message indicates a problem at node 27 and your schematic is rather complex this command can help you find the specified node All wires connected to that node will be
281. ne or more of the standard analyses AC DC or Transient Furthermore CircuitMaker data is only saved for nodes that have a Run Time Test Point attached To set up and run a Temperature Sweep Analysis 1 Select Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click Temperature Sweep to display the dialog box shown in Figure 6 25 Temperature Sweep Setup xi z 0 000 100 0 25 00 Figure 6 25 Use this dialog box to set up a Temperature Sweep Analysis 3 Enter the temperature range you want to sweep 4 Select the Enabled check box 5 Set up one or more standard analysis so that each analysis is performed at the indicated temperatures 6 Place Run Time Test Points at the nodes you want to observe by left clicking with the Probe Tool on a point in the circuit CircuitMaker displays the results of a Temperature Sweep in the AC DC or Transient Analysis window s depending on which analyses you enabled The waveform in Figure 6 26 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figure 6 25 Notice that the analysis sweeps the temperature of the circuit in specified steps between the start and stop temperature values The waveforms in this example represent the magni tude of the circuit output voltage in db for each temperature step See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 149 CircuitMake
282. next to it or press Ctrl R Select a Resistor Passive Components Resistors r by pressing the letter r on the keyboard Notice that the resistor is oriented horizontally Press the r key again or click the Right mouse button to rotate the device 90 Drag the resistor above and to the left of the transistor and click the Left mouse button once This will be resistor RB Don t worry about the value yet Since you enabled the Repeat On feature another resistor will appear with the same orientation as the previous one Place the next resistor directly above the transistor This will be resistor RC Another resistor appears Press any key on the key board except R or M to delete it Choose Options gt Auto Repeat and uncheck the Auto Repeat feature or press Ctrl R Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 45 Selecting V and Ground Devices Now you ll place a voltage source and change its settings li devace 1 Select a V Analog Power 1 by pressing the 1 number one key Place it above resistor RC Select a Ground Analog Power 0 by pressing the 0 zero key Place it below the transistor lk 3 Double click the V device using the Left mouse button to open the Edit Device Data dialog box pictured in lk Figure 3 3 4 2N2222A Ground Figure 3 3 The Edit Device Data dialog box lets you change a wide range of device settings 4 Change the Label Value field to read 15V 5 Click once on the Visible check box
283. ney in hardware prototypes CircuitMaker s Simulation Modes CircuitMaker is one of the few simulation programs that offers 2 distinct modes of simulation Analog mode and Digital mode This gives you greater flexibility and control over how your circuit is simulated and each mode has advantages depending on the type of simulations you need Analog Mode is the accurate real world simulation mode you can use for analog digital and mixed signal circuits This mode will give you results like you would get from an actual breadboard In Analog mode the devices function just like real world parts and each individual model func tions like its real world counterpart For example digital ICs have accurate propagation delays setup and hold times etc Outputs of the devices see the effect of loading on them and nearly all the parameters of the real world are taken into account Analog is the classic world of electronics Unlike digital SPICE electronics there are no logic state restrictions the voltage level of any given circuit node is not limited to a high or low Simulation i a Analog simulation therefore is much more complex Program with Stan g E Int ted CircuitMaker s analog mixed mode simulation uses an S egra j enhanced version of Berkeley SPICE3f5 XSpice allowing Circuit j ae you to accurately simulate any combination of analog and Emphasis digital devices without manually inserting D A or A D converte
284. nformation Warning Messages vs Error Messages Sometimes CircuitMaker displays warning or error messages during circuit simulation These messages are saved in a text file called filename ERR CircuitMaker prompts you to view these messages displaying them in the Windows Notepad editor The following distinguishes the two messages Warning Messages Warning messages are not fatal to the simulation They generally provide information about changes that SPICE had to make to the circuit in order to complete the simulation These include invalid or missing parameters etc Note Normally valid simulation results are generated even if warning messages are reported SimCode warnings may include information such as timing violations tsetup thold trec tw etc or significant drops in power supply voltage on digital components Error Messages Error messages provide information about problems that SPICE could not resolve and were fatal to the simulation Error messages indicate that simulation results could not be generated so they must be corrected before you will be able to analyze the circuit If you need help troubleshooting SPICE simulation errors referto Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Setting Up Analog SPICE Variables SPICE allows you to control certain aspects of its simulation such as iteration limits temperature etc Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup gt Analog Optio
285. nnncccccccnnnccnnnnncccnnnnnonnnannnnns 17 10 Device Setup Functions sera 17 10 Device Test Functions ccccccescssessesessesecsesecsececcecseceesecsecsesacsecausaesesaeeateesaees 17 10 Output Pin Functions sente nl ellas 17 11 Expression Operations ciencia 17 11 Expression FUNCOMS sarta ica 17 12 Program Contolera a R a a a 17 13 2 A nne 17 13 A A La cate xaa eset nad atc ealiatabaee 17 13 SimCode Language Syntax crol 17 14 A ee a E ets R 17 14 GCGHANGE MIME manion ads 17 15 CHANGED 00d idad 17 15 DELAY auditada dida 17 16 DRIVE score eliana dica 17 18 EVENT sui dada aia canada 17 20 EM ii a is a diia 17 20 EXT TABLE ieena aa aidaita bed 17 21 FREQUENCY FMAX sssiascccusicsrsestaacsisisietetaetassnslhnadeetiaasestestaaaieetnadsitvasteande 17 23 CF Nas aa id 17 24 A o ee een een ee 17 24 E THEN ii ridad datar 17 25 INPUTS rica 17 26 INSTANGE civic diia 17 27 INTEGERS iii ras 17 28 lO PAIRS soii aii 17 30 Contents xix LOAD ee neste sates abe Ln dond e ate dd re dodo e SR e da 17 32 MATH FUNC TIONS ici a eee ads 17 34 MESSAGE cutis ad A a ds aa 17 35 MINSTYP MAX tddi 17 36 KOKE TANE EE E A adi 17 39 NWMBER a a ld as 17 39 OPERATOR Sai A dates 17 40 QUTPUTS E o ociiaha 17 41 PARAM SET Ei A a rad 17 42 PROMPT E E E E ada 17 43 PWE TABLE td a A ae 17 45 PWR GND PINS ap ca id Lt a Ad a LD dl a data 17 46 READODA TA a ita cosa 17 47 REA ES E le eels 17 48 REGOVER sis aucatteiee hives nate Sta AA EIA EA AA 17 50 RETURN
286. nput output state PX Hex display for short variable or old input output state Jor Character display for short variable or current input output state Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 359 CircuitMaker PRO only 17 360 JC Character display for short variable or old input output state he Exponential display for real variable Tot Floating point engineering display for real variable g Short display e or f for real variable Ps String constant display The only valid string constants are INSTANCE The present SimCode device instance name FUNC The present SimCode device function name FILE The present SimCode device file name Example PROMPT input d time f device s D1 tl INSTANCE See Also MESSAGE Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only PWL_TABLE Returns value from interpolative look up table General Form PWL_TABLE lt IN var gt lt IN1 gt lt OUT1 gt lt IN2 gt lt OUT2 gt lt OUTn gt lt OUTn gt Parameters lt IN var gt input variable integer or real lt INx gt input compare value lt OUTx gt output value at lt INx gt Use This piece wise linear function is essentially a look up table The value of lt IN var gt is used to look up an entry in the table which consists of pairs of values The first value in each pair is an input compare value and the second value is the corresponding output value If the lt IN var gt value is less than the first lt
287. ns that monitor the circuit General Form INPUTS lt input pine lt input pane cod Parameters lt input pin gt Name of the input pin 17 342 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Use The INPUTS data type is used to define the pins which monitor stimulus external to the device These generally include input i o power and ground pins Notes Input pin names must begin with a letter and be defined before they are used Example INPUTS VCC GND PRE DATA CLK CLR See Also OUTPUTS IO_PAIRS PWR_GND_PINS INSTANCE Checks if this is the specified device instance General Form INSTANCE lt instance name gt Parameters lt instance name gt Text string indicating instance name Use The INSTANCE function returns 1 if the present instance of the SimCode device matches the lt instance name gt specified Otherwise it returns 0 Notes A circuit may contain more than one of any given device During simulation it may be important to know if the device being simulated at this moment is the one you are interested in This would allow you for example to print messages for one specific NAND gate without having to wade through messages for all the other NAND gates as well The instance name is the device Designation preceded by its Spice Prefix Character the letter A Example IF INSTANCE AU23 THEN BEGIN MESSAGE U23 Q0 d Q0 END Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 343
288. ns to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 36 To learn more about the option variables listed in this dialog box and how to change their values turn to SPICE Option Variables in Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Ipliern E Figure 6 36 Use this dialog box to control certain aspects of the SPICE simulation ASCIIOUTPUT Check Box By default the simulation data is saved in the RAW file in binary format creating smaller RAW files Use this check box to have SPICE save the simulation data in ASCII format which lets you to read the data directly or load it into other applications Default binary format Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 161 DVCC DVDD and DGND These are default values of the Vcc Vdd and ground buses for the digital devices If these buses are not specified in the circuit the default values will be used If a bus name is entered instead of a value that bus will be connected to the devices By default DVCC and DVDD 5V DGND GND Integration Method Choose which numerical integration method you want to use with XSpice The trapezoidal method is relatively fast and accurate but tends to oscillate under certain conditions The gear method requires longer simulation times but tends to be more stable The gear order must be a value between 2 and 6 Using a higher gear order theoretically leads to more accurate results but increases simulation time Default Trapezoidal Analysis
289. nternal circuitry 1 Make a backup copy of the USER LIB file In case the library is damaged or altered in any undesir able way you will always have a copy of the library as a backup 2 Create a symbol as described earlier in this chapter see Creating Device Symbols earlier in this chapter 3 Place the symbol that you created in the drawing area and expand it by selecting it and then choosing Macros Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 293 Note If a macro device contains internal circuitry as well as SPICE data the SPICE data will be ignored gt Expand Macro see Expanding an Existing Macro Device earlier in this chapter for more details Construct the circuitry which performs the function your new macro device is to have For example suppose you want to build a device that performs an AND NOR function You would construct something like the circuit shown in Figure 16 8 Figure 16 8 You can add functional circuitry such as this AND NOR function Select the Wire Tool from the Toolbar and connect wires from the macro symbol s pins to the other points within the circuit Figure 16 9 shows an example of a completely wired macro device Figure 16 9 The functional circuitry is wired to the symbol to create a functional macro device If default data was not added when the symbol was created then double click on the macro symbol and click the Netlist button Add any necessary data such as Package and Auto Designa
290. nts on a single plot it is sometimes useful to change the DC offset of each waveform so they do not overlap To do so just enter a different offset value in the Vert Offset field for each Run Time Test Point You can also choose to pause when the simulation is complete before returning to CircuitMaker To edit an existing Run Time Test Point double click it with the Arrow Tool Adding Multiple Run Time Test Points To add multiple Run Time Test Points 1 Hold down the Shift key while clicking with the Probe Tool Removing All Run Time Test Points To remove all Run Time Test Points from the circuit 1 Left click with the Probe Tool in any blank area of the circuit window Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation ES Run Button Running the Simulation Once you have created the circuit you can run the simula tion by simply clicking the Run button on the Toolbar One aspect that sets CircuitMaker apart from other SPICE based simulators is the seamless integration between the schematic design and simulation process There are no complex data fields to enter and everything is done quickly and efficiently from the same workspace CircuitMaker displays an interactive XSpice simulation window during the SPICE data collection process showing the progress of the simulation When the simulation has completed an analysis window appears for each of the selected analyses you have run Using the Analysis Windows CircuitMaker displa
291. o 1 if the lt pin gt is non zero otherwise it is set to 0 Notes The first lt pin gt in the list represents the most significant bit MSB and the last lt pin gt in the list represents the least significant bit LSB Example A NUMBER D3 D2 D1 D0 In this example if D3 is HIGH and D2 D1 and DO are LOW 1000 then A 8 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 355 CircuitMaker PRO only 17 356 OPERATORS Assignment Operator Equals sets a variable or output pin to a value or state Math Operators Add Subtract Multiply Divide Unary Operators Logical not Bitwise complement Logical Operators amp amp AND OR XOR Bitwise Operators amp AND OR a XOR lt lt Shift left gt gt Shift right Relative Comparators Equal l Not equal lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt greater than gt greater than or equal to Use Operators are used to set and manipulate variables and expressions Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Notes Expressions must enclosed within parenthases Expres sions are always evaluated from left to right within parenthases You should use parenthases to set precedence within an expression When using the Unary Operators on values variables expressions etc the values variables expressions etc must be in parenthases Examples clk_twl 25n reg reg 1 vx vol_param 10m C A
292. o that assignment You can manually reassign the pins used for a particular gate by selecting the appropri ate letter PART A PART B etc for that gate with the Up and Down Arrows in the dialog box Figure 4 9 Use this dialog box as a reference for pin SPICE information Default pin data has already been entered for the predefined devices Clicking the Default Designations button restores the pin numbers to their original default values You can add default pin numbers to a macro device by editing the pin numbers while the macro is expanded and while saving the macro Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics To edit macro pin names and designations 1 Double click them in the Symbol Editor see Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for more information The order in which the pins appear in the list is deter mined by the order in which you placed pins on the device To edit pin designations for a specific part 1 Double click them in this dialog box This does not change the pin designations in the library Faults Clicking the Faults button on the Edit Device Data dialog box displays the Device Faults dialog box which lets you add fault data to the device If the fault data has been password protected the Access Faults dialog box appears See Chapter 8 Fault Simulation for details Printing and Exporting Circuits When you have finished designing your circuit you can print it on any Windows selectable printer or plot
293. og Mixed Signal Simulation Digital Options Use this dialog box to control the size of a step when running the simulation in single step mode to set the conditions for break points and to set the simulation speed Refer to the section Digital Options in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Check Pin Connections Use Check Pin Connections to check the entire schematic and be informed of any devices that have unconnected pins Reset This works just like the Reset button in the Toolbar which is described in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation and Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Chapter 14 Simulation Menu 14 243 Step This works just like the Step button in the Toolbar which is described in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Run This works just like the Run button in the Toolbar which is described in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation and Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Trace This works just like the Trace button in the Toolbar which is described in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation Display Waveforms This works just like the Waveforms button in the Toolbar which is described in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation and Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Scope Probe This option when checked causes the logic levels detected by the Probe Tool to be displayed in the digital Waveforms window while running digital simulation Display Variable Names The Display Variable Names optio
294. og box Or refer to the Device Library book for a description of each device and the simulation mode for which it is intended Overview of Analog Simulation This section explains the basic concepts for simulation in CircuitMaker s analog mode Before You Use the Analog Simulator To do analog simulation you must ensure there is SPICE information for each device in the circuit Only those devices listed as Analog or Analog Digital in the Device Library 6 116 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation book have SPICE data associated with them You can use other devices in the circuit as long as you provide the SPICE information for those devices See Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for more information The Analog check box in the Edit Device Data dialog box indicates whether or not that device will function in Analog simulation mode meaning there is SPICE simulation data available for the device Ifthe Analog check box is not checked and you use the device in analog simulation a warning appears and that device is ignored leaving an open circuit where that device is located Setting Up Analog Analyses You set up analog analyses using the Analyses Setup dialog box described later in this chapter By default whenever you create a new circuit the Always Set Defaults option is enabled for the analog analyses This means that Operating Point Analysis the Multimeter is enabled for simple DC circuits For more complex circuits Transi
295. om corner of the rectangle x3 y3 n a x4 y4 n a Example Rect Device 25 30 15 28 RRect Attribute pen color x1 y1 left top corner of the rounded rectangle x2 y2 right bottom corner of the rounded rectangle x3 y3 width and height of ellipse defining the corners x4 y4 n a Example RRect Device 56 22 11 8 10 10 Ellipse Circle Attribute pen color xl yl left top corner of the defining rectangle x2 y2 right bottom corner of the defining rectangle x3 y3 n a x4 y4 n a Example Ellipse Device 49 44 9 33 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices Arc 1 4 1 2 Attribute pen color x1 y1 left top corner of the rectangle defining the complete ellipse x2 y2 right bottom corner of the rectangle defining the complete ellipse x3 y3 end point of line 1 whose start point is at the center of the ellipse x4 y4 end point of line 2 whose start point is at the center of the ellipse Note The arc follows the outline of the ellipse and is drawn counterclockwise from line 1 to line 2 Example Arc Device 51 13 13 33 32 13 51 10 1 4 Arc Device 28 11 5 45 5 17 28 17 1 2 Text Attribute text color x1 y1 bottom center location of text x2 y2 n a x3 y3 n a x4 y4 n a text string enclosed in single quote marks 15 characters max Example Text Device 0 25 symbol text PinUp PinDown PinLeft PinRight PinUp PinDown PinLeft PinRight Attribute pin name 16 characters max x1 y1 point where pi
296. on 4 Place Run Time Test Points at the nodes you want to observe as in Figure 6 28 5 Run the simulation 6 View the data as it appears in Figure 6 32 Figure 6 27 Use this dialog box to set up Monte Carlo Analysis 6 152 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker PRO only Rus Time Ten Paid bos Wij E FP TRAMA FER rimema FP Cambra pih wath cama arder and rade HEE Pop trios geil gen hipi ai ire I Enable Dia Ret cova Figure 6 28 Use this dialog box to set up Run Time Test Points for the nodes you want to observe right click with the Probe Tool on a point in the circuit aj AA Tu Hep 0 03 oh Re Peg EA w 1 504 Ydo E00 te ad 2 000 p LESE i 157 Tate 1I 417 iy FafeGromd RES Du tir Perales Figure 6 29 Waveforms for the Monte Carlo Analysis The waveform in Figure 6 29 was generated by simulating the ANALOG CKT circuit using the values shown in Figures 6 27 and 6 28 Notice that this analysis randomly varies the component values within the specified tolerances and then plots the output voltage of the five simulation runs includ ing the input and output voltages for the nominal run See Using the Analysis Windows earlier in this chapter for more information about manipulating the waveforms Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 153 CircuitMaker PRO only Specifying Default Tolerances l l You can specify default tolerances for six general categories of devices
297. on Set Designation to Vin Visible and then click OK Note The Label Value field contains 1 1V which represents the minimum and maximum programmed voltage swings before you double clicked on the Signal Generator Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 57 3 58 Chapter 3 Tutorials Setting Up the Analysis Now that you have created the circuit you will set up the analyses When you run the simulation the results are based on the conditions you set up 1 Select Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Uncheck the Always Set Defaults for Transient and Operating Point Analyses option so it is cleared By unchecking this option you can access the Tran sient and Multimeter Operating Point Analysis setups When checked defaults are used for the simulation 3 Click the Transient Fourier button 4 Click the Set Defaults button for default Transient Analysis setups and click OK This provides simulation for 5 cycles of the input signal with 200 data points For best reliability Max Step should be the same size as Step Time More data points require longer simulation time 5 Click the Multimeter button 6 Select the DC Operating Point option in the Display group box and click OK This sets the initial display mode of the Value Window to DC Note You must enable Transient Analysis in order to obtain DC AVG or AC RMS values Multimeter must be enabled in order to use the Multimeter Window 7 Click the DC button 8 Select the Enab
298. on gt Analyses Setup then click the Analog Options button to display the dialog box shown in Figure 3 5 Probe Tool Analogy Dpien Spito Yarabin xl APS TOL Abode cunet ac rea O 10 E CHATO Choky hole in oa dora T 10015 PCED 405 ma A nam DE RAS MJS pousca duno awaj PC DE FL MEDS chame larg ri cora L 1000 DE Far HDS dhame di i niora M 1000 DHH bin pipan rare oaia 101 1 MM TLi DC operating pori imtaton bent j 1000 TL COL barca cara imak barca fl iT i TH Hin hebei dro da PE Ja parn p TLE ea eee om gf SOGUTRUT Lares tiraba et ia AECA bared om thes LA le Digital Pos Sappi Ei Dada vikaa a Fun Mires cc 000 DWOD mv DER fono rd ahh prad ir LA ibe Dene gation Weihai T Hoda Voltage and Suppi Cunt 5 Tuparcidal T HogeVolage Soc and Dios Dureri Cowo F Hoda volage Suppi Durand Davea Durand and Porai T Hofe Woltage Guppi Dui aed Disc ubani WEA oe era Figure 3 5 The third option selected lets you measure voltage current and power with the Probe Tool 6 From the Analysis data saved in RAW file group box select the third option Node Voltage Supply Current Device Current and Power then click OK to exit Analog Options This option lets you to take current and power measure ments with the Probe Tool 7 Click the Run Analyses button to start the simulation OR Click Exit and click the Run Tool on the Toolbar An interactive SPICE simulation window appears
299. on when a single match is found select Place Single Items to automatically place an item if it is the only match found 6 Double click the device or click Place to place the highlighted device in the workspace OR Click Browse to display the selected part in the Device Selection dialog box The Browse button is useful to see what the device symbol looks like and also to find other similar devices Note If you modify the User Library USER LIB file expect a slight delay the next time you search for devices in the Device Search dialog box The delay is caused as CircuitMaker builds a new SEARCHDB DAT search list file If for any reason the search list seems incorrect or out of date you can create a new search list file by choosing Macros gt Update Search List Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 77 Note If the Quick Connect feature is enabled and an unconnected device pin is placed so that it touches a wire or other device pin CircuitMaker will auto matically make the connec tion See the Wiring section in this chapter for details Placing Devices After you have searched and found a device you can place the device or reselect it using a number of different options illustrated in this section To place a device 1 Select it using one of the methods discussed in the previous section 2 Press the r key or Right click the mouse to rotate the device into the position you want 3 Press the m key to mirro
300. ou can click and drag a selection rectangle around a portion of the graph then release the mouse to zoom in on that portion of the analysis window See Figure 6 4 Figure 6 4 Click and drag a rectangle around any portion of the window to zoom in on that area 6 128 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Tip You can nudge waveforms and cursors around the analysis window by selecting a waveform or cursor and using the arrow keys on the keyboard Offsetting Waveforms To reposition the waveform on the graph alter its X and Y offsets 1 Selecta waveform by clicking on its name in the variable list on the left hand side of the graph window 2 Click and drag the waveform itself with the mouse or press the arrow keys on the keyboard to change both the X and Y offsets 3 Select the Off button to display the offset values for the selected waveform the values are shown near the top of the analysis window Using Measurement Cursors Four measurement cursors let you precisely measure values in the waveform analysis windows such as amplitude and period There are two cursors on the x axis and two on the y axis To use the measurement cursors 1 Turn the cursors ON or OFF by double clicking the tab at the end of the cursor 2 Reposition a cursor by dragging the tab or by selecting it and pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard If no cursor is selected pressing the arrow keys will move the selected waveform The va
301. output of the Data Sequencer with the tip of the Probe Tool CircuitMaker places a Run Time Test Point on that node and a dialog box appears Enable the TRAN check box and the Combine Plots check box Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 63 a a ta o ny 3 64 tea ee Oe N MENY biititiit 0 5u Tou Tsu 200 750 30u Ref Ground X 5uS Div Chapter 3 Tutorials 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Set the Max Scale of the TRAN graph to 20 and then click OK Hold down the Shift key and click the wire connected to the TC terminal count output of the 74LS168A CircuitMaker places a second Run Time Test Point on that node and a dialog box appears Again enable the TRAN and Combine Plots check boxes The Max Scale should already be set to 20 Set the Vert Offset to 6 and then click OK Click the Run button on the Toolbar to start the simulation The interactive SPICE window appears showing waveforms as the data is being collected When the SPICE data collection process is completed the Transient Analysis window appears Click the output of the Data Sequencer to view the clock signal in the Transient Analysis window Click the Man button in the corner of the Transient Analysis window to switch to manual scaling mode Click the Up scale button to change the vertical scale to 10V Div Click th
302. p Address is the address of the data that outputs last before the sequence repeats Use Use External Clock to make the CP1 and CP2 inputs rising and falling edge clock inputs respectively If pins are clocked the Data Sequencer advances to the next address Digital Simulation Mode Only The Present Address option indicates the address of the data that is output next if the circuit is not reset or modified The Tick Increment specifies how many simulation ticks occur before the output is advanced to the next address when the external clock is disabled Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 111 Analog Simulation Mode Only Low Level and High Level indicate the output voltage levels Step Time is the length of time that the outputs remain at each address when the external clock is disabled Clock VTH is the voltage threshold level at which the external clock pins cause the outputs to advance to the next address Pattern Editor You can type data directly into the Data list box in the Data Sequencer dialog box However when creating a large pattern this method becomes time consuming Choose the Pattern button on the Data Sequencer dialog box to display the dialog box shown in Figure 5 7 The Pattern Editor helps you to create large complex patterns quickly Pallon di Figure 5 7 Use the Pattern Editor to help you quickly create large complex patterns The Pattern Editor not only lets you to enter predefined pattern sequences i
303. p Items 10 10 Move 10 1 Paste 10 1 Place Selected Label s 10 4 Rotate 90 10 3 Select All 10 3 Set Auto Designation 10 5 Set Prop Delay s 10 4 Straighten Selected Wire s 10 4 Undo 10 1 Edit Multimeter 10 9 Edit PROM RAM 10 8 Edit Pulser 10 8 Edit Scope Probe Name 10 10 Edit Selected Item 10 6 Edit Signal Generator 10 10 Editing digital model parameters 16 40 macros 11 1 pininformation 16 8 SPICE models in CircuitMaker 16 22 SPICE models with text editor 16 21 SPICE subcircuits 16 27 symbols 16 3 Editing devices 4 22 analog 4 25 bus data 4 26 description 4 24 designation 4 23 device name 4 22 digital 4 25 label value 4 23 package 4 24 parameters 4 26 spice data 4 28 Element definitions 16 10 Arc 16 13 circle 16 12 ellipse 16 12 line 16 10 PinDown 16 13 PinDown 16 13 PinLeft 16 13 PinLeft 16 13 PinRight 16 13 PinRight 16 13 PinUp 16 13 PinUp 16 13 polygon 16 11 polyline 16 11 rect 16 12 rrect 16 12 Text 16 13 Element List in Symbol Editor 16 9 Elementary devices of SPICE 15 13 Ellipses drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definition 16 12 ELSE 17 25 END 17 7 17 25 17 64 Enlarging the circuit 4 3 Errors 6 46 7 11 EVENT 17 11 Example of using SPICE data 4 30 Exclude from Bill of Materials 4 31 Exclude from PCB 4 31 Exclusive Test Points placing 6 8 placing multiple 6 9 removing 6 9 EXIT 17 5 17 7 17 13 EXP 17 12 17 34 Expand Macro 11 2 11 5 Expanding macro devices 16 17 Exponential Data
304. peak to peak amplitude 6 172 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation of the waveform is equal to the specified Max Amp and is centered around zero If an Offset is specified the waveform will be offset vertically by the specified amount If a Max Time is specified the waveform will be scaled horizontally to fit the specified Max Time Example circuit PWL CKT Note The PWL file must be located in the same directory as the circuit you are simulating Data Sequencer You can use this device in both digital and analog simulation modes Also known as a Data or Word Generator it allows you to specify up to 32767 8 bit words which can be output in a defined sequence Since there is no limit to the number of Data Sequencers that you can use in a circuit you could place several in parallel to create a data stream of any width For a complete description of the data sequencer refer to Data Sequencer in Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 173 6 174 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CHAPTER 7 Exporting Files CircuitMaker offers several powerful export options letting you export your circuit data to any of the following output types Bill of Materials e Waveforms as graphic files e Circuits as graphic files e SPICE Netlists e SPICE Subcircuits e PCB Netlists This level of flexibility lets you easily integrate the work you do in C
305. pice Model Use the Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Select Spice Model option to change the SPICE model for the selected device Refer to SPICE Models in Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for details Chapter 10 Edit Menu 10 217 Edit PROM RAM Use the Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit PROM RAM option Figure 10 5 to program the 32 x 8 PROM or the 1k x 8 RAM Once a PROM is programmed it retains its contents until repro grammed When you save a circuit containing a PROM to disk the contents of the PROM are also saved For debug ging purposes the contents of the RAM can be viewed and edited but the data will not be saved with the circuit 1 Clicka single PROM or RAM to select it and then choose Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit PROM RAM OR Double click the device with the Arrow Tool to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 10 5 2 Program the device as desired then choose OK Ede PROB AAA Do a nn wm mm Da ne De 0005 ib mH Da me W De Da nr ib a i ns wW mo Da mi Do am 06 ma w me Da wis of ae 06 Figure 10 5 Use this dialog box to enter either hexadecimal or binary numbers for the PROM RAM device Edit Pulser Use Edit gt Edit Items gt Edit Pulser to change the pro grammed settings of a Pulser The pulse format time high time low and trigger mode are individually programmable for each Pulser in the circuit For a complete description of the Pulser refer to The Pulser in Chapter 5 Digital Logi
306. pin 1 is on the 16 298 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices right pin 2 is in the middle and pin 3 is on the left For the 2N5902 these pins correspond to the collector base and emitter respectively C 1 B 2 E 3 Click Add to add the new reference You can now select the new model alphabetically from the list of npn transistors Adding Existing Models to New Macro Symbol To add an existing model to a new macro symbol 1 Create a new nonfunctional macro device symbol as described earlier in this chapter Be sure to place the pins in the same order as they are listed in the syntax for the corresponding model For example if you are creating a new symbol for a diode you should place the anode pin first then the cathode pin to correspond with the SPICE definition of a diode This is not required but it will be easier to understand when filling in the Spice Data field for the device To link the new symbol to an existing model file you must name the new symbol appropriately For example you may want to name the symbol Diode A to link to the DIODE MOD file or Schottky A to link to the SCHOTTKY MOD file With the new macro expanded double click the device and then click Netlist to view the Edit Device Data dialog box Enter the following data e Auto Designation Prefix for the device For example Q for transistors D or CR for Diodes etc e Set the Spice Prefix Character s for this device to be represent
307. r PRO only 6 150 AL Arale Mode Pat i J Mal 770 Mec 4 9 eb L77 4dk ALSTOM cd 3 120 Urn cad E 1 ao 10b ik L k Iik JH Bertso Ke traqueray ida Pewol cage del Figure 6 26 Temperature Sweep Analysis waveforms Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis lets you do multiple simulation runs with device values randomly varied according to specified tolerances You can use this feature only when you have enabled one or more of the standard analyses AC DC or Transient Furthermore CircuitMaker saves data only for nodes that have a Run Time Test Point Subcircuit data is not varied during the Monte Carlo Analysis Only basic components and models can be varied The items in the Monte Carlo Setup dialog box are as follows Option Description Simulation Runs Enter the number of simulation runs you want CircuitMaker to perform For example if you enter 10 then CircuitMaker will run 10 simulation runs with different device values on each run within the specified tolerances Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker PRO only Seed CircuitMaker uses the specified seed to generate random numbers for the Monte Carlo runs The default seed value is 1 If you want to run a simulation with a different series of random numbers then you must change the seed value to another number Distribution You can choose from the following three distributions for random number generation in the Mont
308. r calculates device and lot tolerances independently using different random numbers and then adds them together The example in Figure 6 30 has a device tolerance of 5 and a lot tolerance of 10 and thus a total variation of up to 15 In general component values in the analysis vary independently unless a tracking number is assigned If you give two devices the same device tolerance tracking number and distribution then the same random number is used for both devices when the device values for a simulation run are calculated The same holds true for lot tolerances However device tracking and lot tracking are independent of each other In other words device tracking 1 and lot tracking 1 are unrelated To edit an item in the Specific Tolerances list in the Monte Carlo Setup dialog box 1 Select the item you want to change 2 Click Edit or click Delete to delete the item Impedance Plot Analysis An Impedance Plot Analysis shows the impedance seen by any two terminal source Normally plotted in the AC Analysis window an Impedance Plot does not have a separate setup dialog box To run an Impedance Plot Analysis run a standard simula tion then click the source s negative terminal with the Probe Tool An impedance plot appears in the selected analysis window This is especially useful to measure input and output impedance versus frequency in the AC Analysis window The impedance measurement is calculated from the voltage at the
309. r details on how to export waveform and circuit graphics Chapter 9 File Menu 9 207 9 208 Chapter 9 File Menu Directories and Files Button The default directories and files used by CircuitMaker are user definable Circuit Directory is the path to where CircuitMaker stores your circuit CKT files Model Direc tory is the path to where your SPICE model libraries are located Script Directory is the path to where your script SRP files are located User Library File is the path and file name of your USER LIB Macros file Note The DEVICEDB DAT HOTKEYDB DAT and SYMBOLDB DAT files must be in the same directory as USER LIB Show Pin Dots When checked the Show Pin Dots option will be activated by default The Show Pin Dots option will place a small dot at every connection point in the circuit This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Show Pin Dots in Chapter 12 Options Menu Show Bus Labels When checked the Show Bus Labels option will be acti vated by default The Show Bus Labels option displays bus labels in the circuit This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Show Bus Labels in Chapter 12 Options Menu Show Page Breaks When checked the Show Page Breaks option will be activated by default The Show Page Breaks option will display the page divisions according to the paper size selected for the printer This option is also accessible from the Options Menu See Show Page Breaks in C
310. r devices The node list in the Spice Data field is divided into two sections one for input nodes and one for output nodes Each of these sections is delimited by square brackets input nodes first followed by output nodes The nodes must be listed in the same order as the pins in the INPUTS and OUTPUTS statements in the SimCode The pin number used in the Spice Data field for example 11 21 etc indicates the position of each pin in the devices Pin Data list If that pin number is followed by the letter b for example 14bi that indicates that the pin is found in the Bus Data field rather than on the symbol itself and repre sents the actual pin number on the package The 1 and the o specify the pin type as input or output For the 7474 1 2 device symbol the Spice Data field is set to SD 14bi 7bi 11 2i 3i 41 140 lo 20 30 40 50 60 M When using these SimCode pin declarations INPUTS VCC GND PRE DATA CLK CLR OUTPUTS VCC_LD PRE_LD DATA_LD CLK_LD CLR_LD ON O the items in the Spice Data field have the following mean ings Item Meaning D Device Designation Abi VCC pin 14 on the actual package declared in Bus Data field Tbi GND pin 7 on the actual package declared in Bus Data field li PRE input 1st pin in Pin Data list 2i DATA input 2nd pin in Pin Data list 17 324 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only 3i CLK input 3rd pin i
311. r if the device is a macro circuit containing other analog devices see Chapter 16 Creating New Devices for more informa tion on new device creation Digital This check box identifies this as a device that can be used in CircuitMaker s Digital simulation mode The digital simulator can only simulate a device 1f there is digital SimCode for that device If you attempt to run a digital simulation using a device that does not have the Digital check box checked CircuitMaker displays a warning message and that device will be ignored in the simulation When creating your own device select this box only if the device is a macro circuit Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 91 containing other digital devices or was created using digital SimCode see Chapter 17 Digital SimCode for more on digital device creation Parameters This field stores information that affects the simulation of certain devices For digital SimCode devices this field would contain type digital It could then be followed by a list of parameters which are generally set in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box Some generic device models can be redefined by passing parameters as an alias to describe a specific device For example the parameter field of a crystal would contain alias XCRYSTAL and could be followed by a list of databook parameters that define that specific crystal Generally you enter these parameters in the Subcircuit Parameters dialog box
312. r mode Figure 5 5 Use the Edit Pulser dialog box to change pulse ticks and set free run or external trigger mode 3 Select External Trigger to use the Pulser as a program mable one shot In the External Trigger mode the CP1 and CP2 inputs serve as rising and falling edge trigger inputs respectively If either pin receives a trigger pulse then the outputs of the Pulser will go active on the next simulation tick and remain active for Pulse High ticks You can retrigger the Pulser in this mode so additional trigger pulses occurring before the completion of the cycle will cause the active time to be extended for another cycle 5 110 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Data Sequencer You can use the Data Sequencer Instruments Analog G device in both digital and analog simulation modes Also known as a Data or Word Generator it allows you to specify up to 32767 8 bit words which can be output in a defined sequence Since there is no limit to the number of Data Sequencers that you can use in a circuit you could place several in parallel to create a data stream of any width Double click the Data Sequencer with the Arrow Tool to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 5 6 ral Cal EE LE a ET Figure 5 6 Use the Edit Data Sequencer dialog box to edit stimulus for your circuits Start Address is the address of the data that outputs first when the simulation begins Sto
313. r of individual LEDs follow these steps 1 Select one or more LEDs 2 Choose View gt Colors or double click the LED 3 Change color for the Sel LEDs item Chapter 13 View and Window Menus 13 239 d a n ipl lee Figure 13 1 Use the Select Colors dialog box to change the color of different types of items The color you select in this example becomes the default LED color for all new LEDs You can change Logic Display colors by double clicking them You can also individually select the color of 7 segment displays analog waveforms etc 4 Choose All Items in the Select Colors dialog box list to set everything except the background to the same color 5 Click Defaults to restore everything to its original color 6 Click Save Selections to save the selected colors even after quitting CircuitMaker Display Scale This feature lets you select the scale at which a circuit is displayed It also lets you select the Scale Step of the Zoom Tool See Figure 13 2 A TES cada Step Sire fea x FF dete Beaks Step CJ e Figure 13 2 This dialog box controls the scale of the displayed circuit and the scale step of the Zoom Tool 13 240 Chapter 13 View and Window Menus Normal Size Position This feature changes the circuit display scale to 100 and moves the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to their home positions Fit Circuit to Window This feature will reduce or enlarge the c
314. r the device 4 Left click the mouse to place the device in the workspace Note To repeatedly place identical devices choose Options gt Auto Repeat or Ctrl R Selecting Devices Use the Arrow Tool to select and move devices around the workspace There are four different ways of selecting items in the circuit window Selecting a Single Item To select a single item click it with the Arrow Tool Click anywhere else in the work area to deselect the item Selecting Multiple Items To select multiple items hold down the Shift key and click on one or more items with the Arrow Tool To deselect any single item click on it a second time while still holding down the Shift key To deselect all items release the Shift key and click somewhere in the work area away from all items You can also select multiple items by holding down the mouse button and dragging a selection rectangle around the desired items This method works especially well for selecting switches because clicking on a switch will not always select it unless you click on the outer edge of the switch To deselect any single item from a group of selected items Shift click on it To deselect all items click in the workspace away from all items 4 78 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Selecting All Items To quickly select all items choose Edit gt Select All Nudging Devices To slightly nudge a device in any direction select a single device and then p
315. rain gate and source nodes respectively MNAME is the model name AREA is the area factor and OFF indicates an optional starting condition on the device for Operating Point Analysis The initial condition specification using IC VDS VGS only applies if the UIC option is enabled for the Transient Analysis See Also N MESFET P MESFET Subcircuits General Form XYYYYYYY N1 lt N2 N3 gt SUBNAM Netlist Example XU1l 7 5 6 12 3 XLM741 Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 4 5 S Subcircuits are used in SPICE by specifying the device designation beginning with the letter X followed by the circuit nodes to be used in expanding the subcircuit followed by the subcircuit name See Also Subcircuits example circuit ANALOG CKT Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 271 15 272 SimCode Devices General Form AXXXXXXX NPI NGI NI1I lt NI2I gt NPO NI10 lt NI20 gt NO1O lt NO20 gt MNAME Netlist Example A2 6 8 4 7 9 5 2404B Spice Data Example SD 4bi 2bi 1i 4bo lo 20 M All nodes listed in a digital SimCode device are the digital nodes of the device NPI and NGI are the digital input nodes to the power and ground pins NIL NI2I etc are the digital input nodes to the device s input pins NPO is the digital output node from the power pin NILO NRO etc are the digital output nodes from the device s input pins NO1O NO20 etc are the digital output nodes from the device s output pins
316. ration as well as the editing required if device geometries are to be changed PD and PS are the perimeters of the drain and source junctions in meters NRD and NRS designate the equivalent number of squares of the drain and source diffusions these values multiply the sheet resistance RSH specified in the model for an accurate representation of the parasitic series drain and source resistance of each transistor PD and PS default to 0 0 while NRD and NRS default to 1 0 OFF indicates an optional starting condition on the device for DC analysis The initial condition specification optional using IC VDS VGS VBS only applies if the UIC option is enabled for the Transient Analysis when a transient analysis is desired starting from other than the quiescent operating point See the IC device for a better and more convenient way to specify transient initial conditions The TEMP value optional is the temperature at which this device is to operate and overrides the temperature specifica tion in the Analog Options dialog The temperature specifi cation is ONLY valid for level 1 2 3 and 6 MOSFETs not for level 4 or 5 BSIM devices See Also N MOSFET 3T N MOSFET 4T P MOSFET 3T P MOSFET 4T Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics MESFETs GaAsFETs General Form ZXXXXXXX ND NG NS MNAME lt AREA gt lt OFF gt lt IC VDS VGS gt Netlist Example Zl 3 5 6 ZM2 OFF Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 SM OFF ND NG and NS are the d
317. rder 5 7 Check Pin Connections 14 1 CHGTOL 15 6 Circles drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 Circuit Display Data 12 4 Circuit faults 8 4 managing 8 6 CircuitMaker conventions 2 3 drawing window 2 2 files 2 3 installing 1 2 introduction 1 1 preferences 2 8 required user background 1 1 simulation windows 2 2 starting 2 1 task overview 2 4 updating from previous version 1 3 whatis 1 1 windows 2 2 workspace 2 1 CircuitMaker files CKT 2 3 DAT 2 3 LIB 2 3 MOD 2 3 SRP 2 3 SUB 2 3 CircuitMaker to TraxMaker 7 13 Circuits analysis tutorial 3 8 changing background color 13 1 changing labels of 4 21 creating macro 16 19 drawing 4 1 drawing tutorial 3 1 exporting as graphics 4 34 7 8 labeling 4 21 simulating tutorial 3 8 simulating analog mixed signal 6 1 simulating digital 5 1 wiring 4 14 wiring tutorial 3 5 Closing a CKT file 2 9 Close command 9 2 Colors 5 2 changing 13 1 text 4 2 Compiling Simcode 17 4 Component noise measuring 6 32 Index 385 Connecting connection area 9 7 connectivity definition 2 2 single click 9 6 Connectors input 4 19 output 4 19 wiring with 4 19 CONVABSSTEP 15 10 Conventions CircuitMaker 2 3 User Manual 1 9 Convert ASCII Library 11 7 CONVLIMIT 15 10 CONVSTEP 15 10 Copying circuits 10 2 Copy command 10 1 disable for instruction 8 7 waveforms 10 2 Copyright ii COS 17 12 17 34 Coupled mutual inductors 15 16 Current sources 15 17
318. re Tool Use the Wire Tool to place wires in the work area Draw bus wires by holding down the Shift key when starting to draw the wire Refer to the sections Wiring the Circuit and Working with Bus Wires later in this chapter for more information Draw a dashed line by holding down the Alt key while drawing a wire Dashed lines act just like regular wires but if they are not connected to anything they will not be included in a netlist You can also activate the Wire Tool by pressing Alt W or by right clicking the mouse in the schematic background and choosing Wire from the pop up menu Text Tool Use the Text Tool to place text in the circuit Select the tool click in the work area and type the text Choose Edit gt Font to stylize the text or choose View gt Colors to assign a different color to text You can alter the way multi line text wraps by clicking it with the Text Tool and resizing its enclosing rectangle You can also select the Text Tool by pressing Alt T or by right clicking in the schematic back ground and choosing Text from the pop up menu Delete Tool Use the Delete Tool to selectively delete items Select the Delete Tool click on the item you want to delete and the item is immediately deleted except in the case of wires If you click and hold on a wire with the Delete Tool the wire is highlighted but not deleted until you release the mouse button If you hold down the mouse button and move the Delete Tool away f
319. rease the resistance of the ammeter When measuring pin junction resistance it may be desirable to increase the forcing current of the ohmmeter Multifunction Signal Generator You can place as many of CircuitMaker s multifunction signal generators in your circuit as you like Waveform TN functions include e Sinusoidal 1 0kHz e Single Frequency AM e Single Frequency FM Exponential e Pulse including Triangle and Sawtooth e Piece Wise Linear The settings for each of these functions are edited through separate dialog boxes which are described in the following sections 6 164 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Accessing the Signal Generator Editor After placing a Signal Gen Analog Instruments g in your circuit double click it with the Arrow Tool to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 38 Edi ens a Dala Figure 6 38 This dialog box shows the settings for the currently selected waveform function All of the waveform dialog boxes have the following items in common Volts Amps Allows you to select whether this is a voltage or current source Netlist Button Displays the Edit Device Data dialog box described in Editing Devices in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Wave Button Displays the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 39 allowing you to change waveform functions for this generator To change waveform functions click one of the function buttons and specify this generator s eff
320. related to schematic simulation pcb netlists and other purposes To edit a device 1 Double click on a device to display the Edit Device Data dialog box shown in Figure 4 8 Note A different dialog box will appear when you double click on certain devices so click the Netlist button to get to the Edit Device Data dialog box Spie Dels i a1 DOC ae FF Packets Pom PC E Eaki fira Paste KE LA Figure 4 8 Use the Edit Device Data dialog box to enter or change a variety of device information Device This non editable field shows the device name as it appears in the library menus Use the Visible check box to show or hide the name in the schematic If visible the device name retains the same orientation as the device when you rotate it The label value designation and description however will remain right side up no matter how the device is rotated 4 88 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics The Label Value field has a tri state Visible check box Label Value Lo iat visible Label Value is visible Label Value is visible and retains same orientation as device when rotated Note that some device names such as Resistor cannot be made visible Label Value Use this field to enter information about the device such as its label 1N914 2N3904 etc or its value 47K 100U etc or to replace the existing Device name that is make the Device not visible and the Label visible The Lab
321. ress the Left Arrow Right Arrow Up Arrow or Down Arrow key as illustrated in Figure 4 5 A single nudge shifts the device one pixel whether or not Snap to Grid is enabled Note The nudge feature does not work if you have selected wires or multiple devices It only works with a single device RF 100k mi in 100m 100107 e 1 Figure 4 5 Use the Left Right Up or Down Arrow key to nudge a selected device more precisely Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 79 Wire Tool Tip You can also draw wires with the Arrow Tool if you have enabled the Arrow Wire option on the Options menu Wiring the Circuit To simulate and generate PCB netlists properly the compo nents in your circuit must be correctly wired together CircuitMaker s Auto Routing Manual Routing and Quick Connect methods are fully integrated and automatic so you don t have to choose or switch between wiring modes A valid connection point for wiring is any device pin or wire Wiring Method How to Use Auto Wire Routing Click and drag with the Wire Tool from any valid connection point to another connection point then release Manual Wire Routing Click with Wire Tool to start wire single click to change directions then single click on a connection point or double click to end wire Quick Connect Place or move a device with the Arrow Tool so that unconnected pins touch a wire or other device pins The SmartWires
322. return to the Device Selection dialog box after placing a device 4 Click Place to select the device for placement in your circuit or just double click the item to be selected in the Device Symbol list or the Model Subcircuit list Notice that the device follows the mouse around the screen until you click the Left mouse button Filtering Devices in the Parts Browser The Show Analog Digital and Symbol check boxes in the Device Selection dialog box see Figure 4 2 let you filter the devices shown to reduce the number of parts to search through e Check Analog to display the devices which function in CircuitMaker s Analog simulation mode e Check Digital to display the devices which function in CircuitMaker s Digital Logic simulation mode e Check Symbol to display the nonfunctional schematic symbols For example if you are looking for digital devices to use in Analog simulation mode you could uncheck both Digital and Symbol to hide all the devices which will not run in Analog simulation mode At least one of the three boxes must be checked at all times Note that above the picture of the device symbol are the words Digital Only Device Analog Only Device Analog Digital Device or Schematic Only Device This indicates the simulation mode for which the currently displayed device will function properly Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics HotKeys You can also select devices by pressing a predefined HotKey on t
323. roh_param for H HI_IMPEDANCE set output to r3s_param Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 375 CircuitMaker PRO only If a strength character is not specified after an output state then STRONG will be used for L and H states and HI_IMPEDANCE will be used for Z states Notes Each row is tested sequencially from top to bottom until the input conditions are met The outputs are set for the first row to meet the input conditions The lt line gt is set to the line number in the table that was used If no match was made then lt line gt is set to 0 Input pin and variable names cannot be mixed in the same TABLE statement References to inputs must be either all pin names or all variable names Example TABLE tblIndex INA INB OUT 0 0 H 0 ul H 1 0 H 1 At L This example is representative of 1 4 of a 7400 2 input NAND gate If input pins INA and INB are both high gt vih_param OUT is set to ZERO vol_param and STRONG rol_param and tblIndex is set to 4 See Also REALS STATE STATE_BIT EXT_TABLE VALUE Returns the value of the specified pin General Form VALUE lt pin gt Parameters lt pin gt Name of or index to a pin Use The VALUE function returns a real number that indicates the voltage level of the specified pin Example v VALUE D3 17 376 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only VIL_VIH_PERCENT Sets VIL and VIH values to a percentage of supply voltage General Form
324. rom the wire the wire is not deleted This allows you to see the complete extent of the wire that will be deleted before you actually delete it To delete just a 4 68 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics UATAL Use the Rotate 90 Button to rotate a selected device in increments of 90 Notice that the Label Value remains readable as the device rotates segment of wire right click on a wire with the Delete Tool and choose Delete Wire Segment and only the segment between the nearest corners or connections will be deleted Cut or divide a wire in two by holding down the Shift key and clicking the wire with the Delete Tool The wire is separated at the contact point You can also select the Delete Tool by pressing Alt D or by right clicking in the schematic background the mouse and choosing Delete from the pop up menu Or select an item and press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete that item Zoom Tool Use the Zoom Tool to magnify zoom in and reduce zoom out your circuit To zoom in select the Zoom Tool and position it over the area that you want to enlarge Click the left mouse button to magnify the circuit by the selected Scale Step size To zoom out select the Zoom Tool and position it over the area you want to reduce Hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button to reduce the circuit by the selected Scale Step Size You can also activate the Zoom Tool by pressing Alt Z or by right clicking t
325. rs This mixed signal or mixed mode simulation 1s possible because CircuitMaker includes accurate event driven behavioral models for its digital devices including TTL and CMOS digital devices Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 115 In Analog mode there are a also a wide variety of analyses that can be used in Analog mode to test and analyze various aspects of your design Digital Mode on the other hand is designed for purely digital logic simulation This mode is only used for digital circuits and depends solely on the logic states of the D Digital Mode devices that make up the circuit Digital mode simulation still takes into account propagation delays but they are unit delays instead of actual propagation delays No power Analog Mode supply is required and the digital device output levels are constant in this mode See Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation for more on this mode Devices and Simulation CircuitMaker provides four types of devices which can be used in different simulation modes Device Type Will Function In Digital Only device Digital simulation mode only Analog Only device Analog simulation mode only Analog Digital device Analog or Digital mode Schematic Symbolonly No functionality So any Analog Only and Analog Digital devices will function properly in Analog mode To find out the intended simulation mode for a device read the words above the symbol pictured in the Device Selection dial
326. rting to popular formats 7 11 OrCAD PCB II format 7 11 PADS format 7 11 Protel format 7 11 requirements 7 10 Tango format 7 11 TraxMaker 7 12 Persistent waveform 6 17 Piece Wise 6 58 17 45 Pin Data 17 8 Pin dots changing color of 13 1 showing 12 3 PinDown 16 13 PinDown 16 13 PinLeft 16 13 PinLeft 16 13 PinRight 16 13 PinRight 16 13 Pins changing color of 13 1 designations in Symbol Editor 16 4 drawing in Symbol Editor 16 4 editing information about 16 8 names in Symbol Editor 16 4 names of 4 31 numbers of 4 31 4 33 Pins shorted together 8 2 PinUp 16 13 PinUp 16 13 PIVREL 15 7 PIVTOL 15 7 Place Labels 10 4 Placing devices 4 12 POLY 15 22 Polygons editing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definition 16 11 Polylines editing in Symbol Editor 16 4 element definition 16 11 Position 13 3 POW 17 12 17 34 Power Bus 4 20 Power devices 15 4 Pre 5 0 digital circuits updating for analog simulation 1 5 Preferences 9 4 changing 2 8 introduction 2 8 restoring factory defaults 2 8 Prefix 4 24 present_time 17 7 17 49 Previous version updating from 1 3 previous_time 17 49 Printing adjusting print size 4 33 circuits 9 4 Fit to Page 9 4 print setup 9 3 the circuit 4 33 waveforms 9 4 Probe Tool 5 3 5 7 activating 5 4 current I 3 10 definition of states 5 4 high state 5 4 low state 5 4 meaning of letters in 6 5 power P 3 10 pulse state 5 4 selecting 6 5 tristate 5 4 unknown state 5 4 using 6 5 6 12 voltage V
327. s including component manufacturers engineering magazines and books You can also download them from the internet For example visit MicroCode Engineering s web page at www microcode com Editing SPICE Models with a Text Editor Since SPICE models and subcircuits are text files see Figure 16 10 they can be modified with a text editor such as Notepad If you edit this file with a word processor be sure to save the file ina TEXT ONLY format Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 295 prr T f ri gis WH A A e L E TLE FH ie P06 Cees Brel AA AL rai Pomer ren E a ib 4 t FF 16 11 de a rH St ger Figure 16 10 You can open SPICE data into any text editor and edit it directly Editing SPICE Models in CircuitMaker When you double click a device that has SPICE models associated with it the dialog box in Figure 16 11 appears Figure 16 11 This dialog box lets you select a diode model The currently selected model is highlighted in the list To select a different model click it with the mouse then click Select or just double click on the model If any subcircuits are found in the MOD file they are indicated by an x as the first character in the description instead of a p To edit or view an existing model 1 Click on the name of the model you want to edit or view 2 Click on the Edit button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 16 12 16 296 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices m ome ee oa
328. s now completely configured for one user Repeat steps 9 16 to configure CircuitMaker for each individual user Accessing a Project 1 Run CircuitMaker 2 The Select Project dialog box appears allowing you to find your personal project directory Browse the directories to find your CIRMAKER DAT file and click on the OK button Technical Support MicroCode Engineering Inc is dedicated to producing only the finest quality software and supporting customers after the initial purchase If you encounter problems while using CircuitMaker or just need general help contact us via phone FAX electronic mail or US Mail and we ll provide prompt and courteous support NOTE Please be prepared to provide your name and registration number found on the back of the User Manual Disk 1 or the CD jacket when contacting us Telephone 801 226 4470 FAX 801 226 6532 Internet http www microcode com Email support microcode com Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 28 CircuitMaker PRO only Notes Hints and Tips are written in the margins for better visibility US Mail MicroCode Engineering Inc 927 West Center Orem UT 84057 USA Future versions of CircuitMaker are planned so please feel free to write and let us know what features or additions you would like to see Our goal is to provide a product that will meet your needs and expectations so feedback from you the end user is essential About the Documentation C
329. se Options gt Border to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 12 6 2 Select Display Border On Screen to display a border that outlines the total allowed schematic area 3 Select Do Not Print if you don t want to print the border OR Select Print Around Entire Schematic to print the border so that it is only on the outside edges of the outside pages making a border around the entire schematic when the pages are arranged together OR Select Print Around Each Page to print the complete border on each page of your schematic Figure 12 6 Use the Border feature to add a coordi nate system border around your schematic for easily locating devices Chapter 12 Options Menu 12 237 12 238 Chapter 12 Options Menu CHAPTER 13 View amp Window Menus The View and Window menus contain features that give you control of various display options and windows If a check mark is shown beside an item then the item is currently enabled if a check mark is not shown beside an item itis not currently enabled The View Menu Toolbar Use the Toolbar option to display or hide the Toolbar For an overview of all Toolbar options see Chapter 2 Getting Started and Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Colors The Colors feature Figure 13 1 lets you select the color associated with several functions low level and high level and items Logic Display color Hex and ASCII Key Cap color For example to change the colo
330. se or click the Parts button on the Toolbar to display the Device Selection dialog box pictured in Figure 3 2 Note Throughout this tutorial the location of a device Parts Button in the library is indicated by its major and minor class and its default HotKey if applicable using this format K 0 major device class minor device class default HotKey For example a battery is found at Analog Power b You can also find devices through hotkeys in the Devices gt HotKeys1 and HotKeys2 menus By simply pressing a HotKey for example the letter b you can quickly select and insert a device into the workspace Parts Search Button Device Selection x Major Device Class Minor Device Class Device Symbol Analog Only Device Active Components NPN Trans B Analog Connectors PNP Trans B PNP Trans C Digital Animated Digital Basics Digital by Function MOSFETs Enh 4 Digital by Number SCRs Displays Triacs Example Macros Unijunction Fuses y Wacuum Tubes Model Subcircuit 480 Show M Analog M Digital Y Symbol Rotate so Mirror p Si 1 2W 804 500m4 90MHz GenPurp pkg T0 39 3 2 1 LabelWalue Help 2N2102 p Si TW 65V 14 90MHz Amp pkg T0 39 3 2 1 2N2218A p Si 800mw 40v 800m 250MH2 GenPurp pkg T0 39 3 2 1 2N2219 p Si 800mw 30 800m4 300MH2 GenPurp pkg T0 39 3 2 1 222224 2822194 p Si 800mw 40 S00m 350MH2 GenPurp pka TO 5 3 2 1 Hot Ke p Si 400mW 304 800m4 300MHz GenPup pka T0 18 3 2
331. seeeestenare ees 5 12 Contents x Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker s Simulation Modes oooooocccccccncccccccccccnncnnnnnanannnnnnonannnnnnos 6 1 Devices and Simulation ssscainoninin octetos 6 2 Overview of Analog Simulation oonoocccccnnnnicccocnnonoccccccnonanncancnnnnanancccnnns 6 2 Before You Use the Analog Simulator ccccccccecseeseeeceeeeeeeeseceesecseeseeeaeeeeeatens 6 2 Setting Up Analog Analysis siscccttsidacsdchesasdsaavaleinaianansssandveannininndenineduoraindawadaiaitad 6 3 Selecting Analog Simulation Mode visitan rd 6 3 Analog Simulation Tools cocinan di 6 3 Digital Analog Button a dia 6 4 Reset Button cccccccccsccssscseccsseessecseccssecseecsscsaeesseseeecssecsaeenescssecsaccaecaeecsaceneenaees 6 4 Step BOO arcada 6 4 Run Stop An teem Terese reer rte etme 6 4 Proba A aeta aaeeea aaa Eia araa aada 6 5 Trace Button cccccccccccssccssecceecsseessecseccsecussesesseecsseessesescseeessecsecceseseaesaeeeceaeenas 6 6 Waveforms Button cccccscccsccssccssecseccsecessecseccsecsaeesseceecseeessecseccaeenseecaeenseeaeenas 6 6 Vcc and Ground spatial nr ante arena np nmnr er teem tert em oer ene 6 6 Working with Test Points antoni 6 7 Test Point Typos siria 6 8 DetaullestPOM Sara 6 8 Exclusive Test Points anat os 6 8 Run Time Test Points vivan idad 6 9 Running the Simulation sssiccionisad cane siaiasenierehoadadaeneccemneaaas 6 11 Using the Analysis WiNdOWS ooooconnccccnnnniccc
332. seful if you have been waiting for a long simulation and want to analyze the data which has been collected so far but don t want to wait for the simulation to complete Figure 6 35 Use Quit to stop long simulations 9 Click Yes to display the graphics windows which let you analyze the simulation data that has been collected OR Click No to discard the simulation data Click Cancel to continue the simulation Note the simulation cannot always be stopped at a location where the data will be available for display NET and RAW File Output While the interactive XSpice simulation window is dis played CircuitMaker generates a SPICE netlist to disk in a temporary file called filename NET where filename is the name of the circuit file XSpice for Windows analyzes the netlist file and stores the simulation results in a file called Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 159 6 160 filename RAW The amount of time it takes to complete the simulation is based on the analyses that are enabled their sweep ranges the complexity of the circuit and the speed of your computer The RAW file can become very large for a complex simulation and is deleted when changes are made to the circuit You can greatly reduce the size of the RAW file by reducing the number of Test Points in the circuit and by disabling the ASCIOUTPUT option in the Analog Options dialog box See the Test Point Types section earlier in this chapter for more i
333. selected You can also search for multiple devices For example to select all the transistors enter Q in the Designation field All characters after the Q will be ignored in the search Rotate 90 This is the same as the Rotate 90 button described in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Chapter 10 Edit Menu 10 213 Mirror This is the same as the Mirror button described in Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Straighten Wires When you have wires with multiple bends sometimes you may want to clean them up a little This is a quick way of taking out some of the extra kinks without having to adjust the wire manually To straighten wires 1 Select the wires you want to straighten 2 Choose Edit gt Straighten Wires Place Labels This option lets you place the labels of all selected devices in their standard positions without rotating or mirroring Set Prop Delays Use Edit gt Set Prop Delays for Digital Logic Simulation only to alter the propagation delay of all selected devices The delay of a device determines how many simulation ticks it takes for a signal to propagate from the input to the output of the device 1 Select a device then choose Edit gt Set Prop Delay to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 10 2 2 Entera new value for the delay then click OK Edit Delay x Enter a delay from 1 to 14 mT Cancel Figure 10 2 Use the Edit Delay dialog box to alter the propagation d
334. shapes in Symbol Editor 16 5 switches 4 12 Semiconductor capacitors 15 15 Semiconductor resistors 15 13 Set Prop Delays 10 4 Setting up AC Analysis AC Sweep 6 20 analog analyses 6 18 analog SPICE variables 6 47 analysis of a circuit 3 16 breakpoints ina circuit 5 9 DC Analysis DC Sweep 6 19 DC Operating Point Analysis 6 22 export options 7 7 Fourier Analysis 6 29 Impedance Plot Analysis 6 41 Monte Carlo Analysis 6 36 multiple projects 1 6 Noise Analysis 6 32 Parameter Sweep Analysis 6 26 sweep trace labels 6 28 Temperature Sweep Analysis 6 35 Transfer Function Analysis 6 30 Transient Analysis 6 23 Setup button in waveform window 6 15 SETUP_HOLD 17 7 17 10 17 52 Shapes adding existing 16 6 selecting in Symbol Editor 16 5 SHORT 8 10 Show Bus Labels 4 19 12 3 Show LED LAMP display state setting up for exporting 7 7 Show Node Numbers 8 8 12 3 Show Page Breaks 4 33 12 3 Show Pin Dots 12 3 Show Prop Delays 5 6 12 4 Showing devices by analog 4 8 by digital 4 8 by symbol 4 8 Shunt resistors 15 12 Signal Generator 8 8 10 10 15 18 AC analysis 3 15 editor 6 51 magnitude 3 15 phase 3 15 using tutorial 3 15 Signal Selection 8 8 sim_temp 17 6 17 49 SimCode devices 15 28 17 1 Index 397 SIMLIST TXT file 17 4 Simulating a digital circuit tutorial 3 6 a mixed mode circuit tutorial 3 20 asimple AC circuit tutorial 3 12 Simulation Analog Mode 5 1 6 1 before you do a 6 2 Digital Mode 5 1 6 1 errors 6
335. sis of analog circuits using PSpice a commercial variation of the industry standard Berkeley SPICE Through examples this book demonstrates what a simulator can and cannot do Although this book is written specifi cally for PSpice much of the information it contains can be applied directly to CircuitMaker Vladimirescu A The SPICE Book John Wiley amp Sons Inc N Y 1994 ISBN 0 471 60926 9 Library TK454 V58 1994 621 319 2 028553 dc20 Written as a tutorial and reference for electrical engi neering students and professionals just starting to use the SPICE program to analyze and design circuits This book explains how to use the SPICE program and describes the differences and similarities between the most popular commercial versions of it including SPICE3 the latest version from Berkeley which is used by CircuitMaker Kielkowski R Inside SPICE McGraw Hill Inc N Y 1994 ISBN 0 07091 1525 Library TK 454 K48 1994 621 319 2 011353 dc20 Written as a tutorial and reference for electrical engi neering students and professionals who are familiar with the SPICE program This book goes beyond the basics and covers the internal operation of the SPICE program to give the reader a solid understanding of how SPICE works It provides step by step coverage of how to overcome nonconvergence numerical integration instabilities and timestep control errors It also shows how to make simulations run faster and more efficiently
336. sistance and DC gain To set up and run a Transfer Function Analysis 1 2 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup Click the Transfer button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 20 Transfer Setup x V Enabled Source fyin v Use Probe tool to select Reference node Cancel Figure 6 20 Use this dialog box to set up a Transfer Function Analysis Select the input source you want to consider from the Source drop down list Select the Enabled check box and choose OK Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker PRO only Note You do not need to specify the output node ahead of time However to specify a reference other than ground click a point in the schematic with the Probe Tool and check the TRANSFER Reference check box in the Run Time Test Point dialog box before you run the simulation 5 Run the simulation 6 Click the Transfer Function window and then click on any node in the circuit to see the Transfer Function data for that node 7 To display the Transfer Function data for multiple nodes hold down the Shift key when you click to display The data that appears indicates the transfer function from the input to the specified node Ch WUA citi 1006071 BEE 10 Hz iiiar oe AS what coria sb Pos F caia al IH renser Ponstian Fidh TIM Figure 6 21 Transfer Function Analysis data The waveform data in Figure 6 21 was generated by simulat ing th
337. sition to the circuit s output Thus the same component can contribute different amounts of noise to the output depending on its location in the circuit To set up and run a Noise Analysis 1 Select the output node by clicking the output node of the circuit with the Probe Tool This places a Run Time Test Point and displays the dialog box shown in Figure 6 22 In the dialog box that appears check the Enable Noise checkbox and make sure Out is selected 6 146 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation CircuitMaker PRO only FP TRAMA FER rimena FP Canabaras piot sah sara mairr and ode HORE T Sopas pedo che pag ete dere F Enba Out Re Cm Figure 6 22 Use this dialog box to set up Run Time Test Points for a Noise Analysis 2 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 3 Click the Noise button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 23 Hose finakein Setup F Enabled Ta Mose tesi pom El Mota bouos im a Sut Feng OH pawie op Freqrcp OHH C idna A eee EA ne Pros kaol br select Culpa aad Hel rocas im Figure 6 23 Use this dialog box to set up Noise Analysis 4 Specify the analysis information in the Noise Analysis dialog box If you want to measure the noise contribution of each component enter in the Points Per Summary field If you only want to measure input and output noise enter Oin this field 5 Run the simulation 6 View the input and output noise r
338. source CircuitMaker automatically converts them to the SPICE3 format each time you run a simulation Note For SPICE simulation voltage sources cannot be placed directly in parallel and current sources cannot be placed directly in series See Also NLV Source NLI Source I Math V Math Example circuit 741 CKT Lossless Transmission Lines General Form TXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 ZO VALUE lt ID VALUE gt lt F FREQ lt NL NRMLEN gt gt lt IC V1 11 V2 12 gt Netlist Example T1 3 0 2 0 Z0 50 TD 20NS Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 4 Z0 V TD 10NS Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics N1 and N2 are the nodes at port1 N3 and N4 are the nodes at port 2 ZO is the characteristic impedance The length of the line may be expressed in either of two forms one form must be specified The transmission delay TD may be specified directly as TD 10NS for example Alternately a frequency F may be given together with NL the normalized electrical length of the transmission line with respect to the wavelength in the line at the frequency F If a frequency is specified but NL is omitted 0 25 is assumed that is the frequency is assumed to be the quarter wave frequency The initial condition specification consists of the voltage and current at each of the transmission line ports Initial conditions only apply if the UIC option is enabled for the Transient Analysis The lossy transmission line described below with zero loss may
339. state value N A rol_param low output strength value N A roh_param high output strength value N A r3s_param tri state output strength value N A pwr_param voltage on power pin PWR value gnd_param voltage on ground pin GND value present_time present simulation time N A previous_time previous simulation time N A sim_temp circuit operating temperature N A Spice Option TEMP The Digital Model Parameter can be set independently for each digital device in the Digital Model Parameters dialog box If the variable is set explicitly in the SimCode that setting will override all other settings The values of pwr_param and gnd_param are set each time the PWR_GND_PINS statement is executed The value of present_time and previous_time are set each time the time step changes The value of sim_temp is the current operat ing temperature of the circuit which can be set from the Spice Option TEMP Example REALS tplh_val tphl_val ricc_val vbias values 64 See Also PWR_GND_PIN VIL_VIH_VALUE VIL_VIH_PERCENT VOL_VOH_MIN Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 365 CircuitMaker PRO only RECOVER Tests inputs for recovery time violations General Form RECOVER lt clk input gt LH HL lt mr input gt lt mr input gt TREC lt time gt TRECL lt time gt TRECH lt time gt lt message gt Parameters lt clk input gt Name of or index to the input clock reference pin under test lt mr input gt Name
340. symbols to the macro library see Updating 32 bit Macro Libraries or Updating 16 bit Macro Libraries below If you have added new SPICE models see Updating Model Libraries below Warning Be careful not to discard or overwrite your previous work Updating 32 Bit Macro Libraries If you are upgrading from a 32 bit version of CircuitMaker and have created your own macro devices or symbols follow these steps 1 Install the new version of CircuitMaker as described earlier Remember to install the new version in a different directory to avoid writing over your existing work Run CircuitMaker 2 Select Macros gt Macro Copier 3 Open the old USER LIB file as the Copy From file When asked if you want to list only the user defined devices click Yes 4 Open the USER LIB file from your new CircuitMaker directory as the Copy To file 5 Select the first device that you have created and click on the Copy button Repeat for each additional device that Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 23 you have created Each device copied will be placed in the new USER LIB file You may be prompted for information regarding the simulation mode for which a device is intended If the device can be used in digital simulations check the Digital box if it can be used in analog simulations check the Analog box If it can be used in either simulation mode check both boxes Updating 16 Bit Macro Libraries If you are upgrading from a 16 bit
341. t Below is the general text format Description alias XLINK SUBNAME pkg Package amp Pins PARAM XNEWNAME Data Description Description Information about the nature of the device such as voltage current etc XLINK The name of the subcircuit to be referenced The first letter will always be the appropriate SPICE character followed by the subcircuit name Vertical bar separator NOTE There cannot be a space between the vertical bar separator and the XLINK or SUBNAME SUBNAME The name of the subcircuit file sub where the subcircuit to be referenced is located This will include the first 8 characters not including spaces Do not include the sub extension pkg The package name and pin numbers in appropriate format for export to a PCB layout program such as TraxMaker NOTE See different sub files for examples of this format XNEWNAME The new name of the device as seen in the parts list Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 311 16 312 The following is an example of a subcircuit internal alias link Reference Instrumentation Amplifier LOW POWER pkg DIP8 3 2 7 4 6 5 1 8 PARAM XAD620A File AnalogD lib New Device Data Instrumentation Amplifier LOW POWER alias XAD620A INSTAMP pkg SMD8A 3 2 7 4 6 5 1 8 PARAM XAD620AR Creating New SPICE Models with Parameter Passing Parameter passing simplifies the task of creating new components It allows you to pass databook values directly into generic SPICE
342. t By default the cursor must be within 3 pixels of the connection point When the Sound On option is enabled the system will beep through the PC s speaker each time the cursor enters a connection area When the Show Box option 1s enabled a rectangle will appear around the connection area each time the cursor enters that area Auto Wire Routing Auto wiring can be simple or intelligent depending on which check box you select Simple routing draws only one or two wire segments horizontal and or vertical making the shortest path without regard for devices that might be in the way Intelligent routing tries to find a path which does not cross directly over any devices If no reasonable path can be found the simple method is used Default Transient Analysis These options allow you to control the parameters supplied to the Transient Analysis when the Default Setups button is pressed in the Analog Analyses dialog box These values are only used in circuits which contain one or more Signal Generators Cycles Displayed determines the number of cycles of the lowest frequency Signal Generator to be analyzed Points Per Cycle determines the resolution of the analysis Export Options Button Click on the Export Options button to access and modify the export options CircuitMaker will use when exporting circuits and waveforms as graphic files These export options can also be accessed from File menu directly See Chapter 7 Exporting Files fo
343. t Designations surco ililii 10 5 Edit gt Edit HEMS aaron 10 6 Edit Bus Connection ios 10 6 Edit Bus Wire Number iii ad 10 7 Edit Dvice DA dad tia 10 7 e AIS ienaa aana E aaae iena a iaae an 10 7 Edit Run Time Test Point unid ii ida 10 7 Edit Select SPICE Modal ianaisa 10 7 Edit PROM RAM osistaan cnain anaia iii 10 8 Edif PUISET ionn retenria a e Ea E A E r a EEEE 10 8 Edit MUItIMe ter ce ececcesecseccsecsseecseccsecsseessecsecuseecsecesecsseesseceecseeessecseccauecsaeaees 10 9 Edit NINN OMIA secors a A 10 9 Edit Data Sequence adas id 10 9 Edit Signal Generator slds tele deas 10 10 Edit Scope Probe Names iusnarscaidanida rd ii dai 10 10 A aca ancl deaceietoayioenioanbaehiasetateiatinatet 10 10 FORT AAA IA 10 11 Chapter 11 Macros Menu New Mac Darse dic 11 1 Edit Macro A A A A 11 1 Save MACI N a a a a a 11 2 o i tater cs tated istipee et de amerian tends lieeaasonorbiwcausuabadeboneteketaeemenstd 11 2 Macro otra ri 11 3 Macro Utilities ios E EEAO 11 4 Save Macio are A Ee EER 11 4 Class Selected Device oo ceecceccccssessscessecesseceeseeesseeesceasecneesaueseaseseseeeasseeasenaas 11 5 Expand Maci O serrie e e a E E a eames 11 5 Delete Mac cria a a a eee a aae a idant 11 5 Model Data sssini ontara ara ea a anA aaaea E n aea iaaa Nataan 11 6 Macro Copier ralla 11 6 Save ASCI NAN todas 11 7 Convert ASCII Library icons 11 7 Update Search sE as 11 8 Contents XV Chapter 12 Options Menu Auto RP ii inca ano eee eects aes 12 1 A
344. t also lets you specify which rows addresses and columns bits are affected For example you could fill just one column with a count up sequence to produce a stream of ones and zeros on a single output Or you could fill rows 23 67 with ones in just 5 columns and fill the same rows with a repeating Shift 0 Left in the other 3 columns 5 112 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation The Increment field indicates how many rows will contain the same data before the next change in pattern For example with an increment of 3 a Shift 1 Left pattern shifts on every third pattern row You can set the maximum pattern size for each Data Se quencer This lets you create small patterns for several Data Sequencers without allocating large amounts of memory or creating large circuit files The Max number of pattern lines by default is set to 32 but can be increased as needed to as many as 32767 It can never be smaller than the Stop Address When you increase the maximum number of pattern rows the new rows are filled with zeros If you decrease the maximum number of pattern rows any pattern data that was stored in the upper addresses is lost perma nently Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 113 5 114 Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation CHAPTER 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation One of CircuitMaker s most powerful features is circuit simulation allowing you to try variations in a design and troubleshoot it before you invest time and mo
345. t is used to loop through a section of SimCode until lt expression gt evaluates to false Notes Program flow will remain in a loop between the BEGIN and END statements until lt expression gt evaluates to false then program flow resumes after the END statement Examples i 1 WHILE i lt 5 DO BEGIN data i data i 1 de NES END See Also IF THEN 17 380 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only WIDTH Tests inputs for minimum pulse width violations General Form WIDTH lt input gt lt input gt TWL lt time gt TWH lt time gt lt message gt Parameters lt input gt Name of or variable index to the input pin under test TWL Width of a low going pulse TWH Width of a high going pulse lt message gt Text string that will be displayed if a warning occurs Use The WIDTH function compares the pulse width on each lt ipin gt to the specified test WIDTH times A low level test time is specified using TWL lt time gt while a high level test time is specified using TWH lt time gt If the compare time is less than the specified lt time gt a WARNING will be dis played An optional lt message gt string can be included in the WIDTH statement which will be output if a WARNING is displayed Notes Databook specifications should be used with this function The input pins can be input pin names and or integer variables that contain an index value to an input pin Pin
346. t no charge replace defective CDs diskettes or CDs diskettes that are returned within ninety 90 days of the date of purchase MicroCode Engineering warrants that the program will perform in substantial compliance with the enclosed documentation If you reporta significant defectin writing to MicroCode Engineering and MicroCode Engineering is unable to correct it within ninety 90 days you may return the entire software package for a refund Under no conditions will MicroCode Engineering s liability exceed the purchase price of this software NOLIABILITY OF ANY FORM SHALL BE ASSUMED BY MICROCODE ENGINEERING OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES NOR SHALL DIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES BE ASSUMED BY MICROCODE ENGINEERING EVEN IF MICROCODE ENGINEERING HAS BEEN ADVISED OFSUCH DAMAGES Disclaimer CircuitMaker is a simulation program that in most cases produces results very similar to a real life circuit It is however only a simulation program and is not expected to provide exactly the same results as a real life circuit in every instance While MicroCode Engineering Inc has tried to provide a product which is suitable to a wide variety of applications we realize that it cannot produce satisfactory results in all applications CircuitMaker allows you to minimize the amount of breadboarding required to produce a functional circuit but it must not be used as a replace ment for proper breadboarding MicroCode Engineering Inc reserves the right
347. t the timing diagrams for those nodes are shown in a separate digital Waveforms window The timing information is updated continuously to show changes as they happen in real time Connect any of a variety of displays and note the conditions shown on them Use the Probe Tool to probe any wire in the circuit either during simulation or after you have stopped it The logic states seen by the Probe Tool can also be charted in the Waveforms window Digital Logic Simulation Tools Several buttons in the Toolbar are used specifically for simulation This section describes these tools Note The functionality of these buttons is somewhat different in CircuitMaker s Analog mode See Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation for more information Step Button Probe Tool Waveforms Y AS Button Reset Button Run Stop Button Trace Button Digital Analog Button Dj Click the Digital Analog button to choose the simulation mode you want to use When the AND gate icon is dis played you are in Digital simulation mode when the transistor icon is displayed you are in Analog mode Reset Button Click the Reset button to restart the simulation You can also reset by choosing Simulation gt Reset or by pressing Ctrl Q Chapter 5 Digital Logic Simulation 5 103 Step Button qj Click the Step button to run the simulation for one step or simulation tick You can also choose Simulation gt Step or press F9 Use the Simulat
348. tatement 17 366 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only Example RECOVER CLK LH PRE CLR TREC trec_val CLK gt PRE or CLR RETURN Returns from a subroutine in the SimCode General Form RETURN Use The RETURN instruction is used to return program flow to the instruction that followed the last GOSUB instruction See Also GOSUB SELECT_VALUE Returns value from simple look up table General Form SELECT_VALUE lt index gt lt val pin var gt lt val pin var gt lt val pin var gt Parameters lt index gt input variable index to lt val pin var gt lt val pin var gt output value pin or variable Use The SELECT_VALUE function returns the value of the number or variable indicated by the value of the index variable Notes The number of values and or variables used is not limited Example A SELECT_VALUE B 16 8 4 2 1 In this example if B 2 then A 8 the 2nd value See Also PWL_TABLE MIN_TYP_MAX Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 367 CircuitMaker PRO only SETUP_HOLD Tests inputs for setup and hold time violations General Form SETUP_HOLD lt clk input gt LH HL lt data input gt lt data input gt TS lt time gt TSL lt time gt TSH lt time gt TH lt time gt THL lt time gt THH lt time gt lt message gt Parameters lt clk input gt Name of or index to the input clock reference pin under test lt d
349. ter Use The PARAM_SET function is used to determine if a param eter in the SimCode model definition has been set It returns 1 if the specified parameter was set e g vil_param 0 8 otherwise it returns 0 Notes See INTEGER and REAL declarations for a list of SimCode model definition parameters and their associated variable names Example A PARAM_SET 1d_param IF PARAM_SET voh_param THEN See Also INTEGERS REALS 17 358 Chapter 17 Digital SimCode CircuitMaker PRO only PROMPT Pauses simulation and displays a message General Form PROMPT lt message gt lt value pin gt Parameters lt message gt Message string including formatting characters as needed lt value gt Variable or constant value lt pin gt Pin name or index to pin variable Use The PROMPT statement is used to stop simulation and display the information specified by the lt message gt string The message is displayed in the XSpice window during simulation The user must click on a button to continue execution of the SimCode Notes A format string in PROMPT is similar to a format that may be used in a printf statement in C Valid formatting characters include but are not limited to t tab n new line r carraige return od Deciaml display for short variable or current input output state D Decimal display for short variable or old input output state Tox Hex display for short variable or current i
350. ter or export the circuit to a file and use it in documentation presentations etc Printing Circuits To print a circuit choose File gt Print If your design is larger than a single sheet of paper it will automatically be printed on multiple sheets of paper To see where page breaks occur choose Options gt Show Page Breaks Adjusting Print Size There are various ways to adjust the print size of your schematic in CircuitMaker Choose File gt Print Setup and select Fit to Page and the schematic will be automatically be scaled to fit ina single page or choose Scale and enter the percentage you would like the circuit scaled to Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 99 OR Choose Options gt Show Page Breaks and click and drag one of the page breaks until the circuit fits in the page as you want it to print Other print options are also available including color printing See Print Setup in Chapter 9 File Menu You can also print digital timing diagrams analog waveforms title blocks borders and grids See Chapter 12 Options Menu for more information Exporting Circuits as Graphics You can export CircuitMaker circuit schematics and use them in documentation presentations etc You can either save the circuit as a graphic file or copy and paste the circuit directly into another software program Use the Export Circuit as Graphic option to save the circuit to disk as a Windows Metafile Device Independent
351. the Attribute File button to find and select the file 3 Define the attributes in the attribute file and enter the names of the attributes in the Include Attributes field of the Bill of Materials dialog box If you use an attribute file devices that match an entry in the attribute file will have the defined attributes listed in the attribute column in the Bill of Materials An entry in an attribute file must have one of the following two comma delimited formats Chapter 7 Exporting Files Format 1 Label Value Package Description Attribute Name Attribute Data This format is used for all devices except for resistors capacitors and inductors Example ua741 DIP8 MFG FairChild Format 2 Spice Prefix R C or L Package Description Attribute Name Attribute Data This format is used for resistors capacitors and inductors Example c CAP0 2 MFG Mallory A device is considered to match an entry in the attribute file if the label value or spice prefix package and description of the device match those of the entry in the attribute file The matching is case insensitive You can use an asterisk wild card to indicate that a match for a particular item is not required In the Format ua741 example only the Label Value and the package must match The description does not need to match because of the asterisk A single line in the attribute file can only contain one attribute Additional attri
352. the fault data for this device Run the simulation again to see if the problem has been fixed Stop the simulation Choose File gt Preferences and then click the Circuit Fault Data button to display the Access Faults dialog box Type xxx into the Fault Lock Password text box then click OK to exit the Circuit Faults dialog box Notice that there was one device replaced and one hint displayed On the File gt Preferences gt Circuit Faults dialog box click the Device Data Display check box to remove the check and delete the xxx from the Fault Lock Password field Click the Select Replaced Devices button Click OK to exit the Circuit Faults dialog box then click OK to exit the Preferences dialog box The device that was replaced the filter cap is selected Chapter 8 Fault Simulation CHAPTER 9 File Menu The File menu contains commands that enable you to open save and print circuits and waveforms New Select New to clear the current circuit from the work area and begin a new circuit If an unsaved circuit is present in the work area when you select this command you will be asked if you want to save the current circuit first Open Choose Open to abandon the current circuit and load a different circuit into the workspace If an unsaved circuit is present in the work area you will be asked if you want to save the current circuit first A file selector dialog will then be displayed allowing you to choose the c
353. tic 4 72 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Listing and Selecting Devices CircuitMaker comes with a library of several thousand devices see the Device Library book for a complete list of the devices and instruments You can select devices or parts from the library using the graphical parts browser see Figure 4 2 HotKey shortcuts or the Device Search feature The Graphical Parts Browser You can graphically browse through the parts in CircuitMaker from the Device Selection dialog box The parts are listed by Major Device Class Minor Device Class Device Symbol and Model Subcircuit Figure 4 2 The Device Selection dialog box lets you graphically browse and select from a library of several thousand devices To list and select a device 1 Click the Parts Button on the Toolbar OR Select Devices gt Browse OR Press the x key on the keyboard Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 73 4 74 2 Locate the device you want to place by first selecting a Major Device Class a Minor Device Class a Device Symbol and if applicable a specific model or subcircuit In this manual device location is indicated as major class minor class For example a 2N3904 could be found at Active Components BJTs Notice that the schematic symbol for the part you select is shown Use the Rotate 90 and Mirror buttons in the dialog box to view each device in other orientations 3 Select the Return check box if you want to
354. tical making the shortest path without regard for devices that might be in the way Intelligent routing tries to find a path which does not cross directly over any devices If no reasonable path can be found the simple method is used Manual Routing Manual routing lets you freely place wires exactly where you want them It also lets you place free wires in your circuit that are not connected to anything Note To draw bus wires use the manual routing method To route wires manually 1 Select the Wire Tool from the Toolbar 2 Move the tool to the position where you want to start the wire 3 Click and release the left mouse button The Wire Tool cursor disappears and is replaced with an extended wiring cursor The extended cursor simplifies the task of precisely aligning wires with other objects 4 Click once with the left mouse button to turn 90 or double click to end the wire 5 Single click the mouse to terminate the wire when it is at a valid connection point if you have enabled the Single Click Connect option in the Preferences dialog box Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 81 6 Tocancela wire at any time while you are drawing it press any key or right click with the mouse Quick Connect Wiring One of the easiest methods for wiring is to use the Quick Connect wiring method This feature allows you to simply touch unconnected device pins to wires or other uncon nected device pins and the connec
355. tion Prefix Data entered now in the Device Data dialog box will be there every 16 294 Chapter 16 Creating New Devices time this macro device is selected from the library menus Note For compatibility with TraxMaker the Package field must match the name of the correspond ing component in TraxMaker 7 Save the Macro choose Macros gt Save Macro Working with SPICE Models SPICE is an industry standard program for simulating circuits In order to make devices work in analog simulation there must be SPICE data available for each device Using the Symbol Editor you can include SPICE model and subcircuit information with a new or existing device You can also edit SPICE information using an ASCII Text Editor Note If you intend to create new device symbols to export a PCB netlist or simply draw schematics you do not need to include SPICE information However even if you are going to simulate your circuit adding SPICE models from other sources is easy and beneficial To learn more about SPICE see Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics There are 3 basic types of components in SPICE e Elementary components such as resistors capacitors power sources etc e Models defining discrete devices such as BJTs J FETs MOSFETs etc Subcircuits which combine multiple items such as elementary components models and other subcircuits to create a more complex device SPICE models and subcircuits are available from many source
356. tion mode the specified pins will be connected together through a daisy chain of invisible resistors of an instructor specified value Wrong Value For Analog Simulation mode only The Fault Label Value replaces the Label Value for the device during simulation User Defined For Analog Simulation mode only The SPICE model or subcircuit specified in the Label Value for the device is replaced during simulation by the model or subcircuit specified in the Fault Label Value The faulty model or subcircuit may be one that has been modified by the instructor to operate incorrectly I Esai he tkrar Gte Drs Fell I itera High Fm Label T inaral Lor Fis WALUE TYPE SELECTED FANS Demos Fin sm eH pamm m po 1 Ara ana Ari Hera AAA ars Figure 8 1 Use the Device Faults dialog box which you access from the Edit Device Data dialog box to set up faults for the device 8 190 Chapter 8 Fault Simulation Adding Device Faults To add faults to a device follow these steps 1 Double click the device to display the Edit Device Data dialog box 2 Click Faults to display the Device Faults dialog box Following is a description of the various items on the Device Faults dialog box see Figure 8 1 Enable Device Faults When checked the faults specified for this device will be enabled It is enabled automatically when you edit fault data Fault Label Value Use this text box to enter the wrong value and user
357. tion on some of the other types of data that can be plotted with the Probe Tool e Click on a wire to measure voltage e Click on a device pin to measure current e Click ona device body to measure power If CircuitMaker indicates that current or power data is not available then go to Simulation gt Analyses Setup gt Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation Tip You can nudge waveforms and cursors around the analysis window by selecting a waveform or cursor and using the arrow keys on the keyboard Waveform Scaling and Editing Controls Analog Options and select the Node Voltage Supply Current Device Current and Power radio button in the lower right hand corner of the dialog box 2 Hold down the Shift key and click to plot or stack multiple waveforms simultaneously in the analysis window Note that clicking on another point in the circuit without holding the Shift key will replace the previous waveform with a new one Hold down the Ctrl key and click to set a new voltage reference for the active analysis window the default reference is ground Plotting Subcircuit Internal Variables By default CircuitMaker doesn t collect simulation data for any subcircuit s internal variables To plot a subcircuit s internal variables 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click Analog Options 3 Click the radio button titled Node Voltage Supply Current and Device Subcircuit VARs then choose OK 4 Ru
358. tions are made automati cally To wire using Quick Connect 1 Choose a new device from the library OR Nudge or click and drag an existing device with the Arrow Tool 2 Move the device so that the end of the unconnected pin s touches a wire or other device pin s 3 Once placed CircuitMaker will connect the device to the wire or pin it is touching NOTE Placing a device so that two pins are parallel over a wire will automatically connect both ends and insert that device into the wire segment as in illustration 3 at left The same connection area size used by SmartWires de scribed previously is used by the Quick Connect feature This connection area determines how close you must be to a wire or pin before CircuitMaker will automatically make the connection and can be altered in the Preferences dialog box By default the Quick Connect option is always active To turn off Quick Connect go to File gt Preferences or Options gt Quick Connect to uncheck and deactivate the Quick Connect option Extending Joining and Cutting Wires Wires are fully editable and can be extended joined and cut To extend a wire 1 Select the Wire Tool from the Toolbar 2 Place it over the end of the wire and start a new wire to extend the existing one 4 82 Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics Bus connection wires Bus wire To join two wires together 1 Draw a wire from the end of the first wire to the end of t
359. title block also expands in width according to the amount of text that you enter You can print the title block on Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics 4 71 the first page on the last page or on all pages Additionally you can print the full title block on the first page and a reduced title block that is one that does not include the Name and Title fields on subsequent pages Choose Options gt Title Block to access the Title Block setup options Borders Use this option to quickly locate devices by displaying a coordinate grid system around your schematic see Figure 4 1b for an example For example suppose you want to find a device that you know is located in the B 5 grid square By drawing an imaginary line from the letter B and the number 5 on the margins of the schematic the intersection of these lines locates the grid square containing the device To add a border to your schematic drawing 1 Choose Options gt Border to display the Border dialog box 2 Select Display Border On Screen to display a border that outlines the total allowed schematic area 3 Select Do Not Print if you don t want to print the border OR Select Print Around Entire Schematic to print the border so that it is only on the outside edges of the outside pages making a border around the entire schematic when the pages are arranged together OR Select Print Around Each Page to print the complete border on each page of your schema
360. to the Windows clipboard 2 From the Symbol Editor select Clipboard WMF as the existing shape see Adding an Existing Shape earlier in this section Note Only the vector graphics shapes lines rect angles circles etc in the Metafile object will be converted Colors bitmaps and text will not be included Adding DIP LCC and QFP Packages Use the Symbol Editor to quickly create DIP Dual In line Package LCC and QFP symbols LCC and QFP are square outlines with an equal number of pins on each side The LCC symbol has pin 1 on the center of the top side The QFP symbol has pin 1 on the top of the left side You can control the size of the package you are adding using the Scale value and the number of Pin name chars you enter You can specify the width of the DIP LCC and QFP symbols however DIPs cannot be scaled directly they can only be rotated and mirrored See Figure 16 2 for an example of the LCC symbol Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 281 Figure 16 2 Use the Symbol Editor to quickly add DIP QFP and LCC symbols To add a DIP LCC or QFP symbol 1 5 From the Symbol Editor specify the number of pins in 2 pin increments in the Pins per Pkg field Select the Scale 100 by default Click the Add Pkg button Move the package to the desired location Note You can press the Spacebar to cancel this operation Click the Left mouse button to place the package Editing Pin Information Pin nam
361. tors very low that are daisy chained between each of the selected pins Internal High Low Check Boxes Use these options for digital simulation only they do not affect analog simulation Stuck high and stuck low faults are assumed by default to be external to the device Due to the nature of the digital simulation it is desirable to use internal high low faults on input pins and external high low faults on output pins For this reason you should not have an input pin and an output pin both stuck high or both stuck low on the same device Hint Message The instructor can type a brief hint about the nature of the fault in this field that the student can access while trouble shooting the circuit Fault Password The instructor can enter a password in this text box to restrict access to the fault data If a password is entered here all fault data will be password protected If the pass word is deleted the fault data will no longer be protected Passwords are case sensitive and may be up to 15 characters in length They may include any printable character exclud ing Tab or Enter Password protection e Restricts access to the Device Faults dialog box e Restricts access to the Circuit Faults dialog box Eliminates fault comments from the SPICE NET file Chapter 8 Fault Simulation Using the Access Faults Dialog Box Tf the fault data has been password protected the Access Faults dialog box pictured in Figure 8 2 appears
362. tory defaults See Chapter 9 File Menu for more information Changing Preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences 2 Make the desired changes then choose OK Restoring Factory Defaults If your Preferences settings have become confused you can restore them to the way they were when you first started CircuitMaker 1 Choose File gt Preferences 2 Choose Factory Settings then choose OK Chapter 2 Getting Started E ol E m ml al ct Figure 2 5 Use the Preferences dialog box to manage CircuitMaker settings Basic CKT File Management This section explains the basic CircuitMaker file management procedures Starting Saving amp Closing a CKT File The features you will use most often are New Save and Save As 1 Choose File gt New to start a new file 2 Choose File gt Save if you ve already established a filename Or Choose File gt Save As to give the file a filename This is the way to copy a CKT file Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 41 2 42 3 Choose File gt Close gt Yes to save and exit a CKT file without exiting CircuitMaker OR Choose File gt Exit gt Yes to exit CircuitMaker and save your work Opening and Re Opening a CKT File 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Select the file with CKT extension that you want to open then choose Open You can open any of the last 8 CKT files you ve had open 1 Choose File gt Reopen 2 Select the file you want to reopen Rev
363. tual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 1 5 150 of typical internal resistance Scale factor used to determine maximum supply current minimum internal resistance when actual value is not specified in SimCode model Default 0 5 50 of typical internal resistance Temporary global override for propagation delay index on SimCode devices O default 1 min 2 typ 3 max Default 0 Temporary global override for transition time index on SimCode devices O default 1 min 2 typ 3 max Default 0 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics 15 255 LDMNTYMX DRVMNTYMX IMNTYMX SIMWARN RSHUNT ADCSTEP 15 256 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Temporary global override for input loading index on SimCode devices O default 1 min 2 typ 3 max Default 0 Temporary global override for output drive capacity index on SimCode devices O default 1 min 2 typ 3 max Default 0 Temporary global override for supply current index on SimCode devices O default 1 min 2 typ 3 max Default 0 A nonzero value indicates that SimCode warning messages can be displayed during run time SimCode warnings may include information concerning timing violations tsetup thold trec tw etc or indicate supply voltage dropping below device specifications Default 0 Value in ohms of resistors added between each circuit node and ground helping to eliminate problems such as singular matrix errors In g
364. two coupled inductors and VALUE is the coefficient of coupling K which must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1 Using the dot convention place a dot on the first node of each inductor indicating that the voltages at these node are in phase the voltages go up and down together If more than two inductors are being coupled SPICE data must be provided for each coupling For example a trans former with one primary coil L1 and two secondary coils L2 and L3 might be expressed as follows L1 5 0 10MH L2 6 7 1MH L3 8 9 1MH K12 Ll L2 0 93 RAS dl 30 93 K237 T20 L3 0 97 The turns ratio for a given pair of windings can be deter mined by the following formula where LP and LS are the 15 260 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics inductance of the primary and secondary windings respec tively Turns Ratio sqrt LS LP See Also Transformers example circuit VTPWRAMP CKT Voltage Current Controlled Switches General Form SXXXXXXX N N NC NC MODEL lt ON gt lt OFF gt WXXXXXXX N N VNAM MODEL lt ON gt lt OFF gt Netlist Examples Sl 12 3 4 SVS1 V gt Switch S25 6 3 0 svs2 ON V gt Switch Wl 1 2 VS1 WIS1 I gt Switch Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 4 SM ON Nodes 1 and 2 are the nodes between which the switch terminals are connected ON OFF indicates the initial condition of the switch For the voltage controlled switch nodes 3 and 4 are the positive and negative controlling no
365. ubcircuits located near the bottom of the list see Figure 3 10 and click the Select button Click the Netlist button Set the Designation field to U1 set it to be visible and then click OK Double click the top V device Set the Label Value field to 12V and visible set the Designation field to Vec and visible set the Device field to NOT visible then click OK Double click the bottom V device 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 aL pd ali misg E n e ea SETT pa peca L TIE Sed Loa Peers Capa ETA al Thee ono Decade o piar Bl Figure 3 10 Use the Subcircuit Selections dialog box to select a specific model such as the UA741 Set the Label Value field to 12V and visible set the Designation field to Vee and visible set the Device field to NOT visible then click OK Click and drag the labels so they are positioned as shown on the schematic in Figure 3 9 Double click each resistor to change both its Label Value and its Designation and make them visible Set them up as follows Resistor Label Value Designation Input 10k RI Feedback 100k RF Load 25k RL Double click the Signal Generator Set Peak Amplitude to 0 1V and the frequency to 10kHz Click the Wave button in the Signal Generator Enable the Source check box for AC Analysis set Magnitude to 0 1 V and Phase to 0 and then click OK You can now use the Signal Generator as a reference for the AC analysis Click the Netlist butt
366. uits those that contain no Signal Generators or reactive de vices only Operating Point Analysis is enabled For more complex circuits Transient Analysis is also enabled and the default start stop and step settings are used DC Analysis DC Sweep The DC Analysis generates output like that of a curve tracer It performs an Operating Point Analysis at each of a series of steps defining a DC transfer curve Source Name is the name of an independent power source either a fixed voltage or current supply or a Signal Generator that is to be stepped in the circuit The start stop and step values define the sweep range and resolution The primary source is required while the secondary source is optional If a secondary source is specified the primary source is stepped over its entire range for each value of the secondary source To set up and run a DC Analysis 1 Choose Simulation gt Analyses Setup 2 Click the DC button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 8 DC Analysis Setup x MV Enabled Primary MV Enable Secondary Source Name n ke m Start Value f700 0m pro Stop Value puso ETS Step Value 2000m prono Cancel Figure 6 8 The DC Analysis Setup dialog box 3 Specify the settings you want select the Enabled check box and then choose OK 4 Run the simulation Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 133 M0 ie Ma 1 4E0 asb 160 0 Le Te owm ed 5 570 r Teya leas OS L
367. us For example suppose you have several op amps that you want to connect to VCC in a single net but you do not want to run wires everywhere In this case you can use one normal V device and multiple terminal devices Wire the V device to one op amp and wire a Terminal device to the each of the other op amps Enter VCC in the Bus Data field of the V device s Edit Device Data dialog box see Bus Data in the Edit Device section later in this chapter Enter VCC not VCC in the Terminal Name field for each of the Terminal devices This use of terminal devices instead of multiple V devices gives you a single net for the netlist SPICE or PCB You can double click on a Terminal device to edit its name When you click the OK button CircuitMaker automatically copies the Terminal Name field to the Terminal s Bus Data field in the Edit Device Data dialog box and appends a semicolon The Terminal Name field is also copied to the Label Value field If for some reason you want to edit the Bus Data field or Label Value field directly click the Netlist button make the desired changes click OK and then click Cancel on the Edit Terminal Name dialog box Normally entering the Terminal name in the Edit Terminal Name dialog box should suffice Chapter 4 Drawing and Editing Schematics This is a device label Labeling the Circuit CircuitMaker offers several methods of labeling the circuit including the Text Tool and editing the devic
368. uto Refresh tddi 12 1 Device Designations coccconocccccnnncncnnnoncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnn 12 1 PO VN AEE E E E A D 12 2 SOE SOW WOON cas 12 2 Show Pin Dots a ox ceding vee eee sine pda a 12 2 Show B s Labels a ii 12 3 Show Page Breaks snssincnnc cala 12 3 Moveable Page Breaks c cscsesscssssssscsscsscsececcecsseseesecsessesecsecsesatcessesseseeeateaes 12 3 Show Node Numbers sis 12 3 Show Prop Delays vosasis aassacsccnstnpuitenuuitiagedteundddiunedsteaptensstausausies 12 3 Device Display Data cooooononocccnncnccnnononcccncccnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnn 12 4 Circuit Display Data ancccncioido intra 12 4 A ites ete eae ae acetic ond eee eee 12 5 A ema ceo iE 12 5 DOM usarios te 12 7 Chapter 13 View 8 Window Menus View MenU A A ati 13 1 TO io iia ind ea id 13 1 e A PP E eeteeeees 13 1 A 13 2 Normal Size POSition o oonnnninnnnicnnncnnnnncrn cnn cora ronca cnn aan carr arn rancia 13 3 Fit Circuit to WiINGOW ooconcnnicnnnnnininnnnnonanono nana ro narran anni rr 13 3 Refresh Screen ccccccscccscccscssscssssssscseussascsessesseesssusceusseaseussenseeessusseansesseeusensauss 13 3 A O A 13 3 Cascade WiNdOWS coonconncnninnoconinonininnninn nara c anna nn ano nann canon narran naar narrar ninas 13 3 Tile WANG OWS id ii dd vias 13 3 WIN IWS Sii da id 13 3 Contents xvi Chapter 14 Simulation Menu Digital Analog Mode uva coli 14 1 Analyses SetuP et isis 14 1 o A a ery coroner e
369. val STATE Q ONE ZERO STATE QN EXIT END DRIVE Q QN 2500 4mA 2 typical MIN_TYP_MAX i_param CircuitMaker PRO only voh_param 0 4 0 4mA 10 5k NULL NULL 10 5k 1250 8mA 2 max NULL 2500 1250 initialize output states vO vol_param vl voh_param ttlh tt_val tthl tt_val LOAD PRE_LD DATA_LD CLK_LD CLR_LD v0 vol_param r0 ril_val vl voh_param rl rih_val io 1e9 t 1p OEXT_TABLE tblIndex PRE CLR CLK DATA 0 1 XxX X PROP rPROO x gt xX xx KK ON L H H DATA Q MESSAGE Sfs tSd tSd tSd tSd tsd t d present_time PRE CLR CLK DATA Q ON LOAD VCC_LD SETUP_HOLD CLK LH DATA Ts ts_val Th th_val RECOVER CLK LH PRE CLR Trec trec_val WIDTH CLK Twl clk_twl Twh c1k_twh WIDTH PRE CLR Twl pre_clr_twl OIF warn_param THEN BEGIN IF PRE amp amp CLR BEGIN END END DELAY Q QN CASE TRAN_LH CASE TRAN_HL END EXIT THEN vO0 gnd_param r0 ricc_val t 1p CLK gt DATA CLK gt PRE or CLR CLK PRE or CLR tplh_val tphl_val Chapter 17 Digital SimCode 17 323 CircuitMaker PRO only Editing Device Data for SimCode Devices Each device symbol includes netlist information specific to the device found in the Edit Device Data dialog box For Digital SimCode devices the information required is slightly different from other analog devices For example the Spice Data field must contain data not found in othe
370. ve node and N is the negative node MNAME is the model name AREA is the area factor and OFF indicates an optional starting condition on the device for Operating Point Analysis The initial condition specifica tion using IC VD only applies if the UIC option is enabled for the Transient Analysis The TEMP value is the tempera ture at which this device is to operate and overrides the temperature specification in the Analog Options dialog See Also Diode Zener Diode example circuit PS1 CKT Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Bipolar Junction Transistors BJTs General Form OXXXXXXX NC NB NE lt NS gt MNAME lt AREA gt lt OFF gt lt IC VBE VCE gt lt TEMP T gt Netlist Example 05 11 26 4 Q2N3904 IC 0 6 5 0 03 52 69 ONPN 67 Spice Data Example SD 1 2 3 SM 67 OFF NC NB and NE are the collector base and emitter nodes respectively NS is the optional substrate node if unspeci fied the ground is used MNAME is the model name AREA is the area factor and OFF indicates an optional starting condition on the device for Operating Point Analysis The initial condition specification using IC VBE VCE only applies if you have enabled UIC for the Transient Analysis TEMP is the temperature at which this device operates and overrides the specification in the Analog Options dialog See Also NPN Trans PNP Trans example circuit CEAMP CKT Junction Field Effect Transistors JFETs General Form JXXXXXXX ND NG NS MN
371. veform and analysis windows appear on the screen 2 Click and select the waveform window that you want to export 3 Choose File gt Export gt Waveforms as Graphic Select the name of the file where you want to save the circuit graphic then choose Save OR Choose Edit gt Copy to Clipboard gt Waveforms then open another Windows program and Paste the wave form directly into your document Exporting Circuits as Graphics You can export CircuitMaker circuit schematics and use them in documentation presentations etc You can either save the circuit as a graphic file or copy and paste the circuit directly into another software program Use the Export Circuit as Graphic option to save the circuit to disk as a Windows Metafile Device Independent Bitmap or Device Dependent Bitmap Use the Export Options dialog box described earlier to choose the format Chapter 7 Exporting Files To export the circuit as a graphic 1 Choose File gt Export gt Circuit as Graphic Select the name of the file where you want to save the circuit graphic then choose Save OR Choose Edit gt Copy to Clipboard gt Circuit then open another Windows program and Paste the circuit directly into your document Exporting a SPICE Netlist A SPICE netlist is intended for simulation For more informa tion see Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation and Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Use the SPICE netlist NET option to create
372. version of CircuitMaker and have created your own macro devices or symbols follow these steps 1 Install the new version of CircuitMaker as described earlier Be sure to install the new version into a different directory to avoid writing over your existing work 2 Runthe BTOA file conversion utility 3 Select File gt Convert Library Open the USER LIB file from your previous CircuitMaker directory Save the new file as USERLIB ASC 4 Run CircuitMaker 5 Select Macros gt Convert ASCII Library Load the file USERLIB ASC that you just created Save the new file as NEWUSER LIB 6 Select Macros gt Macro Copier 7 Open the NEWUSER LIB file as the Copy From file When asked if you want to list only the user defined devices click Yes 8 Open the USER LIB file from your new CircuitMaker directory as the Copy To file 9 Select the first device that you created and click on the Copy button Repeat for each additional device that you have created Each device copied will be placed in the new USER LIB file You may be prompted for informa tion regarding the simulation mode for which a device is intended If the device can be used in digital simula tions check the Digital box if it can be used in analog simulations check the Analog box If it can be used in either simulation mode check both boxes Chapter 1 Welcome to CircuitMaker 1 24 Note Importing of bitmaps and unconverted metafiles is no longer supported for creatin
373. ves the new macro in the file USER LIB and clears the workspace To use the new macro simply select it from the device library and use it just as you would any other device Figure 16 6 You must specify the Major and Minor Device Classes under which your macro will be shown in the Device Selection dialog box Expanding an Existing Macro Device Expanding a macro device lets you modify the device s symbol the default netlist attributes and add or edit any internal circuitry Chapter 16 Creating New Devices 16 291 To expand an existing macro device 1 Place the macro you want to expand in the drawing area 2 Select the macro by clicking it once with the Arrow Tool 3 Click the Macro button on the Toolbar or choose Macros gt Expand Macro OR Double click the macro device Notice that the workspace clears and the dialog box shown in Figure 16 7 appears Edit Macro x M Show Macro Name macro name Parts Per Package fl Netlist Symbol E I Cancel Figure 16 7 Use this dialog box to specify what part of the macro device you want to edit 4 Ifyou want type a new name for the macro Saving a macro under a new name does not delete the old macro device 5 Use the Parts Per Package option to change the number of parts that would be found in a single IC package Note Use this option only when creating a new device 6 Click the Netlist button to display the Edit Device Data dialog
374. wave Damping Factor THETA A positive value results in an exponentially decreasing amplitude a negative value results in an exponentially increasing amplitude Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 167 Editing AM Signal Data Click the AM Signal button to display the dialog box 1 1 pictured in Figure 6 41a Use this dialog box to set the a i parameters of the single frequency AM waveform v i ia DC Offset VO Adjust the DC bias of the signal generator with respect to the negative terminal usually ground measured in volts or amps Edit AM Signal Data Figure 6 41a Use this dialog box to edit an AM signal Peak Amplitude VA Maximum amplitude of the output swing excluding the DC Offset measured in volts or amps Carrier Frequency F Frequency of the unmodulated output in hertz Modulation Index MDI Value corresponding to the percentage of amplitude modula tion 1 100 0 5 50 etc Signal Frequency F Frequency of the modulating signal in hertz 6 168 Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 1 1v Editing FM Signal Data Click the FM Signal button to display the dialog box pictured in Figure 6 41b Use this dialog box to set the parameters of the single frequency FM waveform The waveform is described by the following formula where t instance of time V VO VA sin 2pF t MDI sin 2pF t DC Offset VO Adjust the DC bias of the signal generator with respect to th
375. ween wires and devices will be shown by a small dot where the connection occurs If Show Pin Dots is not checked the connecting dots will not be drawn Dots showing where wires connect to other wires are always displayed Show Bus Labels This option displays bus labels numbers by putting a small numbered box at the end of each bus wire and also shows the number of each bus connection wire next to the corresponding bus connection Show Page Breaks This option displays the page divisions of a multi page circuit when it is sent to the printer The Show Page Breaks option is also useful when positioning a circuit on a single page The page breaks you see on your screen are based on the printer selection paper size and scaling factor Moveable Page Breaks Click and drag a page break to move it When the cursor is over a page break it will change to a double ended arrow indicating which direction you can move the page break see Figure 12 5 for an example of the double ended arrow page break cursor Move a horizontal page break up and down Move a vertical page break left and right Moving any page break changes the print scale both horizontally and verti cally When moving a page break the print scale is displayed where the schematic window s title usually appears Show Node Numbers This option displays the node number for each node in your circuit The number is shown at the center of the longest wire segment of each node
376. whenever the student e Clicks the Circuit Fault Data button in the Preferences dialog box e Clicks the Faults button in the Edit Device Data dialog box e Double clicks a device if Device Data Display has been checked in the Circuit Faults dialog box Access Faults x Password Replace Device l il Display Hint Cancel Figure 8 2 The Access Faults dialog box appears whenever a password has been set and the student tries to perform certain actions If Replace Device has not been disabled in the Circuit Faults dialog box the student can click on this button to replace a device This disables the fault data for the device but does not actually delete the fault data If Replacement Status has not been disabled in the Circuit Faults dialog box a message will then be displayed indicat ing whether the replaced device was good or faulty Disable Replacement Status from the Circuit Faults dialog box If Display Hint has not been disabled in the Circuit Faults dialog box the student can click on the Display Hint button to view any hint the instructor has provided for that device The instructor can see how many devices were replaced and how many hints were displayed all from the Circuit Faults dialog box The instructor can also enter the password to gain access to the Device Faults or Circuit Faults dialog box Chapter 8 Fault Simulation 8 193 Managing Circuit Faults Use the Circuit Faults dialog box
377. where the capacitors are already charged Since you want to see the capacitor charging from time zero you must set the initial condition of the capacitor to OV 1 Using the Delete Tool on the Toolbar delete the second resistor the one connected to ground and the wire leading to it Replace the resistor with a Capacitor Passive Compo nents Capacitors c Select an IC device Analog SPICE Controls I and connect it to the wire between the resistor and capaci tor This will set an initial condition of OV on the capacitor for the analysis Your circuit should now look like the one pictured in Figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 By replacing the resistor with the capaci tor you can create a simple RC circuit to see the charging of the capacitor Run the simulation again by clicking the Run button on the Toolbar This time the Transient Analysis window similar to an oscilloscope appears Click the Transient Analysis window to select it and then click with the tip of the Probe Tool between the resistor and capacitor Notice a diagonal line across the scope This is actually the beginning of the charge curve for the capacitor Your view of the curve is limited by start and stop times of the Transient Analysis that were selected by default You now have the option of changing the Transient Analysis settings to increase the size of the time segment that you can view with the scope or you can reduce the component values so the c
378. ys data and waveforms using Analysis windows which allow you to quickly and easily test analyze and probe your circuits during simulation Many attributes of the Analysis windows can be changed to customize your view of the waveforms There are also features within the Analysis windows that allow you to precisely measure the waveforms you are viewing When you run a simulation CircuitMaker displays a separate analysis window for each of the following types of analyses that you enable e DC curve tracer e AC Bode plotter e Transient oscilloscope e Fourier spectrum analyzer e Operating Point multimeter e Transfer Function e Noise Chapter 6 Analog Mixed Signal Simulation 6 125 6 126 For more information on these analyses see Setting Up Analog Analyses later in this chapter Figure 6 3 shows an example of an analysis window TA TO Peg j GLi A 11 15 Tu Tate TE is Situ FafeGromd Feld huir Tera laa Figure 6 3 The Transient Analysis window Displaying Waveforms Once you have run a simulation you can quickly view data waveforms at any point s in the circuit using CircuitMaker s context sensitive Probe Tool To plot data waveforms in an analysis window first choose the appropriate analysis window by clicking somewhere in it so that it is active then 1 Click any valid point in the circuit with the tip of the Probe Tool See the Probe Tool section earlier in this chapter for informa
379. ysis in the Analyses Setup dialog box Begin with step 1 then consider the recommendations as needed to solve the error Solving Operating Point Analysis Failures 1 Check the circuit topology and connectivity specifi cally e Make sure the circuit is correctly wired Dangling nodes and stray parts are not allowed The RSHUNT option can be used to overcome these problems e Don t confuse zeros with the letter O Use proper SPICE multipliers MEG instead of M for 1E 6 e Don t puta space between values and multipliers 1 0uF not 1 0 uF e Every circuit must have a ground node and every node in the circuit must have a DC path to ground Make sure no sections of your circuit are isolated from ground by transformers capacitors etc e Do not use series capacitors or current sources e Do not use parallel inductors or voltage sources Make sure all devices and sources are set to their proper values Make sure all dependent source gains are correct Make sure your models subcircuits have been correctly entered 15 246 Chapter 15 SPICE Beyond the Basics Increase ITL1 to 300 in the Analog Options dialog box This will allow the OP Analysis to go through more iterations before giving up Add NODESET devices If the initial guess of a node voltage is way off the NODESET device can be used to set it to a more realistic value see NODESET later in this chapter Add resistors and use the OFF keyword

CircuitMaker User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents